Home

GSK983Ta User Manual

1. OFX tool offset along X axis OFZ Tool offset along Z axis The distance which from base point to tool nose is regarded as tool offset value U It is equivalent to the start on the imagination tool nose When the tool center is machined on the starting point If tool nose radius compensation is not performed the If tool nose radius compensation is applied the cutting should be accurately performed tool nose center path is same with the programmed path Programmed path Programmed path II When imaginary tool nose is machined on the starting point If tool nose compensation is not applied the If tool nose compensation is applied the cutting SON ote Hebe Compensation start Imagery ae eer ee x tool nose EN path O Programmed path Programmed path 68 Chapter 2 Programming 2 6 3 2 Imaginary Tool Nose Direction The imaginary tool nose direction is determined by the tool direction which is performed from the tool nose center so it should be reset with the compensation value The imaginary tool nose direction is as follows there are 8 kinds of selections using their corresponding codes These figures indicate the relations between tool nose and starting point the arrows indicate these imaginary tool noses Note that the same tool nose direction in different tool post system front tool post and rear tool post means different tool nose direction Fr
2. Incremental Specifying the distance from U distance of X axis l U20 0 W 40 0 command start to end points W distance of Z axis 19 QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Program origin Note 1 Absolute command and incremental command are shared with the same block the above example can be specified by the following command X40 0 W 40 0 Note 2 When X and U or W and Z are shared with the same block the later specified is enabled O D Q O r 7 NO U Q Q 3 2 3 8 Specifying Diameter and Radius Usually the cross section of workpiece is round when NC turning machine is programming so two specifying dimension methods including diameter and radius values can be employed X axis nore pet Z axis py When the diameter is specified it is referred to as diameter command when the radius is D1 D2Diameter command R1 R2 Radius command specified it is referred to as radius command The radius program can be performed when the radius command is selected when the diameter command is employed some items should be noticed in the following table Command of Z axis Specifying diameter or radius irrelative CommandofXaxis of X axis Specifying with diameter with diameter esai ol diameter value from B to A D1 to D2 in Incremental command by using address U
3. Q Q 3 3 Programmed path Tool nose center path CII Arc linear Programmed path Tool nose center path IV Arc arc Programmed path w Tool nose center path d Exceptions I End position for the arc is not on arc that is to make the end point of a down lead of the arc 88 Chapter 2 Programming as the arc end to program incorrectly see the following figure Imaginary arc a S S V PAPET Arc end y Leading line of arc end 2 Programmed path gt gt gt 0 A 4 ie S E ee R e A ANNAN J Ly r lt Tool nose center path v IA a L T Center An imaginary arc is supposed in NC of above figure and vector compensation is performed according to imaginary arc So tool path is different from the compensation path of the parallel extension line of arc end Same concept can be employed to the occasion of arc to arc Il No intersection In the following figure when the tool nose radius offset value is small the arc offset path QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo intersection P occurs when the value is large there is no intersection and the tool stops at the end of previous block and the No 033 alarm occurs An alarm occur and the operation stops When the tool nose radius is long S 2 Se en ss ee cs acs a cs a When the tool nose radius is short Programmed i path If the radius is small
4. c Press to enter the parameter interface d Press parameter number to be set input The interface to set the parameter number is selected and the base color of the parameter data is changed into yellow with the page keys and the cursor keys tl can also make it which is shown as the following figure NC PARAMETER P06 00006 N0003 NO 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 0100 data para Time constant of exponential acceleration deceleration in manual feeding for i aris LSK EDIT 15 19 33 e Set with P setting data Press key when the input is wrong f Confirm whether the setting is correct g After all the parameters are set and confirmed the parameter switch is OFF h Press reset button to clear the alarm state NO 100 If itis in the emergency stop state release it E5 3 List of Parameters List of parameter numbers Content number 0024 0026 0027 0028 0031 0032 Minimum limited value of VLOC 0035 0036 M codes of non buffer 0037 Spindle motor rotary speed when the spindle gear is changed 0038 Spindle rotate speed during the spindle exact stop 0040 The allowance value of the limit check in the external tool compensation gt O D S Q x oO U A S D r D T 298 Appendix 5 Parameters lI B function 0041 0056 Data override of the outer dimension measurement of the external tool nose c
5. 02 0 1 mm The cutting depth along X axis direction is 0 1 inch cutting twice GOO X1 2 G32 X4 1 W 5 3 F0 35 GOO X5 0 W5 3 X1 0 G32 X3 9 W 5 3 G00 X5 0 W5 3 For example 5 5 1 3 accurate thread cutting Specify the thread lead can be accurate thread cut with E code inch input diameter programming X axis 7 inch _ Thread lead 0 846667 inch Al O D Q O r D N U Q Q 3 D Q Gr maz GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 1 0 3 inch O02 0 15 inch Cutting depth 0 1 inch cutting twice G00 U 2 9 G32 W 7 45 E0 846667 inch U2 9 W7 45 U 3 1 Cut to 0 1 inch for 2 cutting G32 W 7 45 G00 U3 1 W7 45 Note 1 E code is only enabled when thread cutting Note 2 If E and F share the same block the latter one is valid Note 3 Feedrate modification is disabled during thread cutting it is fixed on 100 Note 4 whether the thread cutting is enabled or not in Dry run is set by parameter 8 0 Note 5 It is very dangerous to stop thread cutting feed when the spindle not stops So the feedhold is disabled during thread cutting if the feedhold is applied in cutting the tool stops after the block of thread cutting is finish it is the same as pressed the single block button Therefore when the button on the machine operator panel is pressed the feedhold indicator light is ON And when the tool finishes the current cutting and stops
6. g Ch Ci j Input input then the calculated Z offset amount is input into the specified offset Cut face B in Manual mode Rest After pressing OO button on the machine operation panel the tool leaves face B and the spindle is stopped Measure the diameter value a on face B Input then the calculated Z offset amount is input into the specified offset 25 gt Q O r K O O 5 Q a 5 ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual k As the above figure shows B value is measured as 100 a value is 50 and its value is input OFFSET into the 6 digits of the offset number the method is press for several times and GEOM press to input 6 to input 100 to INPUT input 50 finally press which is shown as the following figure switch into the interface TO_OUTLINE_OFFSET PO NO X R Go1 000 000 000 000 000 000 coz 000 000 000 000 000 000 cos 000 000 000 000 000 000 cot 000 000 000 000 000 000 cos 000 000 000 000 000 000 coe 050 000 100 000 000 000 elelololololol LSK 14 56 58 LSK s ee MDI 14 56 58 D ee Note 1 Normally use the diameter value to measure X axis Note 2 When N or the letters on the screen lower left corner are twinkling the tool offset value can t be operated zero clear and incremental input Only after inputting NO N is cancelled or the letters on the screen
7. set compensation range is 0 7 The setting beyond the range is inactive Setting unit 0 001 mm metric 0 0001 inch inch Use diameter if X axis is commanded by diameter This value can be multiplied by 1 2 4 8 by parameter No 24 gt go ge eD Q Xx 0 Op r 5 Q OQ eD a go eD Y rm 9 mMm e i O e go eD mD Op Lad mD gt E mD a e mD 354 Appendix 8 Storage Type Pitch Error Compensation Function H8 4 Examples of Parameter Setting 1 Pitch error origin O compensation interval 10000 0 1 2 3 127 Setting CC t ba gt Powe A 7 6 4 2 Machine coordinate a system 10000 20000 30000 1270000 Reference point The beginning of the compensation list corresponds to the reference point while compensation point 1 corresponds to the point by 10000 from the reference point in the positive direction After that every 10000 point corresponds to a compensation point So the compensation point 128 is set at 1270000 i e The compensation for the travel from 0 to 10000 is set at compensation point 1 while that from 10000 to 20000 is set at compensation point 2 and that from n 1 x compensation interval corresponds to nx compensation interval is set at compensation point n In the above example the zone O 10000 setto 7 Compensation value 10000 20000 setto 6 Compensation value 20000 300
8. vo command normally tool nose radius R offset in the center path is applied and the direction is reversed to the programmed path The initial vector is disabled at that time It is lineal movement to the 2 vector and it is stopped when moving with single block The automatic operation continues when a single block does not employ And also it will not alarm when commanding with line Here the offset is correct But cutting allowance occurs Linear movement Stop point for single block operation Tool center path Sao ie a lt LL Are machine alee arc The initial vector is ignored The overcutting is not generated because the initial vector is ignored but the movement along with arc does not execute 2 6 4 Details for Tool nose radius Compensation 2 6 4 1 Offset Vector for Tool Nose R Center Tool nose R center offset vector is two dimensional and it is equal to the offset vector specified by T code and also it is calculated in the NC system Its direction changes along with the tool 81 O D Q O r 7 NO U Q Q 3 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual movement corresponding to two blocks This offset vector it is called vector for short in the following is generated by the tool path which is with precision offset and calculated by program path inside the control unit it is regarded as appropriate offset the vector is deleted by resetting
9. 000 000 000 000 wos 000 000 000 000 000 000 wor 000 000 000 000 000 000 wos 000 000 000 000 000 000 LSK 44 MDI 14 53 32 e ege Display of the offset amount on the 1 page Searching the offset number Move the cursor to the position of the offset number to be rewritten Method 1 Press ba and il keys the cursor is moved in order and it is moved into the next page if it exceeds one page INPUT Method 2 After inputting offset number press Select in any mode Input the offset amount INPUT Input X Z R or T offset amount press key INPUT X or Z offset amount press key Input the absolute value of X axis or Z axis offset amount INPUT R offset amount press key Input the absolute value of the tool nose R offset amount INPUT T offset amount ee press key the assumed tool nose number Example Input at the offset number W04 display o R E which is shown as the following figure Chapter 4 Operation TO_WEAR OFFSET POI NO X R wot 000 000 000 000 000 000 wo2 f 000 000 000 000 000 000 wos 000 000 000 000 000 000 wos 000 000 001 000 001 000 wos 000 000 000 000 000 000 wos 000 000 000 000 000 000 2 2 oss 0 o o 7 LSK k 14 54 31 ee Note 1 The value of the tool wearing offset is limited by NC parameters 388 and 358 Note 2 Input only when the letters on the lower right corner don
10. In skip function command In skip function command G31 feedrate G31 feedrate is FL set by is specified by F code parameter no 342 332 Appendix 5 Parameters When program is being saved program closure in memory M02 M03 M99 are not program closure TMCR T code used in user macro T code can t be called program Tool position compensation Tool position compensation always valid valid in blocks with move commands Parameter Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit O No or Four Ase stow r oo 2 Description Seto 0 FCUT In compound fixed cycle G 71 G72 In compound fixed cycle G71 G72 finish machining doesnt be finish machining be performed in performed in rough machining rough machining ABIC ABS INC key is valid when X or Z ABS INC key is invalid when X or Z key input in MDI and special G code key input in MDI and special G code B or C used B or C used SLOW S 4 bit code and 12 bit binary code S 4 bit code and 12 bit binary code output or low speed clamping output or low speed clamping position of analog output is valid to position of analog output is valid to all gears gears respectively OTCS Machine tool immediately stops Machine tool decelerates and stops when mobile parts have touched when mobile parts have touched machine limit switch machine machine limit switch machine position is lost position isn t lost DIOM Description a Set to 1 Set to 0
11. Press l l l l Display interface of external alarm information wice Press Display interface of current block command once Pi IEE Nr AT VANU Press l l Display interface of program restart twice Press oo om Display interface of NC diagnosis information once Press Display interface of tool lifetime management twice Press p Display interface of figure menu once Press p s Display interface of drawing twice Shani Wait for the external data sending internal apter j interruption level is the highest and the other function one keys are invalid Chapter Send the system data to outside the interruption level is one the highest and the other function keys are invalid Note Press A with some function button meanwhile to cancel the interface display and then press the other function button to display the corresponding interface Introduction of other keys in MDI keypad Reset key Press this key to reset CNC and clear the alarm 231 uonejodgQ py sideuy Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Input key After pressing the address key or the numerical key the input data just display on the screen and are in the buffer INPUT After pressing this key these data are read into the memory Press cancel key to cancel the data in the buffer from the CANCEL last character Edit keys The three keys can be executed the replace insert and delete ALTER INSERT DELETE Some
12. Self diagnosis function The system alarms when the memory is abnormal The system alarms when ROM and RAM are abnormal The system alarms when the microprocessor is abnormal 3 On line state a Display NC state on LCD b Display I O state on LCD Display PLC state on LCD Min input unit 0 001mm 0 0001inch Setting unit 197 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 0 001mm 0 0001inch Here X axis is the diameter programming the radius programming can be selected the minimum input increment can be input in 0 01mm in metric system which are set by parameters ia Max commanded value E 9999 9999inch ee nmoah ame e aa m 10 poemaro The values with the decimal point can be input The addresses X Z U W 10 Decimal input l K R E and F can be with the decimal point The maximum rapid feedrate override can reach 60 000mm min or 2400 Q 7 Pandrea inch min set by parameters Q The rapid feedrate override can be rewritten into FO F25 selectable 50 T 100 m Spindle speed function The spindle speed can be specified by two digits after address S s 2 S2 digits 7 Spindle speed function The spindle speed the standard configuration is set before dispatch can be E S4 digits specified by four digits after address S Tool function The tool selection and the tool offset are specified by two or four digits after D 14 T2 digits address T S a T4 digits Miscellaneous function The ON OFF si
13. fh 2 Programmed path Bs Tool nose center path CII Arc linear 85 O D Q O r 7 NO U Q Q 3 Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Programmed path RENEE lool nose center path m Fi d Intersection IV Arc arc F as a 5 a Intersection G fc Programmed path Tool nose center path l CV Offset vector is magnified abnormally when the machining is executed at inner side of acute angle a lt 1 I Linear linear Offset vector Programmed path The following cases do the same ways CII Arc linear CHI Linear arc IV Arc arc Cb Tool movement along outer side of obtuse angle 90 sa lt 180 Linear linear 86 Chapter 2 Programming Programmed path E Tool nose center path a Intersection L ER CII Linear arc gt Q D E 7 a X K L gt e E Intersection g S a 5 3 GN 2 L i Programmed path Tool nose center path CII Arc linear Programmed path Tool nose center path Intersection L CIV Arc arc i Programmed path Tool nose center path Cc Tool movement along outer side of acute angle a lt 90 87 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual I Linear linear Programmed path Tool nose center path II Linear arc O D Q O p 0 NO U om
14. ii In Auto mode the cycle start is operated to run the program The data is saved into the tool lifetime data area of the memory meanwhile the previous registered tool lifetime data of each group are all cleared And the tool lifetime counter is also cleared Once the data are registered they will not be cleared even the power supply is cut off The following is the practical example of the format 192 Chapter 2 Programming 00001 G10L3 PO1L0150 T1101 T0203 Setting data of group 1 T0504 PO2L0100 T1205 T1307 Setting data of group 2 T0915 T0712 PO3L0050 T0808 Setting data of group 3 T1514 G11 M02 O gt D r D 9 N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 vo Note 1 The tool group number specified by P may not be consecutive and the tools of all group numbers are not necessary to be set Note 2 The same tool number T can occur for many times in the setting data Note 3 The tool lifetime is displayed by frequency or time minute is set by the parameters 309 LCTM Note 4 The registered group number is 16 and 16 tools are saved in each group so totally 256 tools can be saved Note 5 In one machining process for one tool with more than two offset numbers the setting should be operated as below Meaning The tool of group 4 can be used for 500 times minute based on the PO4L0500 sequence of 1 2 gt 3 T0101 T0105 1 In one machining process the same gro
15. sec Appendix 5 Parameters Appendix 5 Parameters When CNC is connected with the servo motor or CNC is connected with the machine the parameters should be set to play full role of the characteristics of the servo motor and the machine And the parameters are relative with the machine please refer to the parameter list provided by the machine manufacturer E5 1 Display of Parameters a Press b Two method of looking up the parameters Method A Press key the interface is paged up Press key the interface is paged down Method B Press parameter number to be looked into to look up the corresponding parameters E5 2 Setting Parameters on the display panel to enter a Press interface and then press the extension key LJ on the small keypad below the screen avo SET and then press the softkey to enter into the miscellaneous setting interface and set the parameter switch as 1 press button it prompts the setting is done The following figure shows the parameter switch is ON and the parameter switch state still remains the one after power off MODE 0 0 C232 1 USB BaudRate 38400 StopBits 2 Parity Even ByteSize 7 gt O D 5 Q x oO U o s S D oa D s o REF Check 0 0 0FF 1 0N LSK EDIT 15 19 07 ee o e e Cb Select MDI mode or in the emergency stop state 297 SA pak E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual
16. siajawelied G xipueddy Other parameters Parameter No 1000 X axis pitch error compensation setting setting range O 7 unit 0 001mm 1127 2000 Z axis pitch error compensation setting setting range O t7 unit 0 001mm 2127 Description 340 Appendix 5 Parameters Consult the following Note1 Pitch error compensations are active at the end of return to reference point by all axes Compensation is inactive even parameter for pitch error compensation is set when reference return is not performed Parameter setting shall be made before reference point return The actual compensation is got by the parameter setting value multiplying compensation coefficient see parameter No 024 Note2 As PRM316 ACMR 1 any commanded detection override the unit of the pitch error compensation is detection unit The point intervals for pitch error are identical that each axis may be set for 128 compensation points 0 127 Comp point Comp point Comp point Comp point t ____ ___ __ _1 1 _ an Mea point Mea point gr Mea point j Mea point P Pitch error compensation interval The min interval for pitch error compensation is as following n 1 comp n comp n comp nt 2 comp point point point point Neg 2nd mea Neg lst mea E Pos Ist mea Pos 2nd mea point point point point When the pitch error is measured at the measuring points by parameter No 383 384 the intervals be
17. 29 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual G code with same function and standard G code are indicated in the following table G90 and G91 are different G90 indicates absolute command The used X and Z are same with standard X and Z in G90 mode and G91 indicates incremental command The used X and Z are same with standard U and W in G91 mode in special G codes But when the command is input in MDI mode in G90 G91 mode the address X and Z are indicated as absolute command U and W are indicated as incremental command Special G codes are employed the address U and W are same with standard time and they are indicated as incremental move distance also even if the G90 address is applied Standard G Special G Special G 2 o o Linear mee Linear interpolation cutting feed LA w feo Sd Arc Arcinterpolation CW T tsa L E E Arc Arcinterpolation CCW ES e aa E R G04 G04 eS 3 G20 G20 G20 Input in inch G21 G21 G21 Input in metric G22 Memory stroke limit ON 623 ia Memory stroke limit OFF a a ee as on oe ee ae ese te eee G31 G31 G31 SKIP function G32 G33 G33 Thread cutting in linear and taper G34 G34 G34 Leading thread cutting peers G42 G42 G42 Tool nose radius compensation Right G50 G92 G92 eo Coordinate system setting Spindle max speed setting User macro program non modal calling G66 i User macro program modal calling G67 G67 G67 User macro program modal
18. 362 Appendix 11 Interruption Function of User Macro Program Appendix 11 Interruption Function of User Macro Program K11 1 General During the execution of a program it is possible to call another program by inputting interruption signal at the machine side This is called interruption function of user macro program The interruption command in a program is as follows M96 Pxxxx user macro program interruption ON M97 user macro program interruption OFF By using this function it is possible to call another program on any program block being executed and start program operations in ever changing conditions Example of application 1 Start abnormal tool detection with external signal 2 Stop the currently performing machining and insert other machining in a series machining 3 The current machining information is read regularly It is also applicable for the adaptive control OAAAA M96 PXX XX Ox XXX Interruption signal Mee afi eck UINT Intetruption signal i UINT l M _ M99 P0000 oe oo H97 Interruption signal 2 UINT Fig 1 user macro program interruption After M96Pxxxx is commanded in program the currently executing program is interrupted to execute the program commanded by Pxxxx once interruption signal UINT is input The following interruption signal UINU during the execution of an interruption program and after M97 is inactive marked in the fig
19. 5 I The executing commanded values and the previously commanded modal values are displayed 239 Sr maz GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual CURRENT BLOCK 00001 NOOO X 5 GOI GGT T G97 G69 U M W L G23 I P 7 G98 K Q peed ini CG 1 E D by the constant C 4 0 F 500 A surface speed R 900 0 SMAX 000 Speed P SACT 00000 SG97 00006 by G96 G97 Actual rotation speed LSK 44 14 42 06 es T Note The numerical values after is the feedrate which the feedrate multiplied by the override CII Display the commanded value input from MDI or the commanded value to be executed gt Q O r K O O 0 x Q a 5 AME ru Eu r e SMA SON eX LSK 4 ack 14 42 48 Jc en Po III Display the next commanded value to be executed in the tool nose R compensation 240 Chapter 4 Operation QUEUED BLOCK 00001 NOOO Sedma e Sects EX FOO tras wm LSK 44 14 43 09 es T 4 4 8 Setting Function Setting 4 4 8 1 Input Output Other Display and Setting SETTING gt Q O P D O O aD mm Q ms 5 1 Press setting button 2 Press page button L 5 the following two situations are displayed and set 1 Setting and display the input and output SETTING DATA POI 0001 NOOQOQOI1 TV CHECK o 0 0FF 1 0N PUNCH CODE o O EIA 1 1SO INPUT UNIT lo O MM 1 INCH INPUT DEIVCE1 o
20. Ca Select Edit mode PROGRAM b Press to enter one of the interfaces program check or program content or program DELETE cc Input O 9 9 9 9 and then press 4 4 18 Searching the Sequence Number Searching the sequence number is to search one sequence number in the program and its purpose is to start from the block of the sequence number or execute it again During searching the skipped block doesn t affect NC that is to say the coordinate value of the skipped block and M S T and G codes won t change NC coordinate value and the modal value When the user macro is selected the sequence number N during research isn t displayed Therefore at the beginning of searching the sequence number or at the first block to be executed again specify M S T and G codes to set the coordinate system The block searched by the sequence number is always one break point in one process To start the block searched in the program it s necessary to check the machine and NC states specify M S T and G codes to set the coordinate system gt Q O P D O O x Q as 5 the target sequence number Search from ahead in the area only search in the program Selected program number a Select 8 mode Cb Select the program number of the sequence one to be searched 2 Selected program Te 263 gt Q O r K O O x Q a 5 ri GSK
21. Chapter 4 Operation resetting should be operated before rewriting the content in the memory with the edit function or resetting is executed after editing and then the program is executed 4 4 22 1 Scanning Scan one word each time 4 1 Press Lo Then the cursor is moved ahead along the characters on the screen The cursor points below the address character of the word kd 2 Press t 3 Press LJ or a all the time the searching can be operated continuously es then the cursor is moved based on each character in the opposite direction on the screen The cursor points below the address character of the word 4 Press the next page is displayed The searching is started from the head of this page 5 Press the previous page is displayed The searching is started from the head of this page 6 Press or all the time display page by page 4 4 22 2 Method of Searching a Word The method is used during searching the word N1234x100 0 Z125 0 S1234 N5678 M03 Searching scanning word displayed word To search 1234 Searching direction 1 Input Note 1 Just input S123 from the keypad 1234 can t be found Note 2 When S009 is searched just inputting S9 can t be found so S009 must be input 4 2 Press to start searching After searching ends the cursor points below S of 1234 4 4 22 3 Method of only Searching an Address From the present p
22. II Position display of the workpiece coordinate system CTUAL POSITION Th 100 00001 NO001 Z s 20 T0 90 110 X 94 888 Z 09 292 00 20 60 100 140 180 80 120 160 200 Aactual feedrate 00500 0 antl Spi_speed 0000 M code 00 Tool NO 00 Tool Offs NO OO RUNNING TIME OOOOH OOM 075 LSK 14 41 28 Jee a Automatic coordinate setting G50 programming coordinate system is displayed or the present value of the coordinate system is set by resetting shown as below 238 Chapter 4 Operation III Display the total position The current position of the following coordinate can be displayed meanwhile Ca Position of the relative coordinate system RELATIVE b Position of the absolute coordinate system ABSOLUTE c Position of the machine coordinate system MACHINE Cd Remaining distance DISTANCE TO GO ACTUAL POSITION ALL 00001 NO001 U 12 142 X 54 888 W 12 429 Z 69 292 X 0 000 0 000 Z 0 OOO 0 OOO Aactual feedrate 00500 0 Spi speed 0000 M code 00 Tool NO 00 Tool Offs NO 00 RUNNING OOOOH OOM O7S LSK 4 14 41 45 LSK see eee MDI Ma O O 1 ae ee Distance to go is the commanded movement amount not executed in one block 4 4 7 Display the Commanded Value COMMAND 1 Press the command button 2 Press the page button the following three situations are displayed gt Q O P iN 1 x Q ms
23. Movement axes of machine tool controlled by CNC system are called Controlled axes Each controlled axis is called by the controlling dimension word There are two controlled axes X and Z There are 2 simultaneous controlled axes are specified in a block Controlled axes Simultaneous controlled axes 2 3 1 1 Coordinate axis and movement sign If a machine tool offers multiple relations between machine tool coordinate axis and tool movement sign severe mess may occurs in a programming In order to simplify the programming and guarantee the versatility of the program the unified criterion EIARS 267 A amp IS0841 is applied for the coordinate system of CNC machine tool and direction name and the linear feed coordinate axes are indicated by X Y and Z they are normally called coordinate axes The relationships among X Y and Z are determined by the right hand rule see Fig 3 1 1 O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 X F Z A E PE Fig 3 1 1 Machine tool coordinate axis and direction A thumb direction is positive direction of X axis a forefinger is positive direction of Y and a middle finger is positive direction of Z Circle feed coordinate axes rotated around with the X Y and Z axes are separately indicated with A B and C in terms of the right hand rotation rule see the figure The thumb direction is X Y and Z and the direction of forefinger and middle finger are the circle feed moveme
24. Note 2 Inter lock stroke limit and outer deceleration are also effective to imaginary axis Note 3 The MPG interruption insert is also effective for imaginary axis this axis is executed as MPG interruption insert part Diagnosis 805 and 806 are separately the insert amount of X and Z axis 38 Chapter 2 Programming 2 5 7 Thread Cutting G32 G34 2 5 7 1 Linear Taper Thread Cutting G32 Function The straight taper and surface threads cutting can be performed by the command G32 ft fe Thy Straight threads Taper threads Surface threads Values followed with F and E are directly led to perform the thread cutting Thread cutting command as follows The coordinate position X Z in the workpiece coordinate system is specified the end point or it O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo is specified the distance from start to end points U W Format G32 X u Z w F G32 X u Z w E Lead length In general thread cutting is repeated along the same tool path including from rough cutting to finish cutting Since thread cutting starts when the position coder mounted on the spindle outputs a 1 turn signal so thread cutting is started at a fixed point Tool path on the workpiece is unchanged for repeated thread cutting Note that the spindle soeed must remain constant from rough cutting through finish cutting If not incorrect thread lead will occ
25. Reference position retum O Return from the reference position O The 2 reference position return O or ie Skip function O _Linear taper thread cutting B Changeable lead thread cutting O E Sn ae nL o enn Automatic tool compensation X O Tool nose R compensation cancel O 07 Tool nose R compensation left O Tool nose R compensation right O TRER ww u the spindle maximum speed Just calling the user macro O TAr DRE WLA Calling the custom macro modal O G67 Cancel calling the custom macro o modal G68 G68 G68 Double tool post mirror image a 43 connected G69 G69 G69 Double tool post mirror image za disconnected Finishing cycle O Outer dimension roughing cycle O End face roughing cycle CO _Closed loop cutting cycle ss O maiman er o deep hole drilling cycle Outer dimension groove cutting G75 G75 G77 cycle and outer dimension cutting cycle 676 GE GBT Thread cutting cyce O Cutting cycleA O 01 Thread cutting cycle O Cutting cycleB_ O 8 H oe SS S o Ere speed constant contfol_ _ i 2 Cancel circle speed constant control O o5 Eeed per minute F ae Feed per revolution B 320 L e S g soue command E Oo o oan Incremental command a 288 Appendix 2 List of G Codes B Basic function O Select function Note 1 Several G codes can be commanded in one block but only the last one is valid when the specified G codes are from
26. TOOT mon electronical gear ratio 2500ppr rev motor 983Ta Z axis parameter geoon 06160 ooo 0110001 PA42 eee Oe es rom TOT EEEE EEUN EZ mmo GD2000 drive electronical gear ratio PA41 PA42 Detailed introduction Set as 1 Set as 0 The input unit is not 1 10 307 sigjaweled G xipueddy Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Para Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit O NO Detailed introduction CS Set as 1 The time from sending M S and T codes to the end of sending MF SF 1F codes is 16 126ms 16ms as one interval TFIN The time of FIN signal receiving width is 16 256ms 16ms as one interval Ml code MERN Because X lt TFIN it is ignored TMF or TFIN 16x N 1 ms N 1 15 msec morethan t msec 0 o o 0 32mseo More than32msec o o o 1 P48 msec More than 48msec o 0 1 0 64msec More than amsec 0 0 1 1 Ta0msec More than80msec O 1 0 0 96msec More thang96msec o 1 0 1 j aa pola fa jo Sec S Ba S Sec ameet More than 144 m 1 sec Sec Sec Sec More than 208 m ES Sec ii EEA Sec More than 240 m i i Sec Sec Detailed introduction Setas 1 Setas 0 ee CLSI Not detect the servo position circuit Detect the servo position circuit LSI LSI ZINZ X axis with the reference position X axis without the reference position return return function function ZINX Z axis with the reference position
27. When tool is set to the starting point the position relation is shown below Starting point Starting point l Imagination tool nose center is consistent Tool center is consistent with starting point with starting point Note 1 Tool nose position can be not considered in programming when the imaginary tool nose is employed Note 2 When machine tool reference position is performed base point as tool post center can be at the 67 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual starting point The distance from base point to tool nose radius center or imaginary tool nose is regarded as tool position offset value The distance from base point to tool nose radius center is regarded as offset value which is same as the tool radius center is set on the starting point when the distance from base point to imaginary tool nose is set to be the same as the imaginary tool nose on the base point In order to set the offset value normally the distance from base point to imaginary tool nose is easier than from base point to tool nose radius center When tool post center is put at the starting point O 2 Q O r D s N U Q 3 mD Tool post center CFX tool offset along X axis OFZ Tool offset along Z axis The distance which from base point to tool nose center is regarded as tool offset value V It is equivalent to the start on the tool nose center Tool post center
28. eD mD d9 aD a e gt Cc zD 9 er AA pak E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 0 124 125 126 2 Setting cc int ji 3 7 0 2 Machine coordinate Ss system 1270000 30000 20000 10000 Reference point The end of the compensation list corresponds to the reference point while compensation point 126 corresponds to the point by 10000 in the negative direction from the reference point After that every 10000 point corresponds to a compensation point So the compensation point O is set at 1270000 i e The compensation for the travel from 10000 to O is set at compensation point 127 while that from 20000 to 10000 is set at compensation point 126 and that from n 128 x compensation interval to n 127 x compensation interval is set at compensation point n In the above example a zone compensation data is as following 40000 30000 set to 3 Compensation value 30000 20000 set to 7 Compensation value 20000 10000 set to 0 Compensation value 100000 0 set to 2 Compensation value When the machine moves from 40000 to the origin the total compensation is as follows 3 7 0 2 2 H8 5 Compensation value determination For pitch error compensation Distance from reference point to origin Machine move direction Pitch error compensation interval The set compensation value has no direct relation
29. from executing S function to spindle in position signal detection Setting range O 255 unit msec 312 Appendix 5 Parameters Spindle speed in position signal S command Delay counter i Pulse assignment Pr SCTTIM bined EXOFS1 EXOFS2 EXOFS3 EXOFS4 EXOFS5 EXOFS6 EXOFS7 EXOFS8 0049 EXOFS9 0050 EXOFS10 0051 EXOFS11 0052 EXOFS12 0053 EXOFS13 MACINTON EXOFS14 MACINTOF EXOFS15 0056 EXOFS16 Description sigjawelied G xipueddy In external input compensation B function override for outer diameter a check disabled EXOFS16 setting range 0 15 unit 0 1 MACINTON M code making user macro program interruption valid setting range 03 97 MACINTOF M code making user macro program interruption invalid setting range 03 97 Note The MACINTON MACINTOF of parameter No 053 054 are only active when the 4th bit of parameter 025 is 1 Otherwise they are inactive even set 313 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Parameter No 0057 TMHOR h 0058 TMMIN min 0059 TMSEC s TMHOR h Time display 0 255 1h increment TMMIN min Minute 0 59 1min increment TMSEC s Second 0 58 2s increment Process time time for STL lighting displayed by hour minute and second is saved in RAM even power off but because RAM is written into every 6 min data less than 6 min will be cleared with the power shut To preset to 0 set as normal also can make it by pressing set key to change
30. manual operation Manual operation Tool nose radius path f j Programmed path f S Manual operation performed when in other than cornering 5 Q O r K O O 0 x Q a 5 Programmed path Ver absolute command Tool nose radius path EN after ene ie nose radius path operation gt before manual operation Ne _ Manual operation Py Assume that the feed hold was applied at point PH while moving from Pa to Ps of programmed path Pa Psand Pc and that the tool was manually moved to Pu The block end point Ps moves to the point Psp and vectors Vs1 and Vs2 also move to Vs1 and Ve2z Vectors Vc1 and Vc2 between the next two blocks Ps Pc and Pc Pp don t compensate and new vectors Vc1 and Vc2 Vc2 Vc2 in this example are produced from the relation between Ps Pc and Pc Pp However since Vsz is not a newly calculated 214 Chapter 4 Operation vector correct offset is not performed at block Pg Pc Offset is correctly performed after Pc Manual operation during cornering r T Programmed path f f absolute command Tool nose radius path before manual operation Tool nose radius path after A manual operation Manual operation gt Q O P q D O O mm Q as 5 Pi Vat Py This is an example when manual operation is performed during cornering Vaz Ve1 and Vez are vectors moved in parallel
31. r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Offset path ee e Programmed path Offset value offsets by X and Z axes offset vector Specifying the offset value on X and Z axes in this block in terms of T code offset vector Fig 6 2 3 a Shape offset Coordinate system moves the offset value of X and Z axes when it is shape offset that is the offset value is increased or decreased in current position Absolute command _ Mm Tool path after offsetting Tool path before offsetting Offset value on X and Z axes offset vector Fig 6 2 3 b Shape offset 65 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 2 6 2 4 Offset Vector A vector is composed of X and Z axes offset values see the figure 6 2 3 a this is called the offset vector The compensation performed by X and Z offset values is called the offset vector compensation 2 6 2 5 Offset Cancel When the T code of offset number 0 is applied the offset is erased at the end of the block the offset vector is 0 N1 U50 0 W100 0 T0202 Wearing offset N2 W100 0 N3 U50 0 W50 0 T0200 Offset path O 2 Q O r D N U Q 3 mD Programmed path The offset value is set in the OFWX and OFWZ of no 2 wearing offset memory N1 X50 0 Z100 0 T0202 Shape offset N2 2200 0 N3 X100 0 2250 0 T0200 Absolute command Programmed path The offset value is set in the
32. 149 are eliminated into lt Vacant gt but the system variable is not eliminated The resetting occurs depart from the MDI mode the user macro program body subprogram call status and DO status are all eliminated and return to the main program the call with MDI are eliminated when setting in MDI mode 8 Macro program statement and NC statement The following blocks are regarded as macro program statement a Operation command the block containing b Control command The GOTO DO or END block contains c Macro program call command The block of G code contains G65 G66 G67 or macro program call The block other than the macro program statement is regarded as NC statement 9 MDI intervention in automatic operation When macro program call is applied with MDI intervention in automatic operation the nesting number of macro program call and DO are called up to 4 layers when automatic operation starts consecutively at the same DO calls 3 layers the subprogram nesting number can be reached 4 layers in MDI mode 10 Composite canned cycle Macro program statement Control command Operational command and Macro program call command can not be employed in composited canned cycle G71 G72 and G73 11 Program restarts page display The MT code used is not displayed as M98 when M code T code calls to subprogram 12 Feed hold Macro program statement can be stopped to perform using feed hold It stops when resetting or the alarm oc
33. 2 X300 0Z2200 0 3 A Manual operation after the end of the block Coordinates when block 2 has been executed after manual operation X axis 20 0 Z axis 100 0 at the end of movement of block 1 211 gt Q O r K O O DR Q a 5 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual X 220 0 250 0 120 0 200 0 Manual _ 7 D 200 0 150 0 gt switch ON operation e Switch OFF 100 0 100 0 7 B Manual operation after a feed hold Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while block 2 is being executed manual operation X axis 75 0 is executed and the cycle start button is pressed K 375 0 200 0 275 0 150 0 o y7 225 0 125 0 Manual E operation __ 200 0 150 0 300 0 200 0 150 0 125 0 Z i c ON C When reset after a manual operation following a feed hold Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while block 2 is being executed manual operation X axis 75 0 is performed the control unit is reset with RESET button and block 2 is read again 212 Chapter 4 Operation 375 0 200 0 275 0 150 0 ae PE 225 0 ap Manual _ operation ee 300 0 200 0 eee 200 0 150 0 1 00 0 100 0 150 0 125 0 Switch ON j Switch OFF gt D When a movement command in the next block is only one axis When there is onl
34. 75 special G code C Refer to 2G code list in Appendix The incremental offset The original set tool offset value is added one input tool compensation value Automatic tool The tool is moved to the measured point and NC corrects the present set tool Direct input the The tool offset value can be set by measuring the workpiece diameter and the N oe measured value of the length after manual cutting The value is input in MDI offset Input the offset value The standard tool moves to the fixed point of the machine in Manual mode and the measured tool moves to the same point on the machine After pressing and Input the tool offset values of X and Z axes are respectively set N O The tools of the turret tool post can be classfied into some groups The tool Tool lifetime lifetime usage time or frequency of each group is set Each tool is selected by management the specified group number And the tool is used one time the usage time or frequency is counted When the set lifetime is used up the next tool in the O Dy Q O r Ce O Z O O QO zh Q ER Q Q O zh Q cC mm Q n a Cc EE same group is automatically selected When the lifetime of all tools ends one signal is output to inform the operator to change the tools The tool offset is classified into the tool shape or the tool installation position Tool figure and_ tool
35. DNA Mic NO Saeed atic acy dp Scere on tbsp e E E mn eeee sans 190 2 11 TOOL LIFETIME WIANAGEMEN Po ccescesscsscesbecactcasscascetecacdcasscusteetececdenssexssestececseesccksecstocesseusacussestacassonsee 191 21l OVCIVIOW ont ssscases dues sitacet EO O 19 22 SENOS TOO GROUP acters wits cts detect O cloth walle di dale ole taht oa cla ual 191 2 11 3 The Tool Group Number Specified in the Machining ProCeSS ccccccccccsssscesesssceeessseeeees 194 2 11 4 Executing the Tool Lifetime MAnaGeMent cccccccccsscccesscceeneeeesceeeesseeenseeessseeeseneeeessaeeens 194 LAT The Counterof the Tool Lifetime seres e E rit ack 194 2 11 4 2 The Tool Change Signal and the Tool Change Resetting Signal eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 194 PAA Tool SKP e l chad ateneide eaten easels a ahold ena ealiceam 195 DAL AA New FOO SelECHOM SION tecatssecechicsuetst cewacnc a a eek vdeeaad laa eae 195 2 11 5 Display and Inputting the Tool Data cccccccccccscccesssceesneeeseseeeseseeeesseeeessseeenseeesseeeseeeessseeeens 195 2 11 5 1 Display and Rewriting the Tool Group Number cccccccccccccecceceeeeseeessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 195 2 11 5 2 Display the Tool Lifetime Data during the Machining Program Executing cc ee 195 ZA 5yo Preset ine Tool Litehime Counte sa cn cuce ae E ee eta antes 195 2110 MCIUING Ihe Pal AMelel ser titans aedeasaiaiia eure assed aed 196 oe Aae ee ee es ee ee a ee er ee ee ee eee eee ere 196 2
36. End point 4 L T t 5 i P 1 a z p J ey n E S i i 2 Unit mm 100 Metric and diameter programming NO10 NO11 N012 N013 N014 N015 NO16 NO17 N018 N019 N020 G50 X200 0 Z220 0 G00 X160 0 Z180 0 G71 P013 Q019 U4 0 W2 0 D7000 F30 S55 G00 X40 0 F15S58 G0O1W 40 0 X60 0W 30 0 W 20 0 X100 0W 10 0 W 20 0 X140 0W 20 0 G70 P013 Q019 Example 7 2 2 composite canned cycle programming G70 G72 Starting point Chapter 2 Programming if Fh oe Diameter and metric programming NO10 G50 X220 0 2190 0 NO11 G00 X176 0 2132 0 N012 G72 P013 Q018 U4 0 W2 0 D7000 F30 S55 N013 G00 Z58 0 F15 S58 N014 G01 X120 0 W12 0 NO15 W10 0 N016 X80 0 W10 0 NO17 W20 0 N018 X36 0 W22 0 N019 G70 P013 Q018 Example 7 2 3 composite canned cycle programming G70 G73 O 3 Q O D N U 5 Q Q 3 D Q 133 O 2 Q O r D s N U Q 3 2 Or l CES FE GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Starting point 130 Diameter and metric programming NO10 NO11 N012 N013 NO14 N015 NO016 NO17 N018 G50 X260 0 Z220 0 G00 X220 0 Z160 0 G73 P013 Q018 114 0 K14 0 U4 0 W2 0 D3 F30 SO 180 G00 X80 0 W 40 0 G01 W 20 0 F10 0 X120 0 W 10 0 W 20 0 S0400 G02 X160 0 W 20 0 120 0 G01 X180 0 W 10 0 S0280 N019 G70 P013 Q018 2 7 2 5 Deep Hole Drilling Cycle G74 Execute the axial Z axis
37. M99 PAAAA _ _ t rh T Q o 3 z gt oN oN w NOOOO Modal information has become the items i changed in interruption program Fig 3 7 User macro program interruption and modal information While modal information is changed in interruption program 1 During the return by M99 The modal information before interruption is active while the modal information changed in interruption program is inactive 2 During the return by M99 PAAAA The modal information changed in interruption program is also active after the returning the same as M98 K11 4 Parameters 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PPE MaR pemen TT Tse MUSR 1 Use macro program interruption function 0 Not use macro program interruption function MSUB 1 Subprogram type user macro program interruption 0 Macro program type user macro program interruption MPRM 1 The M code for the control of user macro program interruption is set by parameter 0 User macro program interruption is under the control of M96 and M97 Note User macro program interruption is a part of User macro program B function That is user macro program interruption cannot be used without the user macro program B 369 CGSN m HIS GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual selected The settings of parameters No 053 and 054 are active only when MPRM 1 TSE 1 User macro program interruption is of state triggering mode 0 User macro program interruption is of
38. MINT 0 Interruption program is executed before the end of block lt Explanations gt User macro program interruption signal is ON during fault detection It is kept on unless special operations are performed Only one interruption is performed if the edge triggering mode is selected Whether the interruption is executed or not is detected with diagnosis No 120 Parameters are set for the selection of subprogram type macro program type and control M codes depending on programming K11 7 2 Inserting other job in continuous machining without interrupting the current program lt Specifications gt A short job is inserted in the program execution with longer machining time It is troublesome that the original program restarts by general single block stop MDI manual insertion lt Parameter setting gt TSE Selection of triggering mode for user macro program interruption MUSR 1 Enable user macro program interruption function MSUB 0 Macro program type user macro program interruption MPRM Setting of M codes for the control of user macro program interruption MINT 1 Interruption program is executed after the end of block lt Explanations gt Parameters are set as required for the triggering mode and the selection of M codes for user macro program interruption For user macro program interruption interruption is prohibited in the execution of block and macro program type interruption is used to prevent the affection of the
39. O r O F U O D Ep 5 A D N D r Qo O D o Z 5 vo mode x x Note 2 x Other modes Note Saving of the subprogram numbers called 2 351 gt 5 D gt 2 x N U re A r D E T r O F mi O D s mD A D U D me QO O D a 2 a Sr WEE GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual The indicator goes out in the absence of alarm emergency ae The indicator goes The indicator goes out in the absence out in the absence of alarm of alarm Indicator and output O for signals emergency Spindle rotation signal S12bit S analog signal ON no servo ON no servo ON no servo alarm alarm alarm Servo ready signal Indicator for feed hold Note 1 Program number is displayed when the program is starting from the head Note 2 When the NC is reset in the execution of a subprogram the control returns to the beginning of the main program And the called subprogram cannot be executed in midway So the control is back to the program head 352 Appendix 8 Storage Type Pitch Error Compensation Function Appendix 8 Storage Type Pitch Error Compensation Function H8 1 Function The ball screw error of all axes may be compensated by minimum move units This function is active after reference point returning H8 2 Specifications The tool position after returning to reference point is taken as the reference The compensation
40. Q O r D s N U Q 3 mD 3 4is0 A k40 Auto Awd 4 AivoO AKO Aveo Awtd B T a kani kani m 7 Be aana a O If the machining start is programmed with tool nose center and also it is completed the machining with cutter compensation G73 command the cutter compensation value must be added to Au and Aw same as G71 2 7 2 4 Finishing Cycle G70 The tool executes finishing from starting point along the blocks ns nf specified by the workpiece finishing machining path After G71 G72 G73 executes roughing G70 does finishing and completes the finishing allowance one time After G70 is completed the tool returns to the starting point and executes the next block following G70 Roughing uses G71 G72 and G73 command and finishing uses G70 G70p ns Q nf P The sequence number of the first block uses workpiece finishing Q The sequence number of the last block uses workpiece finishing 130 Chapter 2 Programming G70 path is determined by programmed path of ns nf blocks Relationship between ns and nf in G70 G73 is shown below CP LAST ast So gt Ee a 3s ere 7 E Block group for finishing path G70 Pa O n Note 1 F S and T functions specified in the G71 G72 and G73 blocks are invalid but in G70 mode they are valid in the block from ns to nf Note 2 The compound canned cycle G71 G72 and G73 should be completed in the Auto mode Note 3 When t
41. R Q 4 H2 1 The workpiece which the figure is same but the dimension is different is not needed to program again any more when machining as the above figure shows If the variable used with 1 to 4 are performed the program to the macro program body The actual value evaluates to the variable is allowed Here we will make a user macro program to finish the following workpiece machining from a to b 152 Chapter 2 Programming d dia a dia b dia c dia a wt Se T c Rr i so E J el m k ml O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca Q S gt 3 vo The following program can be read as Close to a G00 Xd Zk G01 XbRr Zj Cutting from a to b c 3 0 chamfering is in the b The incremental value is W from c to b during Z c b 3 0 i j c b However X c 3 0 Ww The macro program body uses variable n the n is corresponding with the following letters Ac H1 z 2 Cee 3 De 7 ee 4 Jn 5 a ees 18 aaa eee ae ae ee 6 es 23 So the actual user macro program body is as follows The macro program number is needed at the beginning the M99 is needed to apply at last 09801 the user macro number is 9801 G00 X 7 Z 6 G01 X 2 R 18 153 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Z O 23 3 2 3 0 4 5 8 2 M99 the end of macro A workpiece can be actually cut from a
42. Set the measuring speed during the automatic tool compensation After power on the initial direction of the backlash 018 Backlash compensation pulse frequency 256KHz 115 116 Backlash compensation amount of X and Z axes Whether the dry run is valid during the thread cutting Whether execute the canned cycle in the block without the movement commands Set the chamfering width of the thread cutting G92 G76 065 Retraction amount in G74 and G75 modes UOleSUSCWOD joo esu dwos ysejpoeg Wy 3 3 D G Q lt Oo D Finishing amount in G76 mode The retraction amount of multiple cycles in G71 G72 modes Set the minimum cutting amount in thread cutting cycle G76 mode 307 Whether execute the finishing of the last outline cutting in G71 and G72 modes 25 314 The macro is interrupted in the middle or at the end of the block The parameters stored in the macro same as the codes corresponding to Set the various parameters for the macro 320 322 Setting M codes of three types for calling the macro 323 332 Setting G codes of ten types for calling the macro E5 4 Precautions of Using the Parameters 1 The parameter contents of 0000 0004 and 0300 0304 vary as the different machines please UOIJOUN PUBLULUOD oen refer to the parameter list attached with NC 2 Please set as 0 for the parameters of which purpose are not introduced 3 The contents of the parameter number with the form
43. The light is then OFF in the sate of single block stop Note 6 If the Feedhold key is pressed all the time in thread cutting or pressed in the first block without specifying the thread cutting follows the thread cutting block the tool stops at the block without specifying thread cutting Note 7 When thread cutting is performed in single block after the first block without any specifying it is performed tool stops Note 8 When the automatic mode is changed into manual during thread cutting It is the same as Note 6 that the serial feedhold buttons the block start of thread cutting is absent it is feedhold stops But when manual is changed into automatic mode after the block without thread cutting is executed it is stopped see Note 5 Note 9 When the previous block is the block of thread cutting even the current block is thread cutting block in the occasion of the detection signal is not waited the thread cutting of current block is performed immediately G32Z F Z The detection of each revolution is not performed before this block G32 The block is thread cutting block Z F Same the detection of 1 turn is not performed Note 10 Incorrect 0 01 thread part may occur between two blocks when the block of thread cutting is continued namely the speed changes within 0 01s If command transform does not finished in time when short thread is serially cut more incorrect part may occur Note 11 Constant sur
44. Z and 6 value measured previously after 283 ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual INPUT pressing the system will calculate the offset value of which the tool on Z axis 5 Start the spindle the tool cuts along the workpiece face its assumed as face B after pressing T the tool is retracted from face B the spindle stops the length of r is measured 6 After entering the interface of tool outline offset 01 tool offset is continued to use and the lower left corner N on the screen is twinkling and the cursor stops below the tool offset number of G01 group And the current is the tool offset number N101 then input X INPUT and the value of r measured previously after pressing the system automatically calculates the offset amount of which the tool on X axis then the tool offset value is set Note 1 The maximum offset value of the tool in 999 999mm in metric system or 99 9999inch in inch system Note 2 Before setting the tool offset value the tool offset compensation amount is null that is to say at the system initial power on state or the executing tool offset value as 0 so it means the coordinate system isn t with the tool offset value B Tool setting in the specified position 1 Select any one tool as the standard one it s assumed that 1 tool is the standard one which is shown as the following figure as gt Q O r K O O
45. and the set value normally is 1 and it is corresponded to the set code 2 DMR Detection override ratio the parameter is 14 15 L Movement amount of per revolution feeding of the detector a Pulse number per revolution sent from the detector of the motor B The feedback pulse ratio is always 1 in GSK983Ta 2 Step two Set the capacity of the reference counter The reference counter is relative with the zero return in grid mode Z phase signal and the machine zero return stop position is not correct if the setting is not correct gt D Q x oO U o S D rr D T The reference counter capacity the movement amount per revolution of the pulse encodenthe detection unit OMR 8 a Pulse number per revolution sent from the detector of the motor B The feedback pulse ratio is always 1 in GSK983Ta The list of the normal thread screw pitch in GSK983Ta GSK983Ta X axis parameters Movement amount per revolution 5000ppr rev motor 2500ppr rev motor of the motor 983Ta GD2000 983Ta GD2000 drive Drive electronical electronical gear X axis parameters X axis Ea gear ratio ratio oa oa Pan PAM PA42 O PAO PA42 ays BI P GSK983Ta Z axis parameters Movement amount per revolution of the Appendix 5 Parameters See 0 001 01 06 0 5000ppr rev motor GD2000 drive ae Z axis ae Pa soe 2 e poate to E mooo Em Seis aa B pares 000105 mooo 0001001
46. feed retraction and feed again from starting point till the end point of Z axis and execute the radial retraction axial retraction to starting point of Z axis and one time axial cutting cycle is completed after the radial tool infeed is done the next axial cutting cycle is executed after cutting to end point is done the tool returns to starting point starting point and end point of G74 are the same and the axial grooving cycle is completed Directions of radial tool infeed and axial tool infeed in G74 are determined by cutting point X U Z W and starting point The code is used to machine the ring groove or center deep hole inconsecutive axial cutting to break chip and time remove chip on the workpiece surface G74 X U _Z W __ Ai K Ak F__ D d 134 Chapter 2 Programming X X component of point B U Incremental from A to B Z Z component of point C W Incremental from A to C I The movement value along with X direction without sign Ai K Cutting value along with Z direction without sign Ak D The retracting value at the bottom of hole Ad When the D is not applied it is regarded as zero F feedrate Note The retraction value e in cutting can be set with parameter 65 GROVE or set in parameter 65 GROVE in SETTING page O gt D r D N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Program suppose the grooving tool width is 4mm and the least increment is 0 001
47. gt 3 vo 2 10 2 3 Undefined Variable The variable value undefined the variable is lt Vacant gt Variable 0 is employed as its value is lt Vacant gt Characters of undefined variable see the following 1 Citation The address is omitted when the undefined variable is quoted When 1 lt Vacant gt G90X100Y G9OOX LOOY 1 G9OX LOO G9OX LOO YO 2 Operator The O value is same other than the value is evaluated with lt Vacant gt 155 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual When 1 lt Vacant gt HO H 2 lt Vacant gt When 2 0 2 0 HI H 14H HO H 1 1 l 9 2 0 3 Conditional expression lt Vacant gt in QE and NE is different 0 When 1 lt Vacant gt When 1 0 1 EQ 0 1 EQ 0 Established Unestablished 1 NEO 1 NEO Established Unestablished 1 GE 0 1 GE 0 O gt Q O r D N U Q Q 3 D Q Established Unestablished 1 GTO 1 GTO Unestablished Unestablished 2 10 2 4 Display and Setting for Variable Value Variables can be displayed on GSK983Ta s LCD and performed with MDI mode as follows MACRO VAL PO1 Program lock on D0006 NO006 00001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 LSK 44 14 20 34 LSK see eee MDI 14 20 34 eo ee ee 156 Chapter 2 Programming About the detailed operation refer to the user macro variable and setting in Section 4 4 8 2 2 10 3 Kind
48. if it is not on the state of machine lock Positioning to the intermediate point or reference position it is same effective to position with GOO In general this command is used for automatic tool change ATC Therefore for safety tool nose compensation and tool offset should be cancelled before executing this command Note 1 Before G28 command is specified if a manual reference position return is not performed after the power is turned on the movement after the intermediate is same with manual reference position return In this case the direction from intermediate return selected by parameter 12 is equal to reference position return 44 Chapter 2 Programming N3 G28 26 0 intermediate point 1 0 6 0 X Intermediate Reference 4 0 5 0 position Z G28 X4 0 Z5 0 Unit mm 2 Q Note 2 The coordinate values of intermediate of G28 movement command are written down in other word there is no specification axis in G28 block the current coordinate value of this axis is Rg regarded as intermediate coordinate value of these axes For example F N1 X1 0 Z2 0 Q N2 G28 X4 0 intermediate point 4 0 Z2 0 S N3 X1 0 Z2 0 j J Q 2 5 8 3 G29 Automatic Return from Reference Position Format G29 X u Z w This command is used for tool moves to specified position by intermediate In general this command is followed with G28 or G30 command In incremental command the corresponding intermediate distance
49. t twinkle otherwise input NO and then the letters don t twinkle Note 3 T is represented as the tool number R as the radius 4 4 12 2 The Incremental Value Input Through the selection function the offset of the incremental value can be input then the increment can be input with X number The offset amount of X and Z axes input by the absolute value gt Q O P 4 D O O x Q ms 5 In x N The offset amount of X and Z axes input by the incremental value Tool nose R offset amount absolute value input incremental value input El PES The assumed tool nose number Whether the input value of R is absolute or the incremental is set by NC parameter 7 6 IOF Note When NC parameter 7 6 is 1 R value is the incremental input The incremental offset input is the added or subtracted part of the input offset 1 The incremental offset input When the current tool nose R offset amount is 5 678 input R input the offset 249 ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual amount is changed into 7 178 2 The absolute value should be input when the incremental offset is input The current offset amount is 5 678 press R R offset amount becomes 0 Then after pressing LR input R offset amount is changed into 1 5 Note 1 During the automatic running the offset amount is changed the new offset amount becomes valid from the next bl
50. that is to say the tool nose is taken as the origin of the workpiece coordinate system then the coordinate system of X 0 Z 0 is set Note 1 Standard position 254 Chapter 4 Operation When the standard tool is set with the offset amount of X Z in the above figure and the offset is valid TXXXX is commanded before cutting the previously mentioned faces A and B the setting a Bis completed And the coordinate system X 0 Z 0 has been set when the standard point is in the workpiece origin Note 2 X axis is normally used to measure the diameter value 4 4 12 6 Direct Input of the Tool Offset Amount The differential value between the standard position the tool nose of the standard tool or the tool post center during programming and the actual used tool center is set with the following methods The situation of the set workpiece coordinate system a Cb c d Ce gt Q O P iN O x Q as 5 Select the actual tool to machine face A in Manual mode e After pressing AOOO button on the machine operation panel the tool leaves face B and the spindle is stopped Measure the distance B from the programming origin to face A Press for several times to switch into the interface of Input offset number 100 to directly enter the input offset state Therefore the expected page cursor of the offset number indicates the offset number the input N is twinkling Cf
51. the clamping is effective to G96 command only not for G97 If the max spindle speed is set with parameter 134 SPDMAX the clamping is then effective for G96 or G97 Note 4 G50 S0 It indicates that the spindle speed is clamped at Orpm Note 5 The S value specified in G96 mode is also used for G97 mode and it is restored when turning to G96 G96 50 50m min or 50feet min G96 S50 50m min or 50feed min G97 S1000 1000rpm G97 1000 1000rpm G96 X1000 50 m min or 50 feet min G96 X1000 50 m min or 50 feed min Note 6 The surface speed in the constant surface speed control is only suited to the programmed path but it is not suited for the tool path after offset Note 7 Even if the machine is not run in the state of machine locking the coordinate value constant surface speed of X axis is computed to the corresponding changeable program Note 8 In thread cutting mode the constant surface speed is effective Since the spindle speed responses to the NC system it is better to cancel the constant surface speed control in taper thread cutting Note 9 G96 and G98 can be valid at the same time Note 10 When G96 is turned to G97 mode if the S rpm is not specified in G97 block the spindle speed is 143 QO gt D r D N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System lastly specified with G96 is regarded as the S value in G97 N111 G97 S800 800 rpm N222 ia S100 100m
52. the intersection P of offset path exists when the radius is large the intersection cannot be found CIII The arc center shares a same point with starting point or end point When an arc is specified and its arc center shares a same point with starting point or end point No 038 alarm occurs and the tool stops at the end of previous block Stop Tool nose center path I m Programmed path 89 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual G41 N5 G01 W1000 N6 G02 W1000 I0KO N7 G03 U 1000 l 1000 4 Tool movement when offset mode is cancelled When one of the following conditions is satisfied in offset mode and when the block is performed the system enters cancel mode this operation is called offset cancel C I Specified G40 IL The offset number 00 of tool nose radius is specified G02 G03 can not specify the offset cancel in arc commands if it is specified the No 34 alarm will be issued When a block is read into and then two blocks the program is stored into tool nose radius compensation buffer is included this data is not to be displayed are performed during erasing the offset value In a single block mode one block is read into the other is applied and stopped and the next block is performed pressing START key but the next block is not to be read into The system enters cancel mode therefore and only next block entered to the buffer is performed The data does not O D
53. 0067 1000 0156 o 0068 900 QOl57 0 0135 0 0158 0 0136 o LSK 0057 data para Run time display increment by ih MDI 14 43 50 Piss a ee ee The displayed numbers and the set content is as below Running time based on the hour unit CTMHOR 242 Chapter 4 Operation Revolving time min unit TMMIN Running time sec unit TMSEC 064 Chamfering width of thread THDCH The return amount of G74 G75 GROVE O66 The finishing surplus of G76 THDFN The retraction amount of G71 G72 MRCDT The least remaining amount of G76 THCLM 141 Running time TIME The X coordinate value of the 1 peak in the stored stroke limit 2 152 The Z coordinate value of the 1 peak in the stored stroke limit 2 153 The X coordinate value of the 2 peak in the stored stroke limit 2 154 The Z coordinate value of the 2 peak in the stored stroke limit 2 The X coordinate value of the 1 peak in the stored stroke limit 3 The Z coordinate value of the 1 peak in the stored stroke limit 3 157 The X coordinate value of the 2 peak in the stored stroke limit 3 158 The Z coordinate value of the 2 peak in the stored stroke limit 3 180 Sequence number comparison and stop 319 Various setting PRG8 MSBL Reserved by the manufacturer 341 Reserved by the manufacturer Note 1 The data series numbers except for the ones in the list are not displayed Note 2 Setti
54. 114 Chapter 2 Programming R rapid traverse F federate specified by F code The positive negative sign of digital followed address U and W is determined by direction of path 1 and 2 in the occasion of incremental programming They are negative in the above illustration the 4 steps in the above figure are finished by pressing CYCLE START key again and again in a single 2 Q O m D NO U co Q 3 block mode 2 Taper machining cycle can be described by using the following command G90X U DN a ee With respect to the incremental programming the positive negative sign of digital described by the address U W and have the following relations with tool path Ci U lt 0 W lt 0O I lt 0O Cii U gt 0 W lt 0O I gt 0 115 Or l CES I O 2 Q O m D s N U Q 3 2 iii U lt O W lt O I gt 0 z lt Operation 116 G30 UB WE GSO 52000 TOITG G96 5200 HAS GOG 461 0 22 8 T6101 H G90 455 0 W 42 0 F0 25 5 58 8 5 A45 8 5 A46 8 5 2 12 68 1 11 75 26 868 3 5 2 40 1 5 25 G36 UB WA H36 GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual e 2 G30 GSO G96 GAG G98 46 ANT Ach Add Aco G38 H36 5 iv U gt 0 W lt 0 I lt 0 lt a 2 UB We s2000 THIH8 3288 HAS 5 456 8 72 0 T6101 MAS 57 8 W328 FAL25 5 a a a a a UB We Chapte
55. 3 to clear all the data of the tool group Like the lifetime counter etc refer to 2 11 52 are cleared at the end of the tool lifetime When the tool change resetting signal occurs the tool change signal is automatically released After the machining is restored the 1 tool is started to be selected from the group Note When the tool lifetime is specified by the time once the lifetime is used up the tool change signal is also output even in the machining period while the machining continues till it ends For the frequency even the tool lifetime ends the tool change signal is output after M02 or MO3 is reset 2 11 4 3 Tool Skip Signal If one tool lifetime isn t used up the tool is completed to be changed with one of the following methods i Specify the group in which the tool is and input the tool skip signal Use the next T code to command the next tool in the group ii Not specify the group number and input the tool skip signal It s assumed to select the present tool others are same as i item i or ii is set by parameter 309 TLSK The lifetime is started from 0 However the tool skip signal is input into the last tool the tool change signal is output 2 11 4 4 New Tool Selection Signal In one group a new tool is going to be selected When T code of the tool is output the signal of selecting new tool is also selected at the same time When the new tool is selected the signal can be used to automatic
56. 322 dimacinaty lool NOSE Dire COI renrneeini th atdent siete Piast e 69 20 3 3 FOOMnOSe CompensatiGn Value SENT esaeen a E E A 71 2 6 3 4 Workpiece Position and Movement Command sscsssssseeececccceceeeeeeaaeseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaqaas 12 2 6 3 5 Precaution for Tool Nose Radius Compensation cccccccccccceecccecceeesessesseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaags 76 2 6 4 Details for Tool nose radius Compensation cccccccccccccsssccceessseceessseeceensceccessseeceessseeceesseeceesaas 8 2642 Offset Vector tor Tool Nose R Center erci a nada a nein eee meats 81 DGD G40 GAM ss NGA cooaceesi aiedisiatut ini eceratuce tanec howe ante anes ani ee ee ee 82 2 6 5 Offset Value Input with G10 posssassts cosunnts cleus S0Sncnivteslcains i veanienssihasod Saisndhnes SidvevOnsyucey SanndevensiOaunbadnns 109 2 6 6 Directly Input Tool Offset Value by Manual Measure Trial Cut Tool Setting 0 110 207 AUIOMAIIC TOO ONSET INNU renser E E sesh paueld acct ih esate ae 111 2 6 8 Qu ter TOO CompensatioN seee ich con a E a E BSS E a RASA 114 ZT ACY CISE WIA CHINING FUNCTION orriren raoin E OEA OEA EEEE 114 2 7 1 Single Canned cycle G90 G92 and G94 ooo ccccccccccccsscccsssccessseceesseeesssecessseeceseeceesseeeesseeeesas 114 2 7 1 1 Outer Cylindrical Surface Cutting Cycle Axial Cutting Cycle G ea E ea ee 114 2 7 1 2 G92 Thread Cutting Cycle GO e a E EE E A 117 272 MGOMPOUNG Canned CVCE seraa E eE E TOE ETA EA O E 123 2 8 SPIN
57. 4 4 11 Resetting Reset button whe Press the reset button Normally it is used for clearing the alarm state After pressing the reset button a NC is changed into the following set State before resetting State after resetting l l Deceleration stops and the remaining movement is During executing the movement commands cleared The output sequence stops and please refer to the M S and T output l l l machine user manual for the machine side MDI mode The content of the buffer register can t be cleared One block has read l l Modes except for the Clear the content of the buffer register and the display into the buffer register above mentioned of BUF is cleared No matter in any situation press the reset button NC system is set as resetting state In gt Q O P K O mm Q as 5 Auto mode it is changed into the skip state 4 4 12 Setting and Display the Tool Position Offset Amount the Tool Nose R Compensation Amount 4 4 12 1 Input the Absolute Value 1 Press key 2 Because the system displays many pages press to select the required page Page 1 Offset amount 1 7 Page2 aa 8 9 or 8 14 Select 247 gt Q O r K O O x Q a 5 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 3 4 5 248 Page3 ___ 15 21 Select Page4 aaa 22 28 Select Page5 _ 29 32 Select TO_WEAR_OFFSET PO1 X
58. 5 CMR CMR num para CMR denom para Setting range of command override CMR numerator parameter is 1 255 Setting range of command override CMR denominator parameter is 1 255 CMR numerator parameter No N027 of X axis and No N028 of Z axis CMR denominator parameter No N333 of X axis and No N334 of Z axis Parameter No 0031 VLOCX 0032 VLOCZ Description VLOCX The lowest speed clamping of X axis and Z axis respectively VLOCZ speed value commanded sigjawelied G xipueddy Position offset setting range 0 7 VELO speed value commanded VELO 311 sigjawelied G xipueddy ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Parameter No 0035 MBUF 1 0036 MBUF2 M code without buffering can be max 2 except M00 M01 M02 and M30 Setting range 00 97 Parameter No 0037 SPGST SPGST Spindle motor speed at spindle gear shift for constant surface speed Setting range 0 255 Setting value Motor speed at gear shift x4095 Spindle motor max speed Parameter No 0038 SPSOR SPSOR Spindle speed at exact stop for constant surface speed Setting range 0 255 unit rom Parameter No 0040 EXOMAX Description EXOMAX In external input compensation B function allowable value in limit check disabled Setting range 0 255 Unit 0 002 mm metric input 0 0002 inch inch input Parameter Description SCTTIN Delay time setting of spindle speed arriving signal detection and time setting
59. 9 Block without tool movement block The following blocks do not specify the tool movement and the tool will not move even if the tool nose radius compensation is executed in the following blocks 1 M05 M code output 2 21 S code output 83 G04 X1000 Dwell 4 G01 UO Movement distance 0 G98 G code only G22 X1000000 Workpiece area setting G10 P01 X10 Z20 R10 Q1 Offset value changing Ca Itis specified in starting state The block which does not specify the tool movement is input when starting an offset vector does not generate Sys 97 O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual N6 U1000 0 W1000 0 N7 G41 UO N8 U 1000 0 N9 U 1000 0 W1000 0 Cb Specify blocks without tool movement in offset mode When a block without tool movement is input in offset mode offset vector and tool nose path are the same when this block is not specified See the offset mode in Section 2 6 4 2 N6 U2ZOO W100 N7 GO4 P1000 Ne W1000 But when the block movement distance is 0 even if the block is separately specified the tool movement becomes the same of that of two blocks or more without tool movement command This will be explained in the following No U2000 W1000 N7 UQ r N8 W1000 More than two blocks without tool movement cannot be commanded serially If done the position upright to the previous block start
60. As for the details for tool nose compensation see 2 6 2 The imaginative tool nose direction is also used for tool nose compensation When T code is selected when the offset number is neither O nor OO the tool position offset is enabled Offset value can be specified within the following range mm input 0 mm 999 999mm inch input O inch 99 9999inch Note When metric input is 1mm the input unit of offset value is 0 001mm 2 6 1 5 Offset Tool path shifts programmed path X and Z values and it corresponds to the offset value specified 60 Chapter 2 Programming by the T code acceleration or deceleration for the end position of each block is performed Shifted path Programmed path Compensation performs by the offset value of X and Z axes Offset vector This block specifies offset by T code 2 6 1 6 Offset Vector In the above figure the vector with X or Z offset value is called as offset vector the compensation of X or Z offset value is same as offset vector 2 6 1 7 Offset Cancel When T code offset No 0 or 00 is applied the wearing offset is cancelled and the offset vector O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo becomes 0 at the end of block of erasing wearing offset amount Path after offset Programmed path N1 U50 0 W100 0 T0202 N2 W100 0 N3 U50 0 W50 0 T0200 The offset amount is separately entered into the OFX and OFZ of No 02 offset memory When th
61. Au Aw are shown below In the figure B gt C is the finishing path B C is the roughing contour and point A is the start tool point There are four kinds of machined path by executing G72 These paths can be machined by the repetition operation parallel to X axis Signs of Au and Aw are as follows AUO Awd AUO Awe0 128 Chapter 2 Programming The tool path machining mode from A to B cutting feed or position is determined by which either G00 or G01 is specified in this block It is same to the G71 The tool path from B to C must be specified in the first block Sequence number is ns but the movement along Z axis can not be indicated in this block The tool path from A to B must be monotonously increased decreased If the machining start is programmed with tool nose center and also it completed the machining with tool nose center compensation G72 command the tool nose center compensation value must be added to Au and Aw it is the same as that in G71 Note 1 The terminal face rough cutting cycle tool path must be monotonously increased decreased Note 2 Z W command can not be included in the block with sequence number ns 2 7 2 3 Closed Loop Cutting Cycle G73 This cycle is repeatedly cut with canned figure and moving the tool position step by step so that the blank can be machined with high efficiency by this cycle such as forging and casting AJH The interval from C to D is B divided in te
62. G73 are specified in MDI mode they are only for Auto mode The concaves are over 10 for G71 G72 of II type a 069 The last move command of the block specified by P and Q is ended by I 346 Appendix 6 Alarm List chamfering or corner R when command with G70 G71 G72 and G73 070 7 072 073 T Program number is beyond the range of 1 9999 075 Neither program number nor sequence number is entered in the first block of the program 6 Address P is not commanded in the blocks that containing M98 G65 G66 077 Subprogram is called for 3 times 5 times for the user macro program Program number by G M T or sequence number specified by address P or O D gt N the sequence number in GOTO statement is not found in the blocks which includes M98 M99 G65 G66 Measuring position in position signal is not connected within the area by parameter automatic tool compensation Automatic tool compensation without T code is commanded automatic Automatic tool compensation and T code are commanded in a same block 08 08 O N 082 Inactive axis or incremental command is specified in automatic tool 1 083 i i compensation automatic tool compensation 088 Data error signal DERR is entered external tool compensation A function Value other than 0 9 is used for BCD data external tool compensation A function Reference return can t be normally performed due to the one turn signal the re
63. GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual b Start r is the movement of X SF E Moving from a to d till to c f r is the movement of Z point b is specified with Corner R incremental or absolute command Z X G01 X U b Rr D so In the right figure tool moves to 2 Gomer R point b is specified with va N 2 ASE incremental or absolute command moving MON ae Atag u a Ce R Q 3 3 o and K are always specified with the radius X TENE eTA 0 50 N3 D C N2 0 6R TT 5 Nl 2 B A 9a J E _ Unit mm Diameter programming NO G50 X26 8 253 0 point A N1 G1 227 0 RO 6 F100 point B N2 X86 0 K 0 3 N3 ZO point C point D gt Note 1 As for chamfering or corner R should be specified with G01 move along X or Z axis Next block should vertical to the single command of X or Z axis Note 2 Alarm may generate in the following conditions 1 When I or K or R is employed X and Z axes are simultaneously specified with G01 mode Alarm No 054 2 Two of I K and R in same block are specified with G01 mode Alarm No 053 30 Chapter 2 Programming 3 X and I or Z and K are simultaneously specified with G01 mode Alarm No 056 4 In the block the chamfering or corner R is specified the movement distance along X and Z are less than the chamfering or corner R Alarm no 055 5 The block which after a block is specified with chamfering or corner R its mov
64. LA ALN NN NNNNNNN yb a2 OoO oO ANDO A o EN O A 2 2 2 913 2 2 Variable value Output signal 1 Overall interface signals can be input once by evaluating to the system variable 1132 15 1132 1100 i 2 i 0 The value of system variables 1100 1132 are sent out at last which are saved as 1 0 or 0 0 Note The values other than 1 0 or 0 0 are evaluated in 1100 1115 see the following lt Vacant gt regards as 0 Other than lt Vacant gt regards as 1 158 Chapter 2 Programming It is indefinite when the value is less than 0 000000071 2 Tool form offset value from 2701 to 2964 tool wearing offset value from 2001 to 2364 Tool form offset value from 2701 to 2964 are read out the workpiece coordinate system offset value can gain the offset value or deviation value using system variables of 2501 2601 The offset value or deviation value can be modified by evaluating to the system variable i X axis tool position offset value is radius value when it is specified with radius value and it is diameter value when specifying with diameter value Tool offset number Tool form offset amount Tool wearing offset amount M Workpiece coordinate system offset Offset value X 2501 When only tool position offset is applied the system variable using for tool position offset and the variable of tool form offset are same 2000 2100 2200 and 2300 are read only and their values are alw
65. No 024 compensation coefficient x1 x2 x3 x8 336 For X axis pitch error compensation origin setting 337 For Z axis pitch error compensation origin setting 383 384 For axis pitch error compensation interval setting 1000 1127 For X axis pitch error offset setting 2000 2127 For Z axis pitch error offset setting Note offset sign changes according to the move direction when compensation is performing by offset and irrelevant to origin Setting data some user common parameters may also be set in SETTING 342 Appendix 5 Parameters Data No Content Running time TIME1 2 acme Z coordinate of memory travel limit 2 2 acme Z coordinate of storage travel limit 3 For output device selection in outputting They are set by functional keys Data numbers other than above is displayed blank Data numbers with sign may also be set in a same data number by PARAM soft key see the same data number of parameter in the parameter explanation gt O D Q x oO U A S D r D T 343 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual gt O D Q x On U o S D rr D o 344 Appendix 6 Alarm List Appendix 6 Alarm List No Cut off power at once after parameter set then power on parameter No 000 005 012 015 018 027 028 031 032 082 086 087 090 124 125 128 129 300 304 316 001 TH alarm parity error characters have been input in v
66. Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated Not activated 13th password 14th password 15th password 16th password 17th password 18th password 19th password 20th password 21th password 22th password 23th password 24th password Note the passwords of the period should be no more than 24 N14 2 Level 2 user login interface Enter level 2 user login interface N14 2 1 System clock setting and PLC programming SET DEADLINE Press f or Number key to choose item NO 1th deadline Y M D and enter into period setting where user can disable the At first press the key when the system is power on enter into login select level 2 user and input the right password as follows 385 CGSR I HIE GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual OPERATOR puFnnhubS9E PLANT LAND 1ijsiaZqWBA ADMIN LAND h4eg35Fmz BH pGia23fUw When the password is correct system enters into operation options interface for the lever 2 users N14 2 2 PLC operation options interface Move the yellow bar up and down to select corresponding options or the level 2 authority which includes system setting PLC programming from U disk and PLC files of CNCs 1 Contents system setting displays and operable by level 2 users FILES MANAGE PLANT Press f or Number key to choose item gt ystem
67. O x Q a 5 Sr mz GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual EOB DELETE Press i in sequence and delete the content before and the cursor is moved to the first word of the address in the block to be cleared S1234 4 4 22 10 Clearing Many Blocks Clear the content from the present displayed words to the block of the specified sequence number _N1234 M10 M15 10 0 T0122 N2233 1200 N3344 2Z10 0 Clear the content in the range 1 From the cursor starting position input the sequence number of the last block which is one of many blocks to be cleared DELETE 2 Press N3344 Z10 0 4 4 22 11 Arranging a Memory Because the part program should be often edited it causes the unreasonable usage for the memory and the data with the specified length can t be stored Therefore the memory should be arranged a amp 1 in mode PROGRAM 2 Press to switch into the program or the program check interface CANCEL SHIFT 3 Press and in order After arranging the number of storable characters is displayed at the left bottom on the program content screen Note 1 When there is only one program in the memory it is stored on the standard length if many programs recognizing these program will occupy some storage space Note 2 To accelerate the program editing speed during rewriting and inserting the remaining memory space left by the actual rewritten or inserted characters ma
68. O TAPE ONLY INPUT DEIVCE2 o 1 RS232C RUNNING TIME OOOOH OOM 075 Pees LSK 14 43 31 e eed Setting the program protection lock can t be executed if it is OFF or it can be executed even it is 241 Sr mz GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual OFF and the two status can be switched with parameters Ca The mode selection is in MDI mode b Press or the cursor is moved to the item to be changed the cursor can t be moved with address N oe 4 c Based on the following list input 1 or 0 Press the addresses or INPUT to input TV CHECK PUNCH CKDE ISO code is output INPUT UNIT MM input Inch input INPUT DEVICE1 The standard is set as 0 INPUT DEVICE2 The standard is set as 1 Note 1 The selection function not chosen can t be used for setting For example without the selection of the conversion between inch metric system in the metric machine INCH 1 can t be set without ISO code input selection ISO 1 can t be set Note 2 After executing G20 inch input G21 metric input command the above content of INPUT UNIT is automatically changed TV check is not performed TV check is performed EIA code is output Cll Other setting and display gt Q O r K O O 0 x Q a 5 SETTING DATA PO2 90001 NOOO NO DATA DATA 0057 0141 o 0058 0 0151 0 0059 T Q152 0 0064 10 0153 o 0065 o Q154 o 0066 20 Q155 0
69. OFGX and OFGZ of No 2 shape offset memory Note 1 When shape offset is generally used with tool selection the shape offset of tool selection 0 is canceled Note 2 When shape offset is generally used with wearing offset number it is set by parameter and the shape offset of offset number 0 can be erased 2 6 3 Tool Nose Compensation G40 G42 When the tool nose arc the cutting tapper and arc are applied and only the tool offset function is applied it is not enough for the compensation required in forming the precision part so tool nose compensation function is used to automatically compensate the above error 66 Chapter 2 Programming Tool nose path without tool O nose radius compensation a Fig 6 3 Tool path with tool nose radius compensation N G40 G00 g Command format lt G41 x Z T Q G01 5 G42 Command function compensate the tool nose radius of the machined tool to improve its machining 2 precise Command explanation G40 cancel tool nose radius compensation G41 specify left tool compensation rear tool post system G42 specify right tool compensation rear tool post system G00 G01 movement command X_ Z_ movement command coordinate value T_ tool nose direction 2 6 3 1 Imaginary Tool Nose No tool nose exists in the following position A It is necessary for the imaginary tool nose because the starting point or base position is difficult to coincide with the tool nose center
70. Operation in Automatic Running In automatic running the automatic running pauses after the feed hold button or single block one are ON on the operation panel 1 Record the stop position coordinates shown by the position display unit 2 Manual operation is performed refer to 4 3 4 3 3 The tool returns to the recorded stop position coordinates which is the start position in the Manual mode 4 To restart the automatic running restore the state of the work mode and the modal before the manual operation 5 Press cycle start button 4 3 6 6 MDI Operation during the Automatic Running 1 Press single block button the single block is valid and stops after one block is executed 2 Select MDI mode 3 MDI operation is performed 4 To restart the automatic operation select the original work mode and modal press the 219 gt Q O r NN O O 0 x Q a 5 Sr mz GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual button on the operation panel Note 1 The MDI commands are affected by modal data before commanded automatic running Note 2 The MDI commanded modal data are still valid during the automatic running Note 3 The cutter compensation R is not executed in MDI operation Note 4 Press feed hold button during executing the next block and the automatic running pauses the automatic running can t restart during MDI command is operated 4 3 6 7 Optional Block Ski
71. Q O r 7 NO U Q Q 3 read into the tool nose radius compensation buffer Ca Tool movement along inner side of corner 180 sa C I Linear linear Programmed path a Tool nose center path ee ee EE CII Arc linear b Tool movement along outer side of obtuse angle 90 sa lt 180 I Linear linear 90 Chapter 2 Programming Programmed path Programmed path Tool nose center path Tool nose center path II Arc linear O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo Programmed path Tool nose center path Cc Tool movement along outer side of acute angle a lt 90 Linear linear II Arc linear Programmed path Zi Tool nose center path Cd Tool movement linear linear along acute angle a lt 1 91 Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual ___ Tool nose center path Programmed path 5 Offset direction changes in offset mode The offset direction is determined by too nose radius compensation G codes G41 G42 and the offset signs Offset value sign G41 Left offset Right offset In some exceptional occasion and in offset mode the offset direction can be changed But the block offset direction of a starting block and a block following the starting block can not to be changed O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 When changin
72. Setup Program Ladder From UsbDisk 3 Bak File of PLC 4 Program NCSoftware From UsbDisk FILES SERVO ser DEADLINE YES RETURN 386 Appendix14 System clock setting and PLC programming 2013 Y p ff JD m s2 M or s 1 0 CHN 1 ENG PASSWORD fs PASSWORD fs PASSWORD aexeee OO PASSWORD fs 0 0 C232 1 USB PASSWORD J PASSORD 0 M 1 T 2 M 5 axis 2 Contents PLC programming from U disk displays and operable by level 2 users FILES SIZE BYTE J 983MatestplcV1 0 LDR 218311 MaPLCV2 05 4A LDR 320902 MaPLCV2 05 2B LDR 311637 983MaPLCV2 08B 5AX LDR 277553 3 Operations can be performed by level 2 users in PLC files of CNC 387 CGSN I Hise GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual SIZE BYTE 983MatestplcV1 0 LDR 218311 MaPLCV2 05 4A LDR 320902 MaPLCV2 05 2B LDR 311637 983MaPLCV2 08B 5AX LDR 217993 4 Programming log in level 2 authority Tip please read it from bottom to top 2013 3 29 9 40 54 SUCESS 1 TaPLCV2 O1AB LDR gt x cun Puc TO vors RECORD PROGRAM RETURN _ DEADLINE 5 Press soft function key and enter period setting The passwords of periods can be enabled and disabled by level 2 authority as follows 388 Appendix14 System clock setting and PLC programming SET DEADLINE Press f or Number key to choose item NO 1th deadline Y a M a D NO al th password 1 24th NO 1th password fs 01th password Not activat
73. Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual p a DE D jel D aN O D b O mD c Program A Program ape at ee start position 130 150 L For all tool path drawing If the maximum and minimum values are set as below the drawing center becomes 35 E XMAX 70000 XMIN 0 ZMAX 150000 ZMIN 0 Drawing override H 144 150 0 96 Drawing override V 216 130 1 66 Drawing override 0 96 96 Drawing the shadow part XMAX 30000 XMIN 0 ZMAX 90000 ZMIN 40000 Drawing override H 144 50 2 28 Drawing override V 216 60 3 6 Drawing override 2 88 288 To offset the drawing position change the maximum and minimum values with one value MAX a MIN a a lt 0 go upward offset in the right side a gt 0 go downward offset in the left side 4 5 Display by the Position Displayer Selected Function The position displayer shows the current position The position displayer is with the resetting button of the position display of each axis after pressing the button the displayer corresponding the axis is cleared to 0 and then the position of the origin is shown The coordinate value can also be set into the position displayer through setting the parameters PPD or the coordinate system G50 is set by the program or MDI Note 1 When the lock switch is ON the position displayer doesn t change and when the switch is ON the movement isn t displayer on the displayer s
74. Stop cc cccsssssssssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeseeesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 219 4 3 6 5 Manual Operation in Automatic RUNMING ccccccceccecccceeeceeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaqaaags 219 4 3 6 6 MDI Operation during the Automatic Running seeesssssssssssssoetrrrerrrrrssssssssssssssceeerrrssssssss 219 FO SPO UO IAN BICK SKi Presser nen a a ean A 220 ASO TEELE OVO T d nenna a a a a a e E 221 kG HOU RU E E E EEO 221 AOAO M a DCAC E arena ateiae tense enae e 221 AOTT Miscellneous Loik osiensa E E E E ETR 222 VUl Contents 436 2 Rapid Movement Override iit cc ctes cutis siete chad cobs catia Sieh oahitelasvace delat is eddie dn aes 222 ALS Prostran RESTA Eayn ERE E TNE 222 4o MPG INETUDUON ae EE Ree Pee eee AT OA E ee Pn OTT O 226 AMA OVON E Wessanen E E 226 4 31 2 Operation of MPG Interruption edissa aaa a Ra 226 AT MRPO Insa t Movement cenere a A 226 4e Mantal Spindle FUNCION rori aa aAA A TA 227 4 3 9 Spindle Feeding Axis Interlock SWIICH L cccccccccccssccesccesscceessceessecessecessecesseceessecesecesseeesseeesas 228 4 3 10 Manual Miscellaneous FUNCTION ccccccccesscesseeesecesceeesecesceceaecececeaecececeaeeeseeceaeeesaeseaeeeeaeeeas 229 dA SGSK9OSSTA WIAIN UNIT cisissccscccescciaccesccscseasascaseecedcsscbacsenseecoccousecsseousesseecesescvesseesceosnesachecdesscoecnesacseseceesees 229 BATT AAS DISD QV assent E A aaa ties seaside A 234 BAZ KOV PUCO DAV cxiteoas aces ea
75. The program number and the sequence number are displayed on the top part shown as the following figure 00001 NOOO Serial number Program number LSK EDIT 14 35 59 ee e ee 4 4 4 Alarm Display When the alarm occurs ALM is displayed on the lower right corner and the alarm content can be learnt with the following operations ALARM ALARM Press the operation information occurs press again the alarm content is displayed as the figure below About the content of the alarm number refer to Appendix 7 00001 N0001 NO MESSAGE 1000 EMERGENCY STOP X38 4 0 ALARM CONTENT ALARM PROMPT aie aK 5 ia a 236 Chapter 4 Operation Note When the alarm occurs the alarm content is automatic displayed on the screen 4 4 5 Operation Information Mode Operation Content l TN Display the last executed sequence _ Except for the following situations Except for the Edit number mode l Display the read sequence number at Searching the sequence number l l random during searching Return to the head of the current Press when the function button program and display the program is in state number it can t return during the program running In Auto mode Look the position from the current osition of the memory in CW Continuously press when the P function button is in state direction and the system displays the initial N value Look the position from
76. Tool nose center path b Tool movement along outer side of obtuse angle 90 sa lt 180 Linear linear O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo 83 Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual F Programmed path LIntersection Tool nose center path Note the intersection is an intersection of offset paths of two block and the programmed path is offset by r II Linear arc Intersection L C S Programmed path Tool nose center path O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 c Tool movement along outer side of acute angle a lt 90 Linear linear Programmed path D eer ome ee E ea een ened Tool nose center path II Linear arc Programmed path Tool nose center path 84 Chapter 2 Programming Cd Tool movement along outer side of acute angle a lt 1 Tool nose center path ee _ L 3 Tool movement in offset mode In offset mode two or more non movement commands are not specified compensation is correctly executed otherwise overcut or short of cutting occurs Ca Tool movement along inner side of corner 180 lt a I Linear gt linear Programmed path QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo rg L Tool nose center path 5 Intersection II Linear arc ke P n Intersection c F Pa 4
77. X1 Z1 X4 a X3 na X1 Z1 C2 a Ga z3 X4 Z4 2 ID X1 Z1 Chapter 2 Programming x2 72 XI Z1 O gt Q T x2 73 1 ZD N y Program example specifying diameter input in metric 3 y o i 3 N7 o i ae NE R6 i N3 N2 Z 660 0100 6300 Start ce AA 1X 45 i i 10 i 699 n j a 180 Vi Unit mm N001 G50 X0 0 Z0 0 N002 G01 X60 0 A90 0 C1 0 F80 N003 Z 30 0 A180 0 R6 0 N004 X100 0 A90 0 N005 A170 0 R20 0 N006 X300 0 Z 180 0 A112 0 R15 0 N007 Z 230 0 A180 0 Note 2 The command uses the figure dimension input directly only when it runs in Auto mode Note 3 In the block the figure dimension is directly entered the command or between two blocks which serial figure dimension is entered directly the following G codes can not be employed G codes of 00 group Command other than G04 G02 G03 G90 G92 and G94 Note 4 Corner R can not be inserted during thread cutting Note 5 Chamfering of 2 5 3 command of corner R the chamfering of figure dimension directly input and corner R can not be employed simultaneously 33 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Note 6 The edge command of figure dimension enters directly if the end point of previous block is determined by figure dimension of next block single block can not be executed however the feed hold can be ran during the previous block execution Note 7
78. X100 0 N1 N2 100 1 NC statement execution l gt blocks being executed Macro statement execution Buffer 2 Buffer the next block normally reread the next block in other modes besides tool radius compensation mode gt N1 X100 0 NC statement execution Eo N2 1 100 N3 2 200 kn LNA 200 0 Macro statement execution BeA oe Buffer j gt 1 blocks beina executed _ blocks being read into buffer register When N1 is executed the next NC statement N4 is buffered macro statements between N1 and N4 are proceeded when N1 is executed 3 The next block is buffered in tool nose radius compensation 174 Chapter 2 Programming gt N1 G01 G41 G91 2100 0 F100 T0101 N2 1 100 se 8 Eeh j hR e N3 X100 0 A blocks being executed N4 2 200 blocks being read into buffer area N5 750 0 Executed NC statement N N2 Executed macro statement j Buffer process When N1 is executed NC statement of the next 2 blocks are reread into the buffer area macro statements between N1 and N5 are proceeded when N1 is executed 4 When there is no movement command in the next block in tool nose radius compensation G41 G42 2 Q O m D NO U co Q 3 gt N1 G01 G41 X100 0 F100 T0101 N2 1 100 N3 250 0 gt blocks being executed O blocks being read into buffer area N4 2 200 N5 MOB N6 3 300 N7 X200 0 N
79. a and see 3 the corresponding 16ms stroke is Qmax Fm 1 60 16 1000 Where qmax the max stroke value mm Fm Measure feedrate mm min Note 9 When an optional cutter compensation function is employed the tool offset value is determined by tool nose R it is sure that the tool nose radius can be correctly set For example When the tool nose center is consistent with start point Actual movement value Moving with R value Measure position Tool nose value The tool moves actually from point A to B to decide the offset value and the R value should be considered when tool moves to the point C Note 10 When this function is employed setting the parameter 008 TLCC to 0 TLCC 0 the next T code is valid when the offset amount changes 113 QO gt D r D N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 2 6 8 Outer Tool Compensation This function can be changed the compensation value from the outer device when entering the compensation value from outer device the data entered is increased to the offset value of specified offset number in a block If it is specified with entering signal the input data will be formed of offset value If the machine with automatic measure tool and workpiece device the offset value offers the modification value to NC with offset value The offset value is offered the NC modification offset value The program operation function
80. address keys include two characters press shift key to select When character is displayed on the screen the character in the lower right corner can be input Address keys Press numerical keys to input the letters uo eiado py deyo Numerical keys Press numerical keys to input the digits and the punctuation marks EL Press EOB key to input colon 232 Chapter 4 Operation Page up down key The interface is paged up or down for one page The cursor is moved upward or downward i i fe 6m Soft keys The function of soft keys is to display the content at the bottom of the screen 233 gt Q O P q D O O DR Q mr 5 ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 4 4 1 Status Display In the lower left corner the status is displayed ACTUAL POSITION 01111 No060 eir 0 OOO w ud Qos W 0 000 120 160 200 80 Aactual feedrate 00500 0 Spi _ speed 0000 M code 00 Tool NO 00 Tool Offs NO 00 OOM OOS 14 30 44 ce The status are displayed as below NOT READY It means the control device or the servo system is abnormal LSK It means the label skip state It changes into the label skip state by turning on the power or resetting the system not in MDI mode BUF It means that some block has been read but not executed The block not executed is cleared by resetting not in MDI mode ALM It means the alarm
81. and restriction procedure are different for different machine tool builders Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder when operating Note When the offset number is specified to 0 in a block if the cutter compensation inputs from outer equipment that is to say when the offset is erased the workpiece coordinate system can be moved to input value it is determined by the machine refer to the appropriate manual issued by the machine tool builder 2 7 Cycle Machining Function The repetitive machining is the especial function for the turning machine as rough turning Normally a piece of serial path needs to describe by three or more than ten commands a command O 2 Q O r D N U Q 3 mD can be specified to use for cycle function Besides the variable value related with repetitive motion needs to prescribe again simplifying the program by using these canned cycle and it will more valid Generally the canned cycle includes two kinds 1 Single canned cycle 2 Complex canned cycle Note The diameter programming is used in the following figures When programming the tool start point is set outside the machining path not inside 2 7 1 Single Canned cycle G90 G92 and G94 Three canned cycles G90 G92 and G94 are available 2 7 1 1 Outer Cylindrical Surface Cutting Cycle Axial Cutting Cycle G90 Linear cutting canned cycle is employed in the following commands
82. are same to the subprogram The storage space for storing the macro program includes into the storage capacity of CNC 2 10 6 3 Macro Statement and NC Statement The following blocks are referred to as macro statements i Blocks containing an operation command such as logic operation ii Blocks containing a control command Such as GOTO DO or END iii Blocks containing a macro call command Such as G65 G66 and G67 The block of macro call of G code The program of non macro program statement is called NC statement The macro statements have differences from NC statements see the following 1 Usually the single block not stops in single block mode 2 It is not regarded as not move the block in cutter compensation C 3 Distinguishing from performing the time 173 O 2 Q O r D s N U Q 3 mD Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 2 10 6 4 Macro Program Statement Execution To smoothly machine the CNC pre reads the next NC statement to be executed which is called buffer In G41 G42 the NC pre reads statements after NC of 2 or 3 blocks in advance macro program statement of arithmetic expression and conditional jump are executed after they are buffered into register besides blocks of MOO M01 M02 or M30 and other prohibited M codes and the blocks including G31 do not reread Explanation O When the next block buffers M code G31 do not buffer gt N1 G31
83. at least 5 seconds 4 2 Program Lock Switch Normally only the program lock is ON the program can be edited Notes 1 The program lock state can be checked on the program check interface 2 Some parameter rewritten items can only be executed when the program lock is ON 3 Whether some functions can be executed is set by the system NC parameter 10 6 when they are OFF 4 3 Operation of the Machine Operation Panel 4 3 1 Operation Panel The function of operation panel and the allocation of switches may vary as the different machines about the details please refer to the machine manual and PLC manual with corresponding version The manual only introduces the operation panel with one standard configuration which is shown as the following figure 206 Chapter 4 Operation A J B oD 3 ax te MDI Er Fx JenRss oRice TRE amp B e a o 4 wro Ob WP Fusero usera users X1 HE RR Sis e a e mst 10 e e 4 VL gt rs0 S o 2 Jusersfusero Yo ikea lt X10 f wee f nru wan Jessen HES D J D a 4 VUF100 ho P 9 usereluseniof of G X100 f xas f tme p mate Etg en 4 3 2 Emergency Stop In emergency press this button all axes movement of the machine stops immediately and the button keeps self lock in the stopping position gt Q 5 P q D O O mm Q 5 Emergency stop button The button release button varies as the different machin
84. at the same the command specified at the back is effective 177 Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual For example Variable 1 1 0 _ 2 2 0 3 4 3 0 _ lt HO HO HT 5 0 When the arguments 14 0 and D5 0 are specified by variable corresponding to 7 in above example the latter D5 0 is enabled O 2 Q O r D N U Q 3 mD 2 10 7 2 Modal Call G66 Macro call mode can be specified by performing the following commands In macro call mode calling for once the specified Marco program when performing the movable command for each time G67 cancels modal call G66P Program number L Repeated time lt Argument assignment gt After G66 P specifies the program number of user macro program L specifies the repeated times from 1 to 9999 When L is omitted L is considered to 1 Argument assignment is same to the simple call H6 Macro call mode is cancelled by performing the following command G67 Note G66 must be commanded before all the arguments in G66 block Using Minus and decimal point in lt argument assignment gt is regardless of the address 2 10 7 3 Multiple Call Macro program can be called from macro program is like subprogram Call time simple call and modal call can be realized up to 4 layers 2 10 7 4 Multiple Modal Call The specified macro program is called at once when the movement command is performed onc
85. automatically locked Therefore the programs that do not need locked should use the numbers other than 9000 9899 J10 3 The State After Key Locking In key locked mode see Section J10 4 below the state of the programs No 9000 9899 are as follows 1 Their information is not displayed even in execution 2 Program number search alarm No 071 is impossible in Edit mode Auto mode Therefore they cannot be edited The memory cannot be sorted Their numbers are not included in the display of all program numbers 5 Program output is impossible not output even all programs are output Program deletion is impossible not deleted even all programs are deleted Program storage is impossible alarm No 170 J10 4 Key Lock and Unlock Procedures 1 Preset a password 1 to 99999999 in parameter No 387 Take down the password since the contents of the parameter is not displayed Programs cannot be locked if it is set to 0 Note 1 The setting of the parameter is only active in unlock state Note 2 The parameter is not cancelled even in parameter complete clearing state Note 3 The parameter turns 0 after memory s clearing completely i e the program lock is released 2 To enable the unlock set the same value in parameter No 408 as that in parameter No 387 The unlock is enabled only when it has the same value as in parameter No 38 7 The settings of the parameter are not displayed Note 1 The parameter can
86. be caused by the error of cutter compensation An alarm does not occur when this angle is less than 1 Cd When the machine area residues or an alarm occurs C I The following illustration indicates that the cutting in machine area is not adequate 105 Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Ei A P F Machine area retains Ea a ga 5 f N ra g Programmed path with chamfering Tool nose center path The section l4 or loin the above figure of programmed path other than chamfering is in the following range in inner corner the short cutting may occur Osl or l Sr tan22 5 r Tool nose radius The enlarged drawing of the machining remains part O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Tool nose Although the tool can be positioned at B of the above figure yet it is still positioned at A Tool nose is tangent to line L In this case area C is not machined I No 52 and No 55 alarms occur in the following circumstance 106 Chapter 2 Programming Programmed path limit with chamfering Alarm displays on this path VA Tool nose center path ithout eee eee alee chamfering Tool nose center path with chamfering Tool nose center path Programmed path The outer chamfering with offset is increased a limit to programmed path In the above illustration the start end points of tool nose center path is separately consistent with the i
87. cancel mode or tool change If the offset value in offset mode is changed the new offset value will calculate new vector in the end of block and the image tool number and tool offset number can also be changed with the same mode 108 Chapter 2 Programming The offset value in block N6 calculates The offset value in When some vectors between block N6 and N7 are generated the offset value of block N6 calculates the vector in the end of current block c Offset amount polarity and tool nose center path When the negative offset value is specified the program in the figure is performed by changing G41 into G42 or change G42 into G41 When tool machine is applied in inner side and it will become into outer contour machining vice versa Example is as follows usually supposing the NC machining program is positive offset value QO gt D r D me N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 vo When a tool path see the figure a is specified in program if a negative offset value is specified tool must be moved according to the b the tool movement on b will become into a when the offset value is reversed Figure a Programmed path s a b Note Tool nose offset vector reversed depending on the sign of offset value but the direction of tool nose supposed is invariable Therefore when the supposed tool nose is machined at the starting point the sign of offset value can not be changed 2 6 5 Offset Va
88. commands The automatic running operation steps are as below 216 Chapter 4 Operation 4 3 6 1 Start of Automatic Running The steps of starting to run the program stored in the memory C I Select the program number refer to program number search in Section 4 4 14 CII Select the Auto mode III Press cycle start button When the button of cycle start is pressed the system starts automatic running and cycle start button lamp is ON meanwhile Note Press cycle start button is invalid or cancelled in the following situations a Press feed hold button b Press emergency stop button c The resetting signal is connected About the details please contact the machine manufacturer d Mode selection button is set in the wrong position except for auto edit and MDI modes Ce The sequence number is being searched f The alarm occurs g In automatic running it is neither in feed hold nor in stop state h NC system is not ready gt Q O P K O DR Q 5 4 3 6 2 Automatic Running Pause 1 Press button Press button the lamp of cycle start button is OFF and the feed hold button lamp is ON Then I Ifthe tool is being moved the feeding stops after deceleration CII If itis G04 dwell state the pause state won t continue II The machine running stops after execution of M S or T func
89. control of M96 M97 Hence the interruption is active only after returning to 01000 K11 3 7 User macro program interruption and modal information User macro program interruption is different from general program calls It is started by interruption signal UINT in program execution As a rule change of the modal information in an interruption program has a negative impact on the original program Therefore modal information restores the state before interruption when it returns to the original program with M99 even the modal information is changed in an interruption program When M99 Pxxx x is used to return to the original program from an interruption program the modal information in a program is controllable Hence the modal information changed in the interruption program may be contiuously used If the modal information at the interruption of the original program is reused the return of the following travel depends on the modal data at interruption Therefore in this case 1 Modal information is given in the interruption program 368 Appendix 11 Interruption Function of User Macro Program or 2 Necessary modal information is commanded at return point Application is taken into account like this OA AAA M96 PX XXX Interruption signal UINT Ox 6 A Modal information P not commanded changes PX iModal information is same a 7 ithe status without interruption _
90. effective Note 5 G codes are shown one of them in terms of group 2 5 1 Positioning G00 Function Tool in the position of coordinate position X Z or from the current position is rapidly traversed in terms of the specified distance along each axis separately Format GOO X U Z W 21 Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual X axis we Diameter U specifying X Diameter specifying _ _____Z axis O Q jej so O a ye NO P Pa 3 0 U S Q x Q 3 4 Odi 3 1a 7 5 Co Unit Inch Diameter programming G00 X4 0 Z5 6 or GOO U 6 0 W 3 05 Note 1 G00 rapid traverse rate of X Z axis can be separately set by modifying parameter 92 and 93 by the machine tool builder Rapid traverse rate can not specified by address F Tool is accelerated in the start of block till to the predictive speed in the mode of G00 positioning And it is decelerated to 0 till to the end of block In position check can be set according to the parameter 6 5 CINP ensure that the next block executes after it is in the mode of in position Note 2 In position means that the feed axis motor reaches the range for specifying end position this range is determined by setting parameter 70 and 71 according to the actual need by machine tool builder 2 5 2 Linear Interpolation G01 Function G01 Linear interpolation moves the tool to the position of X Z at the speed
91. forbidden area the distance C should be set and the d distance must be set when checking from point D to enter forbidden area Forbidden area the 1 limit A Forbidden area the 2 limit WA Forbidden area the 3 limit INN SSS o Workpiece center A Chuck can be protected when set according to the above figure and both the chuck and tail stock can be protected when set according to the following figure 55 O DE Q O r D s N U Q 3 mD Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 56 Forbidden area the 1 and 3 limits SE ng et a a SN ee 7 O Q Q D gt Y pR D Y Y Workpiece center POEET EEE E E TI ae MMM Area can over lapping SN Note 1 After the power is turned on each limit is enabled after the manual reference position return or automatic reference position return has been performed by G28 In order to the safety manual can not be performed at a rapid traverse rate before related parameter 9 0 Note 2 If the power is turned on the reference point return is performed and the reference point is within the forbidden area In the G22 mode in the 2 and 3 limit then the alarm will generate immediately When G23 changes into G22 and if the tool is in the forbidden area alarm occurs the next movement Note 3 When tool has been entered the forbidden area and it can not be retracted from t
92. gt Q Q Q C ZA Q a 5 C O a 5 SA pak E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual E a the block and setting procedures fj compensation The mechanical wearing compensation is executed on the machine side Each axis can independently take the minimum movement unit as the unit and the compensation amount can be set as the parameters in the range of 0 255 Absolute incremental Specify the absolute command with addresses X and Z the incremental one command with U W These address words can be specified in one block The data are sent to NC from the machine outside and the specified operation is executed The types corresponding to the external data are as follows ademais 1 External workpiece number search C 2 External tool compensation C 3 External alarm information 4 External operator information Tool offset One lowest valid digit in T code T code of two digits or the lowest two valid digits T codes of four digits specify the tool offset number The offset value corresponding to the offset number must input from MDI key and register into the memory The offset compensation of 32 groups is standard and 64 groups can be selected Manual absolute Whether the distance of the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the ON OFF coordinates can be selected by turning the manual absolute switch on or off on the machine operation panel Manual absolute switc
93. if the system is power on just now or the emergency stop is released or 4 alarm is cancelled just now Manual reference point return or auto reference point return G28 should be at least performed once O 2 Q O r D s N U Q 3 mD 2 5 9 Dwell G04 Format G04X t or GO4U t or GO4P t Function Any kinds of these commands can be used for dwell Before starting the next block wait for t ms after the previous is executed The max command time is 99999 999s The time error is within 16ms For example Dwell 2 5 sec G04X2 5 or G04U2 5 or GO4P2500 Note 1 Address P can not be specified by the decimal point Note 2 The dwell starts in the following two cases Which one is enabled is determined by CINP 1 After the previous block is turned to 0 2 After the machine tool reaches command value after positioning Note 3 When input in inch if U or X is before G04 the dwell time is 10 times of standard format one Example U1 0000 G04 when input in inch the dwell time is 10s Note 4 When G04 shares a same block with other movement commands G04 is valid and the others are not performed Example G01 X10 0 G04 F100 When input in metric dwell is performed 10s linear movement G01 is not performed 2 5 10 Coordinate System Setting G50 2 5 10 1 Command for Coordinate System Setting The following command determines coordinate system Format G50 X u Z w 46 Chap
94. interface immediately jumps to the program restart one which is shown as below 223 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual PROGRAM Program lock on D11I11N1111 01111 N10 GOO XO ZO N20 G01 X50 0 Z100 0 F500 N30 X100 N40 Z50 N30 X30 2 30 N60 X50 A90 N70 A170 R20 N80 M30 Q 60 LSK 4 t AUTO 14 28 20 ar oe T 3 Press program restart button again on the operation panel the lamp is OFF and then switch into the program interface press cycle start button the program starts machining from the interrupted position OQ DE Q se eD N z E D PROGRAM RESTART 01111 N0060 o 30 000 30 000 30 000 30 000 LSK BUF AUTO 14 29 01 i ee Dee Points for attention Note 1 Normally P program number P mode is selected while Q program number Q mode is selected only when the following situations occur Ca Cut off the power supply b Press the emergency stop button c The coordinate system changes after the last automatic operation is completed Note 2 In the following situations P the cursor the program is not started Ca After the power supply is connected the automatic operation is not executed 224 Chapter 4 Operation b The automatic operation is performed after the emergency stop is released or after the stroke limit in memory type alarms c The automatic operation is perform
95. j GOG X85 0 22 6 TO363 Tas68 T G94 X12 0 Z 2 0 F208 GH X85 0 22 0 TB3D3 7 4 0 GIH X12 0 Z 2 0 F200 7 0 0 4 0 7 7 0 7 0 GOO X85 0 2 5 6 7 7 0 G94 X40 0 2 9 6 F208 X 40 0 Z 9 0 7 11 0 7 11 0 7 13 0 7 13 08 2 15 68 2 15 80 2 17 68 2 17 08 GHG X200 0 7200 0 Tasee GH X200 0 2200 6 TOZO H30 H30 2 7 2 Compound Canned Cycle GSK983Ta s compound canned cycle includes outer roughing cycle G71 end face cutting cycle G72 closed loop cutting cycle G73 finishing cycle G70 deep hole drilling cycle G74 outer grooving cycle G75 and thread cutting cycle G76 The system executes these codes and automatically counts cutting times and cutting path based on the programmed path infeed amount and retraction amount executes the cycle tool infeed cutting tool retraction tool infeed many times and automatically finishes roughing and finishing and starting point and end point of its codes are the same 2 7 2 1 Outer Roughing Cutting Cycle G71 G71 realizes a compound cycle roughing of a group of slant commands It performs the axial cutting to the blank called stepped roughing and cuts along the path of command group at last returns to the initial point and completes roughing There are two kinds of rough turning cycle 123 O gt Q O r D N U Q Q 3 D Q Qr msz GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual The first kind is as the following
96. lower left corner are not twinkling the tool offset value can be operated zero clear and incremental input with X0 or Z0 4 4 12 7 inputting the Offset Value of the Counter Select Function INPUT During setting the offset amount press once when only the addresses U and W are input without the numerical values the value of U or W of the relative coordinate values is set The usage is as below Ca Press for several times after switching into the interface of to select the interface with the offset number or input b Press L umber input Cc The standard tool moves to the standard point in Manual mode d Display the relative coordinate values U W on the interface and is reset to 0 The method is ay a 256 Chapter 4 Operation SHIFT Press COR CLEAR on the relative coordinate or press COR CLEAR or press SHIFT J Ce Move the tool of the offset amount to the standard point Then the offset amount is displayed on the relative position f On the tool outline offset interface the value of the relative position is taken as the offset amount through pressing M If it is moved to the standard point the relative coordinate U 18 502 W 22 293 is displayed press INPUT to input 18 502 and press W to input 22 293 finally press which is shown as the following figure TO OUTLINE OFFSET POI1 NO X Z R cor 018 502 02 293 000 000 co2 000 000 000 000 000 00
97. makes the manual more complex So some often used functions are explained correspondingly in the manual In the part of notes of this manual some items are especially explained You can skip some notes without special explanations in the manual to read the followings and at last read it until you ep C 3 D lt have read the followings Chapter 2 Programming Chapter 2 Programming 2 1 What is Programming CNC machine tool is to control the machine and perform operations according to the compiled program beforehand Tool path and other machine conditions should be programmed before parts are machined by the CNC machine tool and the compiled program is called Parts Program The process from part drawing to part machining is shown below Machining Parts machine Parts drawing technology CNC machine range and CNC machine tool selection Workpiece installation in the machine and essential clamp selection Cutting sequence Blank selection tool start position roughing and the completion of cutting value and tool path Selection for cutting tool and tool clamping and determination for the installation position in the machine tool Cutting conditions Spindle speed feedrate and cooling ON OFF QO gt D aa D s N U O Co S 3 3 vo Process table See NOO GO X80 Y20 1 0 0 O NOO r X50 Y20 Compile contents of the process table into programs to into the CNC The followings
98. may be limited within 2m the feedrate is not changed The CNC cutting feedrate can be controlled within 30m min and the machine tool actually can be limited within 6m min Refer to the manual and machine tool manual in actual programming Programmer can perform programming after fully understanding program limitations Chapter 2 Programming Table 2 5 Basis address and ranges of command values including additional option i Input in mm Input in inch Input in mm Input in inch Output in mm Output in mm Output in inch Output in inch 1 9999 ropa G 0 99 Same as left Same as left function X Z U W 99999 999 mm 3937 0078inches 99999 999mm 9999 9999inches Coordinate word I K 0 99999 999 mm 0 3937 0078inches 7999 999 9 g999 9999inches Feed per revolution 1 mmir 0 0001 inches r A Mai 0 0001 inches r Thread leading 500 00mm r 50 0000inch r ae 50 0000inches r Feed per revolution thread leading 0 001mm r 0 001 mm r l feedrate 1 10 500 000mm r oe 500 000mm r Pitte Parameter setting F Feed norte 1 mm min 0 01 inches min oo 0 01 inches min p 15000mm min 600 00inches min ED 600 00inches min Paa F O 2 INS elite O de mh ie Parameter setting 15000 0mm min 15000 0mm min Thread ledin E 0 001 mm 0 000001 inches 0 0001 mm 0 000001 inches g 500 0000mm 9 999999inches 500 0000mm 9 999999inches Thread leading Ms N feedrate 1 10 E oe Ditto I R0O0O Ditto parameter setting 99 99999mm 9
99. of the interruption signal UINT Therefore it is only applicable for the occasions that is not suitable for state triggering mode and only one user macro program interruption is performed in the whole program interruption signal is held ON in this case Except special purposes the actual effects of the two modes are the same there is no difference in the time from the input of signal to the actual execution of interruption f L n i l Interruption signal UINT Interruption be Interruptionbe Interruption be Int muption be executed executed executed executed a a a a In execution User macro proram mterruotion Interruption be executed x Edge tiggermg mode Fig 3 5 User macro program interruption signal State triggering performs user macro program interruption in the ON state of signal Edge triggering performs user macro program interruption in the rise edge of signal Therefore in the above example state triggering performs 4 interruptions while edge triggering only one K11 3 6 Return from user macro program interruption M99 is the command for returning from user macro program interruption to the original program Also the sequence number in the returned program can be specified with address P In this case search starts from the relevant program beginning and returns to the initially appeared program number Though other interruptions cannot be performed in the execution of us
100. offset the tool shape offset and the tool nose wearing offset the tool wearing ee wearing offset offset which can be respectively set This characteristic greatly simplify the machining of the machine tool In other words the operator can only set and improve the wearing amount Small value number search A corresponding program is found and executed X axis value movement along X axis can t be input switch on the machine control panel 203 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual oe Mirror image of double The symbol of X axis value in the program can be changed by G codes to tool post realize the symmetrical cutting mirror image l For the straight cutting vertical to or parallel with the axis the angle chamfering Angle chamfering and or corner R can be inserted The data of angle chamfering or corner should be corner R specified by addresses l K and R Bi l During the arc interpolation the arc radius can be directly specified instead of 87 Specified arc radius R l addresses and K the arc radius must be equal to or less than 180 For the arc cutting command axis does not move on arc plane only the Feedrate sine curve l l 88 tal interpolation the assumed axis can control the feedrate of the other axis contro which forms the change of the sine curve l l In the linear interpolation one signal is sent from outside the remaining Skip function movement amount can stop and
101. on the operation panel the 31 32 33 Q D gt block with slash code at the beginning can be ignored The added memory Based on the number of standard programs add 96 programs totally 191 F Q Oo r 4D Q gt Z o O 4 O O A a 5 Q Q 5 Q C s Q a 3 m C 5 O a e 5 OO O1 program number programs require to store the part program and edit C F 36 Sequence number The sequence number in the present program can be indexed on MDI LCD search panel 7 Program number search The sequence number of the 4 digits after O can be indexed on MDI LCD panel for ISO code colon can replace O 8 Specify the sequence number and restart from the program Key lock the programs 9000 9899 display setting and editing are forbidden Butter register Pre read the next block to eliminate the interruption of NC command movement Cc due to the reading time At the right bottom of LCD screen BUF is displayed when the data are input into the buffer register Screw pitch error Compensate the errors caused by the mechanical wearing of the thread which gt compensation in memory can improve the machining precision and extend the mechanical lifetime And type the compensation data are saved in the memory as the parameters which can 199 g Q Oo r 4D 0 Z o O 4 O O A a
102. output 6 6000 unit 0 1inch min inch output This value is always set to 0 325 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Parameter No 0109 JGFLX 0110 JGFLZ Description JGFLZ Lower limit of index acceleration and deceleration of X axis and Z axis in manual consecutive feedrate FL setting range 6 15000 unit mm min metric output 6 6000 unit 0 1inch min inch output Parameter No 0113 RPDFL Description RPDFL Min feedrate of rapid override FO all axes share setting range 6 15000 unit mm min metric output 6 6000 unit 0 1inch min inch output Parameter No 0107 THDFL Description THDFL Lower limit feedrate of X axis index acceleration and deceleration in thread cutting FL gt D Q x On U o S D rr D o 326 Appendix 5 Parameters setting range 6 15000 unit mm min metric output 6 6000 unit0 1inch min inch output When this parameter is enough large the retraction of the thread can be small and in thread chamfering tool retraction time can be shorten However if the value is too large mechanical shock may occurs So please choose proper value according to the machine situation standard setting 2000m min refer to parameter No 104 1 In thread chamfering X axis rapid rate THRDT THDEL PRMII04 PRMIOF 2 perform thread chamfering Time constant THRDT PRII104 X axis rapid feed X axis cut feed Chamferme
103. rapid traverse rate is confirmed and set by the machine tool builder before delivering the goods set by parameter 92 RPDFX 93 RPDFZ When each axis of machine tool separately runs movement time of each axis from starting point to end point is different For example when the rapid traverse rate of X and Z axes are 500inch min and 800inch min separately and their commands are shown below G00 U200 0 W300 0 Movement time of X axis on the machine tool from the starting point is 12 seconds Z axis is 22 5 seconds If X axis value is specified with radius programming the finished movement time is 24 seconds The tool path is shown below k inch Diameter command 200 End point 199 Starting 21 O am r D s N U O Ca Q S 3 3 m vo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual The switch on the machine operation panel can control override of rapid feedrate FO 25 50 and 100 FO is set by parameter 13 RPDEL and its unit is not indicated with but indicated with mm min or inch min 2 4 2 Cutting feedrate Feedrate per revolution or minute is determined by the digits followed by F Feed value for 1 min Move value for 1 rev Feedrate min Feedrate rev mm min inch min mm rev inch rev Feed min Feed rev Tool feed distance min Tool feed distance rev Programming address 1 15 000mm min 0 01 500 00mm r Input in Metric F1 F 15
104. respectively Variables cannot be assigned from the executing main program even a user macro program interruption is a macro program type interruption K11 3 3 M codes for user macro program interruption In principle M96 and M97 are used for the control of user macro program interruption However they may be used for other purposes upon manufacturer s requirements M function user macro program M code call etc Therefore whether these M codes are active or not depends on the setting of parameter 025 MPRM When the M codes for control of user macro program interruption are set by a parameter The M codes for user macro program interruption ON are set in parameter No 053 The M codes for user macro program interruption OFF are set in parameter No 054 That M code is not set by the parameter is selected for parameter MPRM M96 and M97 become the M codes for control of user macro program interruption and parameter No 053 and 054 are not taken into consideration In any case the M codes for control of user macro program interruption are processed internally without output It is recommended not to user the M codes other than M96 and M97 for the control of macro program interruption in consideration of the interchangeability of program K11 3 4 User macro program interruption and NC statement User macro program interruption is of two types interrupting the executing NC command or waiting for the end of the currently exec
105. set chapter two the method is press to display the setting interface and then press once more 2 There are six interfaces press button to display the required interface Page 1 Local variables 1 20 Page 2 Local variables 21 83 Page 3 Common variables 100 119 Page 4 Common variables 120 139 Page 5 Common variables 140 149 Page 6 Common variables 500 509 3 Search for the macro variable number position Method 1 Press l button to move the cursor in turn When the cursor exceeds the interface the system turns over into the next one Method 2 Press 4 Setting the macro variable value Ca Select MDI mode b Display the variable to be changed and move the cursor into the variable number to be changed and then input P input 244 Chapter 4 Operation 4 4 9 MDI Operation Input and execute the commands of one block from MDI panel MDI operation is for the simple debugging operation MDI operation steps 1 Take the example of running one block U10 5 W 20 5 D MDI Ca Press MDI button on the operation panel COMMANC b Select the function key to choose the command button the system will pop up the following interface QUEUED BLOCK 0001 N0001 e Note Here displays the current block command reo U m E m U Press MDI softkey and the step C can be omitted AHMAR SCN ox gt Q O P D O O DR Q m
106. stops executing does not stop in single program block too MPD8 amp Do not show the contents when a Show the contents when a prg prg no 8000 8999 program is being no 8000 8999 program is being executed executed 336 Appendix 5 Parameters When directly input session When directly input session programming in figure size programming in figure size regular supplementary angle is used in specification is used in angle angle instruction instruction When any prg no 0001 7999 When any prg no 0001 7999 program program is being executed and in is being executed even in single block single block mode user macro mode user macro program statement program statement executing stops executing does not stop in single program block too Parameter No 0320 UMMCD1 corresponding to prg no 9001 0321 UMMCD2 corresponding to prg no 9002 0322 UMMCD3 corresponding to prg no 9003 UMMCD1 2 3 M code calling user macro program at most set 3 of them Setting range 01 97 Can t call user macro program by MO00 even 00 is set Parameter No 0323 UMGCD0O corresponding to prg no 9010 0324 UMGCD1 corresponding to prg no 9011 0325 UMGCD2 corresponding to prg no 9012 0326 UMGCD3 corresponding to prg no 9013 0327 UMGCD4 corresponding to prg no 9014 0328 UMGCD5 corresponding to prg no 9015 0329 UMGCD6 corresponding to prg no 9016 0330 UMGCD 7 corresponding to prg no 9017 0331 UMGCD8 corr
107. stops by single block function to move tool by MDI operation the vectors VB1 and VB2 are transferred to Vs1 and Vez and the vectors Vc1 and Vc2 between block PB Pc and Pc Pp are recalculated However because the vector offset VB2 is not recalculated anymore the accuracy compensation can be performed from point Pc 15 Manual operation Refer to Section 4 3 4 when manual operation is executed in tool nose radius compensation mode 16 Subprogram The system must in offset cancel mode before calling subprogram before executing M98 Offset is enabled after subprogram is entered but the system must be in offset cancel mode before returning a main program otherwise No 036 alarm occurs 17 Notes a Specify offset value The specified number following address T is as follows Tool offset number Tool number As for T 2 1 or T 2 2 both two modes can be set the tool offset number lower one digit or two digits of T code are specified the offset value in this case the offset value corresponding to the tool offset number is employed Tool nose radius Once the offset number is specified it keeps valid until the other offset number is specified or the offset mode is cancelled Besides the offset number specifies the offset value for the tool nose radius compensation it is also used to specify the offset value for tool offset use See Section 2 6 1 b Offset value change Normally the offset value changes in
108. switching on off of the power is forbidden and the interval time should be at least 1 min CESK CNC GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual ANNOUNCEMENT This manual describes various possibilities as much as possible However operations allowable or unallowable cannot be explained one by one due to so many possibilities that may involve with so the contents that are not specially stated in this manual shall be regarded as unallowable WARNING Please read this manual and a manual from machine tool builder carefully before installation programming and operation and strictly observe the requirements Otherwise products and machine may be damaged workpiece be scrapped or the user be injured CAUTION Functions technical indexes such as precision and speed described in this user manual are only for this system Actual function configuration and technical performance of a machine tool with this CNC system are determined by machine tool builder s design so functions and technical indexes are subject to the user manual from machine tool builder Though this system adopts standard operation panel the functions of the keys on the panel are defined by PLC program ladder diagram It should be noted that the keys functions described herein are for the standard PLC program ladder diagram For functions and effects of keys on control panel please refer to the user manual from machine tool builder This manual is sub
109. systems of coordinate values X 0 0 and Z 0 0 when the base point value is set at the origin are established on the workpiece coordinate system Note The measured value of X axis is employed with diameter value 52 Chapter 2 Programming 2 5 10 6 Double tool Post Mirror Image G68 G69 G68 code is used to generate the mirror image of X axis G code Meaning G68 X mirror image ON G69 Mirror image OFF As for double tool post the program is as follows G50U Distance between double tool post G68 The following double tool post machine is performed and the program is invariable it is Same as the original tool post is machined the program 2 5 11 Inch Metric Conversion G20 G21 Inch or metric selection is performed by using G code 0 0001 inch Before the workpiece coordinate system setting and program starting G20 or G21 should be specified beforehand The following change is corresponding with G20 or G21 code change 1 Feedrate command F or E code 2 Position display 3 4 Scale unit for MPG 5 Movement distance for incremental feed Offset value Note 1 G20 or G21 code when power on is the same that of power OFF Note 2 Inch metric selection can be performed by MDI mode The selection state is changed by the G20 or G21 command Note 3 G20 and G21 can not be changed when the program is running Note 4 When the min unit system of machine is not consistent with comm
110. the current Edit mode Press when the function button position of the memory in CCW is in state direction and the system displays the initial N value Return to the head of the current Press when it is in resetting State program and display the current gt Q O P q D O O x Q as 5 number l Display the searched program In Auto mode Searching the program number n number 4 4 6 Current Position Display and Resetting POSITION 1 Press the position button 2 Press page button the three situations are displayed I Position display of the current coordinate system 231 Sr maz GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual CTUAL POSITION p 100 00001 NOOO HAr 20 TO 90 110 U 12 142 W 12 429 Aactual feedrate 00500 0 100 20 60 100 140 180 40 80 120 160 200 P mea a doe eS 00 UU After pressing or Tool NO 00 Tool Offs NO 00 ey 2 H key RUNNING TIME 0000H OOM 07S as seresponding coordinate value will twinkle And then press LSK t ak 14 40 49 the softkey the relative S coordinate is operated D Display the current position zero clear aN LJ W Q Relative coordinate zero clear Press or key when zero clear is displayed in the D o SHIFT O state Then the pressed address display is twinkling And press then the relative position of the twinkling address is cleared as zero
111. the same group Note 2 G codes are modal in 01 13 groups if soma G code is commanded it remains valid unit the other one from the same group is specified When CNC device is in the resetting state the initial G codes can be restored by setting parameters but the codes with mark are the initial ones In one group if there are two G codes with the initial one is set by the parameter but G20 and G21 keep the commanded states before power on Note 3 G codes of group 00 are non modal and are only valid in the specified block Note 4 Only one G code from each group is displayed Note 5 If there are no commanded G codes in the list or G codes are not correspond to the selected function 10 alarm occurs but G60 and G61 don t cause alarm 289 gt O O D 5 Q x N O r O F G OQ O OQ D N Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Appendix 3 List of the Range of Commanded Values mm auiout Input in inch Input in metric aon outou Address PUY OUtp system Output in system Output es p in metric system sae in inch system metric system in inch system Min setting unit O 0 001mm 0 0001mm 0 001mm 0 0001inch Max stroke ee 99999 999mm 99999 999mm 3937 0078inch 9999 9999inch position Max 99999 999mm 3937 0078inch 99999 999mm 9999 9999inch commanded value 0 99999 999m a 0 3937 0078inch 0 99999 999mm 0 99999 999mm F 1mm min 0 01inch min 1 inch min 0 01inch min Cutting 15000mm mi
112. to b and the a b and c should be evaluated These values are specified to call the user macro program body during use the macro program command G65 P9801 B120 0 C150 0 D52 0 R10 0 120 0 J30 0 K58 0 A can be omitted in above description Normally F S and T functions and the coordinate system setting can be specified before specifying this command The workpiece is same to the other types but the value different which should be machined to change the variable of macro program command 2 10 2 Variable The variable can instead of the value in macro program After the variable is used different values are evaluated with the variable when calling macro program The macro program owns the ability of versatility hereby Many variables can be employed simultaneously each variable value can be specified with one variable O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 2 10 2 1 Representation of Variable The variable is indicated with and its following digits See the following below Hi i 1 2 3 4 For example 2 10 2 1 5 109 1005 It is also can be indicated with the following lt Expression gt lt Expression gt For example 2 10 2 2 100 1001 1 6 2 The variable i can be replaced with variable lt Expression gt in the following explanations 2 10 2 2 Reference Variable The value following the address can be replaced with variable lt Address gt i or lt A
113. to 4 layers 186 Chapter 2 Programming d The limit of user macro program A and user macro program B fits with all the above items the user macro program can be only fitted the following items i The variable other than system variable can be employed ii The following operations can be performed among variables OR and XOR iii IF lt Conditional gt GOTO n can be transferred iv It can be simply call and modal call 2 10 11 P S Alarm Explanation 1 Alarm number 004 Fit address does not found in the actual position For example X1 1 Word 1 of X1 occurs after reading the next address occurs the number 004 alarm issues when the power occurs 2 Alarm number 114 The formula depart from lt Formula gt is incorrect this alarm occurs in the following circumstance a The word following the address is digit the formula other than O and For example XF 1000 XSIN 10 b IF WHILE lt Formula gt AA lt Formula gt inexistence Hil IF 1 EQ 2 GOTO 10 For example IF 1 EQ 2 GOTO 10 WHILE 1 SIN 2 DO1 WHILE 1 SIN 2 DO1 2 10 12 Macro Program Interruption Function Macro Program B If macro program interruption function performs among M96Pxxxx M97 and blocks an interruption signal is entered to the NC in the midway the control turns to Pxxxx program 187 QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User
114. to the machining restarting position its assumed that the manual absolute switch is ON no matter whether the switch is ON or OFF Note 8 In the following situations the tool can t return to the correct position in principle a The manual absolute switch is OFF during the manual operation b The tool is moved when the machine is locked or Z axis command is cancelled c Use the mirror image function d The coordinate system isn t set at the incremental programming starting position e The manual operation is inserted when the axis is operated the returning movement f After the program restart is commanded the machine lock is released g The program restart command is sent when the program with the leapfrog cutting program or the block before the one with the absolute command is executed Ch When the coordinate system is set or moved after searching while in the situation of C the tool return movement in P mode can be executed in the block in which the mirror image machining switch is OFF and in the following blocks And in such situation the mirror image machining state is same as that when the machining gets interrupted No alarm occurs in any situation Note 9 The alarm NO 60 is issued when the specified block only includes M98 M99 the macro calling commands M65 G66 G67 or the macro program sentence or the program not specified is searched Note 10 After the power supply is connected the emergency stop or th
115. transfer to the next block At the beginning of the block the numerical values 1 9 can be specified 9 Additional optional block l l l l l l k optional block skip switches are installed on the machine When the optional ski i block switch n is connected the block with n is skipped The machine manufacturer and the user can design the special function there 91 Custom macro A B a are two types A and B due to the function limit The ON OFF function can be operated on MDI LCD to replace the switches on 92 Menu switch the machine panel Therefore the quantity of switches on machine operation panel can be reduced The straight angle angle chamfering and corner values on the machining Figure dimension direct l diagram can be directly programmed Further any angle angle chamfering and programming l l l corer can be inserted between two straight lines During executing the program once the block with the sequence number Sequence number Ko l 94 l occurs which is same as the preset number the system enters the single block comparison and stop l stop state the block is completely executed l The tool path of the program can be described on LCD The machining The path display te eed l l situation can be checked by observing the path displayed on LCD The external position The position displayer of each independent axis can be installed on the display machine 97 The manual pulse generator installed on the machi
116. with Vaz Vs1 and Ves2 by the amount of manual movement The new vectors are calculated from Vc1 and Vc2 Then correct cutter compensation is performed for the blocks following Pc 215 ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Manual operation after single block stop Tool nose radius path after manual operation Ver F Veo Manual f operation ZN Programmed path absolute command 5 Tool nose radius path before manual operation Manual operation was performed when execution of a block was terminated by single block stop Vectors Vs1 and Ve2 are shifted by the amount of manual movement Sub sequent processing is the same as the case described above An MDI operation can also be intervened as well as manual operation The movement is the same as that by manual operation gt Q O r K O O x Q a 5 4 3 5 Manual Reference Position Return MACHINE 1 Press the zero return 420 button after pressing the button the left top corner LED lamp is ON 2 The machine enters the zero return self protection state after pressing the zero return axis direction keys we x z 3 After each axis zero return completes the two buttons LED lamps on the left top corner are ON Note If the wrong reference position return direction is selected the movement is not executed 4 3 6 Operation about Automatic Running The machine automatically runs based on the program
117. 0 cos 000 000 000 000 000 000 co4 000 000 000 000 000 000 cos 000 000 000 000 000 000 cos 050 000 100 000 000 000 elelolololol o gt gt Q O P q D O O DR Q ms 5 LSK MDI 14 57 36 Jeje ee 4 4 13 Display the Program 1 Edit mode PROGRAM CHECK key to enter the program display interface there are three interfaces PRGRAM and they can be checked by the soft keys Press DIR and 251 gt Q O r K O O x Q a 5 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 01111 N10 GOO XO ZO N20 G01 X50 0 Z100 0 F500 N30 X100 N40 Z50 eee ok 41 814 X EDIT 14 58 54 a a ees eee ee eed Please refer to the program search 4 4 14 for program display Press to display the program content in sequence Press to display the content in the sequence press ____ key to display it in the opposite sequence PROGRAMI Note Switch into Edit mode from the other mode and then press the displayed content starts from the block being performed currently or the block already completed if it returns to the head of the program refer to 4 4 22 4 the program is displayed from the beginning 2 Auto mode PROGRAMI Press key to display the interface with the current block 258 Chapter 4 Operation 01111N1111 N10 GOO XO ZO N20 GOL
118. 0 0I 20 0 K 50 0 G00 X280 0 T10 Tool nose path of no 1 tool is consistent with the programmed path in this program 62 Chapter 2 Programming For example 2 When the following diversification is applied in program example 1 the No 2 tool nose path is consistent with programmed path 111122 T10 T20 2 6 1 9 Using T Code Separately When only a T code is specified in a block without movement command the tool moves the offset value at rapid traverse speed in GOO mode and at cutting feedrate in other modes Wear offset movement cancellation is executed when T code of No 0 or 00 is separately specified Note 1 G50X x Z z T_ Tool not moves Tool position coordinate value X Z can be set in the coordinate system and it is gained by subtracting the offset value whose number is specified by corresponding T code Note 2 When the offset amount whose number is employing is input in MDI or Auto mode it can be used only when the offset number of T code is re specified however the new offset value can be valid in next block by setting the parameter 8 4 TLCC Note 3 Block G04T_ tool change is performed when parameter setting TLCC is equal to 1 tool offset of next block with movement command is enabled Block G04T_ tool offset is performed when parameter setting TLCC is equal to 0 but tool offset on next block is disabled QO gt D r D me N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 vo 2 6 2 Tool Form Compens
119. 00 R50 Q2 Change offset with program If the mentioned above two or more blocks are specified serially the tool nose center will move to the position where the end point of the previous block vertical to the programmed path of the previous block However if the mentioned above have not movement command the tool movement is completed in the block and moves to the end point 76 Chapter 2 Programming Programmed tool path NE 1 N7NS G42 mode N6W1000 0 N7821 N8MO04 N9U 1000 0W1000 0 The overcutting generates in the mentioned above illustration 2 Compensation is performed with G90 or G94 The tool nose compensation is applied with G90 or G94 as follows O gt D r D 9 N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 vo a Imaginary tool nose movement Normally the tool nose center path is parallel to the programmed path for each path in the cycle 1 G90 Cutting cycle A Imagination tool nose number 0 p Bj S Aae n ANAA OvO REDA DAA a D a J i We oy YO 0 ES eee Full circumstances Tool nose AR lt center path Pa WO S Bec O Path 2 a a ee Ae ee ee m LA a A Path 1 2 hee A Programmed path ae 4 O0 I G94 Cutting cycle B T1 Or CES E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 20 O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 CI G90 CH G94 78 YX ANOS K KO
120. 00 setto 4 Compensation value When the machine moves from the reference point to the position at 30000 the total compensation is as follows 7 6 4 5 2 Pitch error origin 60 compensation interval 10000 0 D8 59 60 61 127 Setting CC point Aa 2 0 7 7 6 4 1 Machine coordinate CC CC system 22 2 600000 20000 10000 0 10000 670000 Reference point The No 61 compensation point 60 of the list corresponds to the reference point while compensation point 61 corresponds to the point by 10000 in the positive direction from the origin After that every 10000 point corresponds to a compensation point So the compensation point 128 is set at 670000 In addition compensation point 59 corresponds to the point by 10000 in the negative direction from the reference point i e a compensation value from n 60 1 x compensation interval to n 60 x compensation interval is set at compensation point n In the above example a zone compensation data is as following 20000 10000 setto 7 Compensation value 10000 0 setto 6 Compensation value O 10000 setto 4 Compensation value When the machine moves from 20000 to 10000 the total compensation is as follows 7 6 4 3 3 Pitch error origin 127 compensation interval 10000 355 gt z8 po D 2 x lt 0 Op r e om Q OQ D a e eD Y p 9 2D m e x O ge
121. 000 F1 F50000 0 01 600 00inch min 0 0001 50 000 inch r Input in Inch F1 F60000 F1 F500000 Cutting feedrate is clamped at fixed speed This value Clamping Clamping value value is specified by the machine tool builder Speed after the override is also clamped 10 step modifying from 0 200 The clamp value is specified by mm min or inch min Cutting feedrate can be converted into mm min or inch min by the following formula when feed rev is performed fm frxR fm Feed min mm min or inch min fr Feed rev mm r or inch r R Spindle speed r min Note 1 G98 and G99 are modal When one of them is commanded the command is always enabled before the other command is specified Note 2 The specified feedrate is set to the error within 2 for NC computer other than the acceleration deceleration Note 3 Position encoder should be installed in spindle if the feedrate is feed rev when programming 22 Chapter 2 Programming Note 4 F code input is allowed up to 7 digits But the feedrate can not exceed the clamp value Note 5 If the number of revolution for position encoder is below 1 the cutting feedrate is uneven So the lower of the spindle speed is the more uneven of cutting speed is 2 4 3 Thread Lead The digits following address F and E specifies a lead in thread cutting Thread cutting is specified by G32 G76 or G92 Thread cutting G92 Thread cutting cycle Single canned cycle G76 Th
122. 000001 inch r 1 000000inch r E code can be employed only E6 digits selection is offered Note 1 As long as lead increase value or decrease value are over the command range the alarm occurs 014 Note 2 As for the G34 Thread cutting dwell is disabled 2 5 7 3 Consecutive Thread Cutting It is possible to specify the consecutive thread cutting block G32 G34 Since a few pulses output of intersection of block is coincident with that of the next move block the pulse distribution interruption time between two thread cutting blocks is eliminated Therefore multiple thread blocks can be specified continuously and the helical may not be damaged even if changing the cutting depth in cycle thread cutting in a same position G32 G32 G32 2 5 8 Auto Reference Position Return G27 G30 2 5 8 1 G27 Reference Position Return Check Function A point fixed on the machine is called reference position and the tool can be returned 43 QO gt D r D me N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 vo AA pak WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual to reference position by the manual reference position return G27 command is employed to determine whether the tool has reached to reference position this reference position is specified in programming if the reference point specified is not coincident with that of machine No 092 alarm occurs Format G27X u Z w When the above commands are employed the too
123. 013 Y j4 MJI D l5 H 22 M 52 S REF Check o 0 0FF 1 0N LSK FF EDIT 15 22 56 Usk ee eee EDIT 15 22 56 ee a e 3 As for PC it can communicate data with CNC by RS232 interface after setting the communication software correspondingly M13 3 Parameter transmission in C232 serial port communication mode 1 Set the communication mode of the CNC well according to the step 1 2 in M13 2 chapter and so does the communication software setting of PC 2 Press key and the CNC switches to parameter interface In edit mode input P 9999 and press data output key in the panel at the moment EDIT characters at the right of LCD screen bottom twinkles and will disappear until parameters are sent 3 To transmit parameter press the emergency stop button then switch to parameter interface input P 9999 press data input key in panel choose parameter file by communication software of PC and select send It is how parameters transmit to CNC 379 CGSN r Hise GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual NC PARAMETER PO1 00006 N0003 NO DATA DATA 0000 0010 00010110 11110110 0001 01111111 0002 11101001 0003 11111111 0004 00000000 0005 01100000 0006 00000010 0007 00000101 0008 01001001 0009 00100100 0011 00010000 0012 00000000 0013 00000000 0014 01111001 0015 01111001 0016 00000000 0017 00000000 00000011 01000000 O0000bit para Fired
124. 1 6 J52 0205 0104 2A 8 0894 OK Oo 14 STB 12 208 Chapter 4 Operation Note 1 The numerical values are different on the above list based on the machine manufacturer Note 2 The error of the listed feedrate is about 3 3 Selecting the movement axis Press the direction buttons corresponding to the movement axes and the tool moves along the selected direction gt Q O P K O mm Q 5 Note 1 Two axes can be controlled meanwhile in Manual mode Note 2 After connecting the power supply even the mode selection switch is preset as the manual mode and one axis is selected the tool does not move along the selected axis so the axis should be selected again 4 Rapid movement Press the button the machine moves along the preset axis at the rapid traverse rate A RAPID Note 1 The manual rapid traverse time constant and the acceleration deceleration mode is same as those when G00 is commanded which is set by the machine manufacturer Note 2 The manual rapid traverse rate can be set as 0 25 0 5 and 1 time of the G00 commanded speed F0 is set by the system parameter 113 which is set by the machine manufacturer Note 3 With the stroke limit selection function in the memory type parameter 9 0 ISOT and the axis with the reference position return after power on or the emergency stop the feedrate will not change into the rapid feedrate after pressing the rapid
125. 1 N3 Executed macro statement E4 l N4 NG r t 4 ty Buffer process H 5 When N1 block is executed NC statement of the next 2 blocks are reread into buffer area Because N5 statement has no movement command its intersection cannot be counted at the moment NC statements of the following blocks to N7 are read macro statements N2 N4 N6 between N1 and N7 are proceeded when N1 is executed 2 10 7 Macro Program Call Command The macro program can be called by the following method 175 O D Q O r D N U Q 3 mD Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Macro program call Non modal call G65 Modal call G66 G67 Call macro program by G code Call macro program by M code Call subprogram by M code Call subprogram by T code 2 10 7 1 Simply Call G65 The user macro program body is specified with P by executing the following command calls G65P program number L Repeated time lt argument assignment gt when the macro program body must be transferred with arguments the arguments were specified with lt argument assignment gt There are two kinds of lt argument assignment gt The arguments are the actual value for the variable in user macro program body Note G65 must be specified before the arguments of its block it is regardless of address lt Argument evaluation gt can be employed the negative decimal point 1 Argument assignment A B C Do iri Z A
126. 118 Other PICCAUMONS ciii eth cette deaaaca E ct ceveda dents E N 196 CHAPTER 3 CNC SPECIFICATION AND CONFIGURATION FUNCTION 197 CHARTER 4 OPERA NON eee ee te ee re er 206 Al POWER ON OFF scicciesssscsccsassesiicisessescssapeitesenesscseansivestensssatsausien scutes spesansioeoseseeseseas cleesestesnnbicesesceeseceedsesate 206 seo POWT a erent merece ne arrears ee te ere etre eee re erent ee ere ere ee ere err ere rere 206 dla AO WV IE stad oy aude ese ch set evra ose ents ase ep se hase eset dha ened oad he E sat ean a 206 4 2 PROGRAM LOCK SWITCH scisctcsdesdcsicesescsd lien daatdese caste auena ienee Teao AOs tr aeo an ee Dias eteinen ai 206 4 3 OPERATION OF THE MACHINE OPERATION PANEL essssssssoseossssessooooessseesooooessssosoooeesssseosoooosssseosssseesss 206 7 i He Operai ONF a anaa a a a S 206 AO HITICTOCICY lOD sre E a E T E N E 207 BDF IMOASSCIOCHON miiirn ea E E EE EAE E E E OAE aes 207 4 3 4 Operation Relative to the Manual snin 208 A Seely Natal Continuous Feedin treinen aa a EE 208 oes MNE aa a E E E E E A 209 dS Manual ADSOMie ONOFF E ar E A a E 210 4 3 5 Manual Reference Position Return ccccccescessecesscessecesecesceceecesceceaeeececeaeeesceceaeeeeeeseeeesaeeeas 216 4 3 6 Operation about Automatic RUNMINO isisi a E T adele 216 AOL Sartor Automice RUMI osere apa a E A T 217 A302 Automaine RUINS Pausi a a a a a aaa 217 AO ole DIOCK erei A AR 218 4 3 6 4 Restarting after a Feed Hold or
127. 18 PRGQ No 319 PRG8 It contacts the positive travel limit of X axis It contacts the negative travel limit of X axis 22 noweaintepenvediedon o oo S WASS moves in the positive direction 219 moves me negam areton moves in the negative direction 2 moues m ne poeme arean moves in the positive direction Tool enters the exclusion areas of storage type travel limit 2 3 when X axis 29 moues m ne negameareaton 215 It contacts the positive travel limit of Z axis E 721_ Weontacts the negative ravel imitotzais 2 moues n mo posedanton o oo WS moves in the positive direction 22 morean no negano grenon oo s WRES moves in the negative direction 32 noveintepostvedtecton o oo e ASW moves in the positive direction 2 moues mne negame areton oo NASW moves in the negative direction 401 No drives ready signals of X axis and Z axis arriving CNC Check the drive alarm number or the connection 401 1 No drives ready signal of X axis arriving CNC Check the drive alarm l number or the connection 401 3 No drives ready signal of Z axis arriving CNC Check the drive alarm number or the connection Even though the ready signal of position control PRDY has been cut off 349 gt 5 D 5 2 x op gt A 3 D mj Js Wey 9 xIpUeddy Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual the ready signal of the speed control VRDY is not cut off Or if the power is switched on t
128. 181 2I S Subprocram CWE C Odeena a a a O 181 21079 Decimal Point Position Ol Ave nici ts x 0255 5s was caicdec acca a E R 182 2 10 7 10 Distinguish from M98 Subprogram call and G65 User macro program call 182 GSK CESK CNC GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 2 10 7 11 Nestification and Local Variable of User Macro Program cccccccccccccccccccceeesssseeseeseeeeeeeees 182 2 10 8 Relationships with Other FUNCTIONS ccccccccccescceseceseccesseeesseeeseeeeeeenseecsseeeeeseeseeeenseeenseeens 183 2 10 9 Especial Codes and Words in Macro Program cccccccccccccssccccsscceessececssescessecceeseceesseeeeseeeens 185 21010 LIMNI PIOCC COMING ice soctcotcarsatceudcatcadatatt ance A S 186 ZAOTA PTS AIAUITT EX DIGI AON sistas daca e aE EER EET E E A toes 187 2 10 12 Macro Program Interruption Function Macro Program B cccccccccccssssccceessssceceeesssseeees 187 210 F3 sEXCMAl QUU GORMAN isin caste ontecsalesastecatenataateons oehtrosst e 188 2 10 13 1 Open Command POPEN ccccccsssecececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeasseeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaqaaags 189 210132 Data Output Command BPRNI DPRN T aie ite Gira een Gentian 189 P21 kG al yee eam gS DL hs erreur eran ene eee eeare Torres tern Cee Crer en anne nctT ty Cer te ear an ear ny encry a Cr Cae Crete etary 190 2 10 13 4 Required Setting When Using this Function cccccccccccecccccceceeeseeeesssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 190
129. 2 1 The override is multiplied by the compensation set by parameter 1000 2127 then output gt z8 po eD 2 x lt 6 p rme e om Q OQ D a e eD Y p 9 2D m e i O ge eD mD d9 aD a e gt Cc zD 9 er 353 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual PLM2 PLM Override for all axes H8 3 2 Pitch error compensation origin EES PECZRX PECZRZ PECZRxX Z Pitch error origins for X Z axes They are used to set origins of pitch error compensation list Set the value for the range 0 127 according to axes of machine H8 3 3 Pitch error compensation interval eye REIT aA Co e PECINTX Z Pitch error compensation intervals for X Z axes o fe fal fe They are used to set intervals of pitch error compensation They are usually set for 8000 or above Metric or 4000 or above Inch And the setting of 0 is not compensated for axis Setting unit 0 001 mm metric 0 0001 inch inch The setting of X axis should be above 16000 metric or above 8000 inch if X axis is programmed by diameter And the parameter should be set by diameter too H8 3 4 Pitch error compensation value The pitch error compensation values for all axes are set in the following parameters Axis Parameter No 1000 1127 2000 2127 Compensation cannot be set for the parameter numbers other than the listed in the above table The
130. 2 11 1 Overview The tools are divided into many groups and the tool lifetime is specified in each group by time or frequency The tool lifetime management is the accumulative tool lifetime of each group and the tool is changed based on the specified sequence in the same group 2 11 2 Setting the Tool Group The tool sequence and the tool lifetime in each group are preset in NC device based on the following format Ooooo G10L3 PooLAAAA TAAao TAA co TA Aco PooLAAAA TAAao G11 M02 M30 Program number Start setting the tool group The digits after P is the group number 1 16 The digits after L is the tool lifetime 1 9999 Note 3 1 gt AAijis the tool number 2 oo is the offset number Select the tool based on the sequence 1 gt 2 gt ND CN Setting the data of the next group Setting the tool group end Program end 191 QO gt D r D me N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 io Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Sending a program Edit mode Edit Display The memory Part program e C JI Auto mode edit area The counter preset The memory L gt Display Tool lifetime data area The setting operation is as below Ci The edited tool lifetime management program is sent to NC The program is registered into O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 the part program memory for display and editing
131. 2 of the thread will occur during the automatic acceleration and deceleration and cutting thread which is shown as the figure 4 1 Therefore the surplus of 61 and 62 should be reserved Fig 4 1 Incorrect thread path 1 62 is set by the thread cutting speed V mm sec and the servo time constant T1 OZET GM ecereenoeremnonecs 1 Unit T1 sec V mm sec V is set by the thread lead L and the spindle rotation revolution R 1 R rom L mm 50 p mm O the servo time constant T1 sec is always calculated by T1 0 033 2 Method of setting 51 01 is set by the thread cutting speed V the servo time constant T1 and the thread precision a 61 t T1 T1exp _2 YV 2 T 1 When the thread cutting begins the specified lead is less than the set lead L so the lead error is L a 2 allowed Therefore L When the value of a is set the time t of reaching the required precision is set by formula 3 and value t is put into formula 2 to obtain 61 moreover V T1and T2 are set with the same method of 62 Because the calculation of 61 is very difficult so the figure of 61 is shown as below refer to the following introduction 293 gt O O 5 Q Xx NN F D O Q r Q U Q Q x Q Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 01 v 10ms sec Servo time constant V 20mm sec 40mm s s a ONN T1 2 bonm T2 3 ey OD O L L Initially the thread precision a is obtained by known thre
132. 5 is inserted the word becomes 212502 5 Note 2 Same after the numerical value is added to all addresses of EOB LF insert 23 below on which the cursor points and the word becomes 23 but it isn t significant in the program 4 4 22 6 Rewriting a Word 270 Chapter 4 Operation N1234x100 0 Z125 0 T105 S1234 To change into M15 1 Search or scan the word to be rewritten 2 Input the word to be rewritten N1234x100 0 Z125 0 M15 S1234 The changed content 4 4 22 7 Inserting or Rewriting Many Words Blocks or Character String Many words blocks or character string can be inserted but maximum 32 characters can be inserted one time Insert T105 M20 in the previous example input INSERT 0 0 Same the word pointed by the cursor can be rewritten to many words blocks or character string Note 1 When the cursor points below Z of 2125 0 the inserted 2 5 M20 becomes Z125 02 5 M20 Note 2 When the cursor points below T of Z125 0 T105 the inserted 2 5 M20 becomes Z125 02 5 M20 gt Q O P iN O Q as 5 4 4 22 8 Clearing a Word N1234x100 0 _Z125 0 T105 S1234 To clear Z125 0 1 Search or scan the word to be cleared DELETE 2 Press i N1234x100 0 T105 S1234 Content after clearing 4 4 22 9 Stop Clearing before EOB Searching scanning word displayed word N1234x100 0 Z125 0 T105 M13 S1234 Clear the area 271 gt Q O r K O
133. 509 will not be cleared 2 10 3 3 System Variable System variable has canned usage in system it is used for reading and writing the data in NC such as the tool offset and current position data Also it is the signal changed between machine programmable controller PLC and user macro program 1 Interface signal 1000 to 1015 1032 1100 to 1115 and 1132 Input signal The state of interface input status can be got by the value which is read from system variable System variable Input interface signal U 1000 to 1032 157 QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual eee 1004 2 UI5 1005 2 Ul6 2 UI7 1006 ue 1007 oe Uo 1009 Pu UI11 1010 212 Ul12 1011 2 U3 1012 2 2 Ult4 1013 2 uUn5 1014 1015 Variable value ss Inputsignal Connection close Connection open The read variable value 1 0 or 0 0 is regardless of unit system So the unit system should be considered All the input signals can be read once by reading the system variable 1032 15 1032 gt 1000 i 2 i 0 System variable 1000 1032 can not be employed on the left of operation command O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Output signal Interface output signal can be sent out by evaluating to the system variable 1100 1132 System variable Output interface signal Oo N gt
134. 9 99999mm Spindle function 0 9999 Tool function 0 9932 MISCA aneous M 0 99 Same as left Same as left Same as left function 0 99999 999S sequence No repetitions Specifying value Parameter value word Times D 1 9999 Same as left Same as left Note Feedrate per rev and thread leading are actually related to spindle speed F min is determined by QO gt D rme D mm N U F O Ca R S gt 3 vo the converted speed and is specified by above mentioned command Parameter of Feedrate 1 10 is the 3 bit of NC No 5 2 2 6 Program Number The CNC control can store many programs into the NC memory program numbers are added to distinguish from these programs Program number definition is shown as below Oo og ao Program number can be from 1 to 9999 4 digits Program performs with a program number till to M02 M30 or M99 end Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 1111 program 2222 program M02 or M30 indicate that the main program ends M99 indicate that subprogram ends 5555 subprogram Note 1 is replaced O when ISO code is performed Note 2 At the end of the program the blocks with optional block skip codes such as M02 M30 M99 are disabled Note 3 There is no any program number at the beginning of a program the sequence number of the program beginning is regarded as the program number but the NO replaces the program number is unallowed
135. 983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Only search the range When the program includes the sequence number to be searched operation c is executed However if the sequence number to be searched is not in the program the program number of the sequence one to be searched is selected with the program number search PROGRAM PRGRAM CHECK c Press to switch into the interface of or i Cd Input sequence number to be searched press 4 to search the sequence number Note 1 During the indexing the coordinate value and the modal data won t be changed After searching ends command MDI data if it s required Note 2 Check during searching Select the block to be skipped Alarm detection 03 04 05 10 Note 3 During the program searching only when the program with number Nxxxx the searching can be operated otherwise the alarm is issued Note 4 M98Pxxxx calling the subprogram is not executed during searching the sequence number and in Auto mode the alarm NO 060 occurs if the sequence number is searched in the subprogram called by the currently selected program Main program Subprogram 01234 05675 Nssss M9OSP5678 M99 The alarm occurs if N8888 is searched in the above example 4 4 19 Restarting a Program When the tool gets damaged or the machine restarts after stopping machining the block is restarted from the specified sequence number with the function 1 The tool gets damaged type P
136. AR C Display the corresponding interface by pressing or CII The setting is same with that of 5 12 1 and 5 12 2 gt Q O P D O O DR Q ms 5 4 4 12 4 Setting the Workpiece Coordinate Offset The coordinate offset is set when the difference exists between the workpiece coordinate system during programming and the ones commanded by G50 and set by the automatic coordinate system The offset amount is set in the offset number OO of the workpiece coordinate and the setting method is same with setting the tool position offset amount Offset amount from 0 to 0 is set in the offset number 00 251 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual XZ 0 Coordinate system during programming XZ O Coordinate system is set currently Offset the coordinate system which can be corrected tart position standard position 121 00 GEO X120 0 270 0 diameter command Expect the distance of the standard point position off the workpiece origin is X 120 0 diameter value Z 70 0 offset amount is 0 which is shown as the above figure but the actual one is X 121 0 diameter value Z 69 0 please input the workpiece coordinate offset amount X 1 0 Z 1 0 Then the expected coordinate system can be obtained gt Q O r NK O O x Q ms 5 Start position standard position 6121 00 G50 G92 X120 0 270 0 diameter command In the above
137. BSOLUTE 0 0 0FF 1 0N X MIRROR IMAGE 0 0 0FF 1 0N Z MIRROR IMAGE 0 0 0FF 1 0N LSK be EDIT 15 17 16 4 4 25 Drawing Function On LCD screen the tool path of the program during machining can be drawn so the process of actual machining can be checked Moreover the figure can be scaled up or down The following two drawing coordinate systems can be set by parameters x Z 7 0 1 X D AXIS PLAN SELECT 0 select 1 AXIS PLAN SELECT 1 select 2 AXIS PLAN SELECT 2 select 3 The dimension of the maximum drawing on LCD is as below gt Q O P iN O O D Q as 5 211 ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual On the above figure the maximum horizontal range and the vertical one are respectively 144mm and 108mm If the programmed figure range is more than the specified one the drawing scaling is applied The override range is 0 01 100 00 times usually the override is set by the following factors Drawing override the smaller value of H or V in the drawing override a Programmed path length in horizontal direction p Programmed path length in vertical direction Drawing override H Drawing override Y a 144mm specified by radius 288mm specified by diameter B 108mm specified by radius 216mm specified by diameter Note 1 Z axis is normally specified by the radius and X axis is specified the radius diameter The scaling is generally relative to
138. Ca Press 2 button tool retraction change into a new tool the offset amount is rewritten when it s required Tp b Set the machine operation panel ast as ON PROGRAM Cc Press button to display the current program t Cd Return to the start position of the program In automatic operation press t button 264 Chapter 4 Operation Ce Input P sequence number press 4 and the following figure occurs Search the block to be restarted when the same sequence number occurs for many times for example searching the sequence number in the subprogram called for many times and it s stipulated that the ahead four digits are the time which the searched sequence number occurs in the block and the last four digits are the sequence number i P 1 2 3 4 srece ill Times sequence number When the time is 1 the ahead four digits are omitted and the leading zero of the other sequence numbers can be omitted except for the specified times f After searching ends LCD screen displays the program restarting interface PROGRAM RESTART 00002 N0002 XE E EE FE F X 41 814 k kk kk kk ok O Fi 94 818 kk kk a k kk kk kk k kk kk kk D k kk kk kk ek k kk kk kk Gk 5 o kk kk 5 k LSK EDIT 13 26 pi COMND I RESTR _ he figure displays the position restarting machining ey displays the distance between the current tool position and the position of restarting machining M i
139. D OFGX X OFGZ Z OFGR Tool Shape offset axis shape axis shape nose R shape number offset offset offset amount amount amount OFT Image tool nose direction Wearing offset OFWX X OFWZ Z OFWR Tool OFT Wearing axis wearing axis wearing nose R wearing Image tool offset number offset offset compensation nose amount amount amount direction Image tool nose direction is universal for tool form and tool wearing offset Both of them are 64 Chapter 2 Programming specified As for tool nose radius compensation see Section 2 6 3 Image tool nose direction is also employed for tool nose radius compensation Tool position offset is enabled when the T code is selected and the offset number is not 0 Tool wearing offset is cancelled when T code is selected and the offset number is 0 The following offset amounts are set as Metric input From 0 to 999 999mm Inch input From 0 to 99 9999inch X axis offset amount can be specified with diameter or radius by using parameter ORG and the wearing offset can be limited a max value WOMAAX and an incremental offset input value WIMAX by parameter No 388 No 358 Note For the incremental input see Section 4 4 12 2 2 6 2 3 Offset When wearing offset is executed the programmed path is offset according to X and Z offset value and it is gained by decelerating or accelerating the offset value corresponding to T code to the end of block O gt D
140. DIOM Macro program variable can Can t write and read DI and DO write and read DI and DO gt O o Q x On U o S D r D x T When there is user macro SHIFT key invalid from keyboard program SHIFT key is valid from keyboard When user macro program When user macro program independent independent variable with no variable with no decimal point however decimal point it will be dealt as as the rule it will be dealt as the value integer with the decimal point 333 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Use emergency stop outside Output reset signal reset reset and rewinding to reset with no resetting signal output No wo tisk erst fem z ARK escrito Description Set to 1 Set to 0 Clear all execution data in Clear all execution data in groups in which storage groups for reset signal tool life expired for reset signal input input LCTM Tool life specified by time Tool life specified by times APZ Set auto coord sys of X and Z axis select valid invalid respectively No NFeD2 RScB2 Stez2 BADD NFEDS __ RSCBS STP23_ o3 NFEDa RSCB4 STP24 BAD Description settot E When input output device is used they decide whether initial and terminal pilot holes and blank spaces between programs are output or not respectively No pilot holes and blank spaces output output gt O D Q x On U o S D rr D T RSCB W
141. DLE SPEED FUNCTION S FUNCTION TOOL FUNCTION T FUNCTION MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M FUNCTION ornearre ae aoea TEE E i 141 2 0 1 Spindle SOCEO FUNCTION S FUNCTION son ANNAN 142 2S D a ec eth ec teree tera deed tie trees Tie eciea tac hetee Gatce erat saa tan nn ecisamnet EAA 142 DD o LUCA A liasaartes ess gee acca as snsuaaasneehascen A tema tae see Solace ones eaten 142 2 8 2 Constant Surface Cutting Speed CONtKOL ccccccccccscccccessccccessseceeesseeceessseeceessseeceesseeceesseeeees 142 VI Contents 28 2 Constant Surface Cuttine Ss peed esner a REN catty alate 142 ZO D2 SPINGIE Speed Ove deena a 143 2 0220 MIX SPINGle Spe CAMINO a N E E E A 143 ZO24 Rapid Traverse GOO erasrcri rii aE AE G 143 DOLT MAX QUAD C usisa a a S Res Meee 144 2 8 2 6 Relationships Between Spindle Speed and Surface Speed nnonnnossssssssooeeeeeterressssssssssssee 145 a TOOR UN OT an E EE E E E 145 2 8 4 Miscellaneous Function M FUNCTION cccccccccscccccesscccesssscsecesscesceesseecceeeeseessseeseseseeeseeaeeeees 146 Poe SIOZ M30 Endo Proa s a a a E E T E E 146 OE MOO IPOT OD aaa ETETE 146 Dee MOL SOP e leei OMA a N 146 2044 MOS Subproe ian Callesen A E E devacasaceeess 146 ZOD M99 Endof SUP Prt AIM cesa ASG 146 2 9 SUBPROGRAM sisisesataestesatsence cats cncicateosceuncdorcsecatseetesachestevatpedevasdentecataonteuacduniecasencieencdusiuenteecieencdeatscataesteee 146 291 TEXCCULOIN Ol SUPPOR A oir a EE seeds ase
142. F100 into 1mm rev G99 is mm rev Note 3 It is very different with or without decimal point Note that it is also different to the computer programming G21 Specifying mm X1 X0 0001inch Note 4 The numbers with or without decimal point can be mixed to use X1000 Z23 7 X10 Z22359 Note 5 The values following the least setting unit is specified the values less than the least setting unit is omitted When specifying X1 23456 when the metric input is regarded as X1 234 the inch input is regarded as 1 2345 There is cumulation error when the incremental command occurs There no cumulation error but has omittance error when the absolute command occurs Same digit can not over the max allowance digit X1 23456789 it overs 8 digits alarm occurs X1 2345678 it is within 8 digits the alarm will not generated but the value less than the min setting unit will be striped away Note 6 When a number with decimal point is input A minimum incremental integer is shifted by this number For example X12 34 X12340 mm input The shifted integer value should be verified with digit 2 2 5 Max Command Value The max command values for each address are shown below but these figures represent limits on the CNC side which are totally different from limits on the machine tool side For example for the CNC equipment the movement value of X axis is 100m in the occasion of metric in fact an actual stroke along the X axis
143. G00 Reference position Il When G29 is not to be followed immediately after G28 95 Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Intermediate point G42G00 8 Commands for cancelling vector temporarily When the following commands are specified in offset mode the offset vector is temporarily cancelled Then the offset mode is automatically restored In this case there is no offset cancel movement Tool nose center arrives programmed point from the top of vector of offset paths intersection point When system enters offset mode tool path center arrives directly to the top of vector of offset paths intersection point Ca Workpiece coordinate system setting G50 Tool nose center path O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 G50 block N7 G41 mode N5 G01 U3000 W7000 N6 U 3000 W 6000 N7 G50 X1000 Z2000 N8 G01 X4000 Z8000 b canned cycle G90 G92 G94 and multiple cycle G71 G76 Programmed path 96 Chapter 2 Programming G42 N5 G01 U5000 W 6000 N6 W 8000 N7 G90 U 6000 W 8000 l 3000 N8 G01 U12000 W5000 For details of too nose radius compensation in canned cycle see the following Sections G90 G94 See Section 6 2 5 2 G70 G76 See Section 6 2 5 3 Cc G32 thread cutting Tool nose center path Programmed path G42 Too nose radius compensation includes G32 block is disabled O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo
144. IN es 54 2013 OKP TUN CHOMN AC GOD a a O EAE EA tess esses cota a7 2 0 COMPENSATION FUNCTION sescissctestivsicescssectestiveccosstenctesdccsccescessateclasnccwscue a 58 ORT HOON ONS OE eses aee a secede sabi ili Pach canada atts Stlccbed eldest date caddis 58 a E AICP RCM C1 ON OPIS tet eades hordes ta aE nae Gan E nates dae ucie ae ca ten cata T 58 DOD VOOM Onset Code as a cls oeatiatereancoen dean e E toen aed 59 Ae OE e O ee E a EA 60 ZOLA TOOPOMSECINUIMDEL conin n E E A E nla euawaeatan 60 ZRT OMS Eense a a a Saat aeaceatenuanouss 60 A OEN O a a a a etd a a ed he naa 61 DOF OMS UC AMC Sl arrest is rts lence doen a a Rintn ended atlas lee sidedes A 61 DOU BOO alii Le eA a cles sess eck usd pearls ats nnd E E E ET 61 2 0 4 0 Using T COde Separately oszen yscanwie a a S 63 2 6 2 Tool Form Compensation and Tool Wearing COMPENSATION ccccccccesscccesssscesesseeceessseeeens 63 202 Code Or TOO OMS e hea A E eas 63 DOD LOLO e CIN UOC eaaa a A E E E E 64 S O a a eee TOT ORO Cut CC Ure Tene ore Ne MEET ST ten Tea Rn Men ee Tenn Tent 65 DOA OMSL N O n ca tatu ace ceniuase aan ssusedan amecace runes oes eanace r eekaeica ten acanadeenae rman eeearees 66 DI S OSEE 11012 MOE a net eRe a Te aie nnn ame rT enw monet erte me mir Ost 66 2 6 3 Tool Nose COMPENSATION G40 G42 wooeeccccccccccccscccssscesscessssescsseseesscessecessesseeceseeeseeeesesesseenss 66 Disk WAC IMAG ROO LIN OSG yas aaa ran errr eee Dane ail eee cs 67 2 6
145. In the following block the delimitation angle of intersection calculation is performed to 1 The movement value gained by using intersection point calculation is over X u A If an angle A is specified within 0 1 Alarm may be generated within 180 1 Z w A If an angle Ais specified within 90 1 Alarm may be generated within 270 1 Note 8 The angle difference between two straight lines is less than 1 the alarm occurs when intersection point calculation is performed Note 9 Chamfering or corner R is effective when the angle between two straight lines is less than 1 Note 10 A next block of that the block is only specified by the angle the seat command absolute value and angle command should be specified simultaneously For example N1 X A R As for N3 block the coordinate and angle commands are simultaneously specified N2 A N3 X Z A _ Note 11 As for the Il type of complex canned cycle G71 G72 in the direction of cutting chamfering or corner of intersection point between blocks can not be performed If G70 is used to perform the block with figure dimension input directly command No 066 alarm occurs O D Q O r 7 NO U Q Q 3 Cutting direction R alarm in this corner 2 5 5 Arc Interpolation G02 G03 Function The following command indicate the tool movement along the arc The commands are sh
146. K X y Se Im ey l a za zalez W TON Ea ie 7 J D x 3 7 k JIN s J J Tool nose SA Full tool nose A A A center path Programmed path b If G41 G42 mode is not considered the offset direction is shown below n Chapter 2 Programming 3 Compensation in G71 G72 or G73 If G71 is specified with tool nose radius compensation when machining and when tool nose O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo center is consistent with the start the actual tool compensation value is equal to tool nose radius compensation value to add fine machine surplus AAU and AU but the tool nose radius compensation value in machine is erased A U AU tool nose radius compensation value U 0 AW AW tool nose radius compensation value AW 0 See the Section 2 7 2 1 When imaginary tool nose is consistent with the start during machining or when the fine machine surplus AU and AW are equal to 0 the tool nose radius compensation value is not added to the compensation 4 When G74 G76 or G92 is specified In this case the tool nose radius compensation is not executed 5 When the corner executes The movement after compensating is as follows 79 O D Q O r 7 NO U Q Q 3 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Next block 6 When the corner arc exists Movement after compensat
147. Manual 0OAAAA M96 PX XXX Interruption signal UNIT OXXX M99 P0000 N0000 e e Setting M99 program returns to the original program by macro program interruption service program its sequence can be set with address P D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Note 1 For macro function refer to the appendix 12 for details Note 2 It is very necessary to refer to the appropriate manual issued by the machine tool builder when using this function 2 10 13 External Output Command When the standard user macro program command is entered the following macro program command can be performed This is regarded as external output command Ca BPRNT b DPRNT c POPEN d PCLOS The commands are reaching the object for variable value and words output by RS232 interface These commands are specified in terms of the following sequence 1 Open command POPEN It is very important to deal with the external I O device and the interface before inputting a series of data commands 2 Data output command BPRNT and DPRNT Data output command is required 3 Close command PCLOS This command is employed when all data output command are ended The external I O device is departed from interface 188 Chapter 2 Programming 2 10 13 1 Open Command POPEN This command should be offered when external I O device is jointed with the treated interface before entering a series of data c
148. Note 4 When neither program number nor sequence number is at the beginning of the program the program number should be specified when storing to the memory Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 5 15 Note 5 The subprogram should have program number Note 6 Program numbers 9000 9899 are employed by machine tool builder the user can not use Note 7 When selecting with mechanic the programs 9900 9999 are employed with the data of mechanic Note 8 In the end of the program if there is not M02 M30 M99 command but with ER EIA or ISO and the next block number the program end is set by No 306 bit3 NEOP O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 2 2 7 Sequence Number At the head of a block a sequence number is specified by a number 1 9999 following the address N with less than 4 digits Sequence of sequence number can be continuous or not All blocks or some blocks with necessity have sequence numbers It is suggested that the sequence number should be specified at key position For example the tool change and new tool are performed Note 1 In order to be compatible with other NC devices the sequence number NO should not be employed Note 2 0 is disabled as program number for some devices so 0 can not be used for sequence number of program number 2 2 8 Optional Block Skip When a slash followed by a number n n 1 9 is specified at the head of block and corresponding block skip BLOCK SKIP2 s
149. OGRAM Search the word to be deleted DELETE o Faia were ON Edit PROGRAM Search the word to be altered address data W i ALTER To inset a ON Edit PROGRAMI Search the word preceding the one to be inserted i PROGRAM meon word address data INSERT 359 GSK983Ta Turning Machining CNC System User Manual All prg output A prg output RS232 Program input data Offset data Offset data output input a Parameter Parameter input PROGRAM CANCEL SHIFT PROGRAM O 9 9 9 9 DATA OUTPUT PROGRAM O program number DATA OUTPUT EP Fie name gt O gt o o o o gt Edit P gt ilo l9 l9 9 DATA OUTPUT ea File name O gt program number i NPUT gt program execution Edit PARAMETER PJ Jle Letletla gt Loata Emergency PARAMETER File exported gt P 9 9 9 9 ON 360 Appendix 10 Program Lock Appendix 10 Program Lock J10 1 General Program numbers 9000 9899 can be locked by parameters In lock mode the programs No 9000 9899 cannot be displayed edited and output The function may be used to protect the special programs developed by user macro programs and to prevent them from accidental deletion J10 2 Program Number It is possible to lock the programs No 9000 No 9899 with keys Other programs cannot be locked with keys Once locked with keys all the programs of No 9000 No 9899 are
150. PLC and process programs can be transmitted by USB interface all the files transmitted are saved in folder GSK983 under the root of U disk when a file is transmitted from host unit to U disk and finding no folder GSK983 under the disk root the system will add one then save the files into it L12 2 Parameter setting of USB interface communication As PARAMETER key is pressed extended key oe above the little keypad and by U DISK ADD SET pressing it the NC host unit displays and when ladd set key is pressed the screen displays add set interface Change the communication mode to 1 USB mode press soft function key YES and setting succeed is displayed Setting communication mode is finished as follows ADD SET 90006 N0003 PAR SWITCH 11 0 OFF 1 0N MODE 1 0 C232 1 USB 2013 Y 4 Mji D 15 H 20 M 56 S REF Check 0 0 0FF 1 0N Setting succeed LSK 4 EDIT 15 21 13 LSK see eee EDIT 15 21 13 Jee e eT L12 3 Parameters transmission operations by USB interfaces F13 OGSA I WIE GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual 5 As PARAMETER key is pressed extended key Bl ea above the little keypad and by U DISK ADD SET pressing it the NC host unit displays and when U disk is pressed the screen shows the following operation options PAKAMETER USBDISK Press f or Number key to choose item Copy PLC Pars CNC UsbDisk Emergency Off Copy Screw Pars CNC U
151. Programming digital of address U W and K and tool path is shown as follow i U lt 0 W lt 0 K lt 0 Gi U gt 0 W lt 0 K lt 0 Note 1 The values of X U Z W and K are modal sate during canned cycle so if we are regardless of them the values specified before are then valid So when the Z axis displacement value is invariable the displacement command canned cycle along with X axis can be repeatedly operated See the following figure But a one shot G mode other than G04 is specified or G code of group 01 other than G90 G92 and G94 are specified and then the data is cleared mss p axis WORK 7 LAXIS The cycle in the above figure can be performed using the following programs N030 G90 U 800 W 66000 F400 N031 U 16000 N032 U 24000 N033 U 32000 121 2 Q O m D NO U co Q 3 O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 AA pak WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Note 2 The following two functions are effective by setting parameter 9 3 MOR 1 If the EOB or the block including M30 M02 is executed after the canned cycle the same cycle will be performed repeatedly 2 If M S or T function is specified during canned cycle the canned cycle and auxiliary function can be simultaneously performed and if it is improper like this the canned cycle regulate G00 or G01 can be cancelled temporarily and then perform the M S or T com
152. System User Manual Appendix 1 System Version Information Check the information of the system version Press key to enter the diagnosis interface and press softkey VERSION which is shown as the following figure ERSTON NC Version 983T V2 16 4 leVB PLC Version TaPLCV2 O1AB DISPLAY Version Versionl2 10 23 1 MT OP Version Me OPV1 0 IOU Version Me I0V2 0 IO Num 1 BIOS Version Me BIOSV6 6 gt OS Version Me SYSV6 6 3 HW Top V11 10 2 system ID x lt 7 LSK t EDIT 15 18 29 a A ef A ep lt U aa D 3 A s 2 O I O s 3 V O 286 Appendix 1 System Version Information xipueddy o lt U r D 3 lt D 2 O O z 3 O 287 gt O O D 5 x N m O r O F G QO O Q D N AA pak E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Appendix 2 List of G codes The following G codes can be used and the special G codes can also be used by setting the parameters Standard Special Special Group Function Ba eiiesiees G code G code B G code C NO Position rapi B p4 Linear interpolation cutting feed B Arc interpolation CW circle B Arc interpolation CCW circle _ B G04 G04 G04 Dwell 00 a a Setting the offset value O SE Input in metric system _Inputin metric system O memory type memory type _ Reference position return check__ O
153. THDFL PEM107 confirm after parameter setting After the parameter set in cutting thread operation G92 mode dry run at max feedrate in thread cutting and confirm the following items in thread chamfering non chamfering situations respectively 1 Detect the wave of X axis TSA in thread chamfering and make sure that overshooting is in 5 2 Ensure that the shock to machine is not huge Parameter No 0114 ZRNFL Description gt O D Q x oO U o S D aa D a a ZRNFL Low federate in reference point return FL all axes share setting range 6 15000 unit mm min metric output 6 6000 unit 0 1inch min inch output 327 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Parameter No Description BKLX Backlash of X and Z axis respectively when it is diameter specifying X axis is BKLZ set by diameter setting range O 225 unit 0 001mm metric output O 225 unit 0 0001 inch inch output Note when ACMR 1 any instruction detection override in PRM316 backlash unit is detection unit Parameter No 0119 SPDLC Description SPDLC Spindle speed deviation compensation that is set the compensation of speed instruction voltage zero offset used in constant control B setting range 0O 8191 unit VELO Parameter 0125 DRFTZ 0124 DRFTX Description DRFTX Drift compensation in servo loop of X and Z axis respectively DRFTZ setting range O 500 unit VELO This value will auto c
154. This vector is changed along with tool movement it is very important to understand the vector for programming Read and distinguish the following items and to understand how the vector generates 2 6 4 2 G40 G41 G42 G40 G41 or G42 is used for cancelling or generating the vector these codes are employed together with GOO G01 G02 G03 or G32 to specify the tool movement mode G40 Tool nose radius Both of the following compensation cancel are not existential Left offset applies along tool path Right G42 Right offset applies along tool path A kind of offset mode is specified with G41 and G42 the offset is erased when G40 is specified 1 Cancel mode After power on if the RESET key is pressed on MDI LCD display panel or the block executes M02 or M30 and end The system also may not enter the cancel mode for different machine tool builders The system enters cancel mode immediately In the mode of cancel the vector is set to 0 and tool nose center path is consistent with programmed path It must be ended with cancel mode at the end of program If the ending is applied in offset mode the tool can not be positioned to the end point but for a position which a vector length of an end point 2 Starting A block which satisfies the following conditions is executed in cancel mode the system enters offset mode and the control in this operation is called starting 1 G41 or G42 is included in block or it enters G41 G42 mode pr
155. User Manual e fe ima a positive C C negative e aa negative C M04 is positive _ In the constant speed control mode the In the constant speed control mode the circular speed in the rapid block is circular speed of the rapid block is calculated calculated with the end position of the with the current value in X axis which is coordinate value in X axis same as the cutting feed In the single canned cycle mode the In the single canned cycle mode the single canned cycle is not executed even the canned cycle is not executed in the block block without the movement command is without the movement command specified Even in the thread cutting the spindle the spindle override is clamped in 100 override is not clamped in 100 stored into the memory with the cycle start button ISOT With the stroke limit selection in the With the stroke limit selection in the memory memory type the manual rapid feeding is type the manual rapid feeding can be valid also valid even the reference position return only after the reference position return is is not executed executed 0010 DGNE SETE DECI SSPB NPRD PROD CTHD S Detailed introduction Setas Cd Sets ee Te invalid a closed During the reference position return it During the reference position return it decelerates when the deceleration signal decelerates when the deceleration signal DECX or DECZ is 1 DECX or DECZ is 0 SSPB The spindle sto
156. V2 and V7 Interference V gt and V7 are ignored Interference check between V and Vs Interference V and Vg should not be ignored A vector without interference is checked when the check executes the following vector will not be checked If block B is arc movement this vector is interference vector will generate a linear movement Example 1 Tool linear movement from V and Vg 102 Chapter 2 Programming ee Se ns aie oe _ wW wean a Weed in Tool nose vee i Ni l center path L oe o e Programmed path a V4 V5 Interference i V3 V6 Interference V2 V7 Interference V1 V8No interference 0 0 O gt D r D N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Note When block A is executed in Single block mode and the tool stops the tool center moves to V3 Example 2 Tool linear movement is as follows V2 S Ep J l we V f N S Tool nose _ LF ee Programmed path l j i V4 V5 Interference V3 VOdnterference V2 V No interference 0 0 2 If interference is generated after dealing with tool stops with an alarm If an interference is generated after dealing or there is only one pair vectors from the beginning of check and this pair vectors are interfered An alarm N041 displays and tool 103 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual immediately stops after the previous block is performed If single block operation performs the tool the
157. WHILE 120 LE 10 DO 1 169 QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo O D Q O r 7 NO U Q Q 3 AA pak E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Repeat for 10 times N2 WHILE 30 EQ 1 DO2 N3 END2 Repeat during variable 30 1 120 120 1 N4END1 Notice The following precautions should be noticed when programming repeatedly 170 1 DOm should be specified firstly the ENDm is then specified END1 Cannot DO 1 2 DOm and ENDm should correspond one by one in a same program DO1 Cannot DO1 END1 DO1 END1 Cannot END1 3 Same identification number can be used for many times DO 1 END1 Can Chapter 2 Programming DO 1 END1 4 There are 3 layers for DO DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 Can END3 END2 END1 5 The range of DO can not be crossed DO 1 DO 2 Can END1 END2 6 The difference can be applied from the range of DO to the external DO1 i Can GOTO 90000 END1 N9000 7 The difference cannot be applied from the range of DO to the external GOTO 9000 171 O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual DO 1 Cannot N9000 END1 DO1 N9000 Cannot 9 END1 Q jel D i3 GOTO 9000 L 8 User macro program body and subprogram can be called in the bo
158. X50 0 Z100 0 F500 N30 X100 N40 Z50 ee e 41 814 X KE KEK BKK EDIT 15 09 56 wee eee eee EDIT 15 09 56 Gee e oT S T The meaning of the cursor during automatic running Ca Ifthe block is twinkling it is going to be executed b If the block is not twinkling it is being executed or it has already completed Note 1 Strictly speaking when the buffer register is empty if the cursor is twinkling if it is neither in Auto mode nor the feed hold it means the next program to be executed will be read into the buffer register Note 2 In Edit mode press dor d button to move the cursor in Auto mode the next block to be read into the buffer is the one on which the cursor is in Edit mode gt Q O P iN O x Q as 5 4 4 14 Searching the Program Number When there are many programs in the memory each program can be searched e on orz gt Search the program number 1 Method 1 a i 2 a Select or 9 mode PRGRAM CHECK or interface Cc Input O program number to be searched and press after the searching ends the interface with the head of the program is displayed PROGRAM b Press key to switch into 2 Method 2 259 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual a Select mode PRGRAM CHECK or interface CANCEL 4 c Press O ___ in order the stored next program is displa
159. Z axis without the reference position return return function function WIF siajawelied G xipueddy 308 Appendix 5 Parameters fe cr ter oe re Description pf Setton Settot to 1 Set to 0 PML2 Pitch error compensation override the setting offset multiplied by this PML override is output SCHLSES DLME When one program is to be When one program is to be saved into saved into memory all the memory all the other programs saved in which other programs saved in before do not to be cleared auto which before should be cleared auto RDAL Press O 9 9 9 READ the program is being storied When storing a program When storing a program whether the memory the memory saves them saves just one or all of them is decided by MDI operation 0025 M USR Description pf Settod to 1 SettoO to 0 MUSR User macro interruption function No user macro interruption function used inl F anina anaa MSUB Subprogram type of user macro Macro program type of user macro Note For subprogram type of user macro interruption the local variable value is not changed before and after the interruption while for macro program type of user macro interruption the local variable is different after interruption gt O o Q x On U A S D r D T M code controlling user macro User macro program interruption is program interruption is set by controlled by M96 and M97 param
160. Zansisbad foo 600 Data transfer of the connection unisiswrong f 603 The communication between NC and PC is improper or disconnected 604 The CPU of PMC II cannotbe efecivelyneldon 605 System alarms given in the CPU of PMC II montoran 606 RAMIROM parity error occurs inthe CPU PMG System error monitoring timer alarm NC alarm CPU error 0 3 and 4 type interruption occurring Offset memory alarm excessive offset is set Set correct offset in a 940 a NC alarm specified offset number The temporary storage area for system control commands becomes NC alarm inadequate 350 Appendix 7 State List of Power On Reset amp Clearing Appendix 7 State List of Power On Reset amp Clearing o A state remains unchanged or action is kept on x A state is cancelled or an action is interrupted ltem At power on Clearing state Reset state a ee eee ee eee ee SI a e a e a a E a ee ee ee dL E a E E E a Displ f numbers Non modal G codes Initial Initial values e Other data odaia codes G20 G21 remains G20 G21 and All remain constant as before G22 G23 remain unchanged power off unchanged Coordinate Workpiece coordinates Zero O O MDI mode o Other modes set by the 3rd bit RS43 of parameter Executing No 22 motions Set by the 3 bit Tool length compensation RS43 of parameter No 22 Tool radius compensation gt O o 5 Q x N O mpe A rm D E
161. a A l ad X PE AETA Z REN GAD Jeer Poniran G42 mode x ETA Z RE ETEA CAO Necran AS 4 S Tiere l G40 mode 3 G41 is not specified in G41 mode if done the compensation is incorrect Similarly G42 is not specified in G42 mode 1 When workpiece position does not change Tool nose keeps touch with workpiece when the tool is moving ee Ten so ize S N Vai a G42 QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo 2 When workpiece position changes The workpiece position changes relative to the tool position at the corner of programmed path which is shown below Workpiece position an i Workpiece position Programmed path from A to B G41 Programmed path from B to C G42 In the above mentioned case though the workpiece is not at the right of programmed path it is supposed that the workpiece should exist in the movement from A to B Because the workpice cannot change at the tool nose compensation starting at the next block when the movement block specified from A to B is the block to start the tool nose compensation the tool path is not same as that of the 73 O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual figure 3 Start up tool A block is changed from G40 to G41 or G42 is called start up block G40 _ G41 Start up block The transition movement offset is pe
162. ad level and the thread value in position 1 and 61 is obtained when V 100mm sec based on the acceleration and deceleration time constant during the mechanical cutting then 61 of the other speed can be obtained based on the thread cutting speed in position 3 D4 2 Simple Calculation Method of the Incorrect Thread Length 1 62 mm 1800 L thread lead mm R number of the spindle revolutions rpm 2 1 L R 1800 02 1 Lna When the servo time constant T 0 033 1 Lna gt O O 5 x lt K 5 v O Q r 4 Q 5 Q Q 2 Q 3 294 Appendix 4 The Calculated Diagram Vo Speed during cutting thread V 40mmfsec V 50meq sec Alm sec VW lim sec 41 57 in sec 1 linl sec 40 T9infsec 40 59 inse w Ommsech Sera time constant SOmsec ISMSec a mm 6 d 2 o 00T 0 010 0 015 0 020 0 025 Metric thread L JIS level 3233025201512510 09 0750 6 od D Simmi peal _____ a level 7 0 Slin 0 2 oa P lead Uniform standard thread 5 0 4 0 85 3 02 5202 75 1 5 1 25 1 0 0 9 0 8 0 Tsim JIS 2A 45678900 121814 BED P lead MIS 34A Thread tooth numberfinch theoretical precision 5354 wie yega Thread tooth numberninch Calculation diagram for obtaining the closest distance 61 As follows a is the thread allowance error and 1 Lna is calculated Example R 350rpm L 1mm when a 0 01 pee 0 194mm gt O O 5 Q
163. ae This user manual describes all proceedings concerning the operations of this CNC system in detail as much as possible However it is impractical to give particular descriptions for all unnecessary or unallowable system operations due to the manual text limit product specific applications and other causes Therefore the proceedings not indicated herein should be considered impractical or unallowable ae This user manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd All rights are reserved It is against the law for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual without the express written permission of GSK and the latter reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability CESK CNC GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual PREFACE Your Excellency It s our pleasure for your patronage and purchase of this GSK983Ta CNC system made by GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd This book is divided into Text and Appendix The text contents include the specification and programming and operation of the system and the appendix contains G codes parameters alarm messages and so on safety Warning A Accident may occur by improper connection and operation This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel Please carefully read this manual before usage Special caution The power supply fixed on in the cabinet is exclusively used for the CNC system made by GSK It can t be applied to other purposes
164. al adjustment inductosyn PCFBK Do servo feedback detection No servo feedback detection see to cen eee ganas 8908569 ACMR Set special CMR is permitted not Not allowed to set special CMR eres Description Can t edit programs prg Can edit programs prg no 9000 9899 no 9000 9899 any prg no 9000 9899 When any prg no 9000 9899 program program is being executed and in is being executed even in single block single block mode user macro mode user macro program statement program statement executing stops executing does not stop in single program block too Do not show the contents when a Show the contents when a prg prg no 9000 9899 program is being no 9000 9899 program is being executed executed NSHR Don t output OP signal in sequence Output OP signal in sequence no IS poten ete RSTL Don t output STL signal when a Output STL signal when a program is a program is saved in the memory by saved in the memory by cycle start cycle start button in edit mode button in edit mode No osre PRGB msce me ere MCS7_ Oooo o o siajawelied G xipueddy Description ee Set to 1 Set to 0 PRG8 amp Cant edit prg no 8000 8999 Can edit prg no 8000 8999 program program MSC8 When any prg no 8000 8999 When any prg no 8000 8999 program program is being executed and in is being executed even in single block single block mode user macro mode user macro program statement program statement executing
165. al is input II Pitch error compensation is active after power off and restart and at the end of reference point return Compensation is not made even though parameter setting if reference point return is not performed Furthermore parameter setting should be made before reference point return after power on If pitch error compensation parameter is to be changed after reference point return the reference point should be returned again and power off and restart III Pitch error compensation value parameters No 1000 2127 The following restrictions are made for pitch error compensation The value of compensation value of pitch error x pitch error compensation override xCMR must fall within 127 If the setting of the value exceeds 127 compensation cannot be correctly made If it is necessary to set a value beyond 127 divide the compensation and then make compensation at adjacent compensation points Note CMR Command override multiplier refer to parameters No 27 28 357 gt z8 po D 2 x lt 0 Op r e om Q OQ D a e eD z p 9 2D m e i O ge eD mD d9 aD a e gt Cc zD 9 er GSK983Ta Turning Machining CNC System User Manual Appendix 9 Operation List Parameter write switch Program Classification protection switch Operating procedures To clear memory Concurrently press the O land DELETE keys to switc
166. alid msg area Error happens in TV check set the TV CHECK to 0 to avoid system TV check The data input exceeds the bits allowable when it is the program name an 003 ee NO exceeds then move the cursor and press EOB to delete Digits character or decimal point were input when the beginning of the 004 block is without address For user macro program see the P S alarm explanation in Chapter 3 Section 10 11 There s no data after address but another address or EOB code is input next 005 sign is illegal is input after the address with unallowable or 2 or 006 more are input a Illegal decimal point is input after the address with unallowable or 2 or aa more are input 009 Illegal code is entered in the active information area B C Y V J R a Illegal G code is commanded also for the entered G code with no function ee No feedrate or improper feedrate is commanded ee 012 E code commanded with no E6 bits selection Lead increase decrease by address K is over the max Value or negative in variable lead threading Kap parameter No 0 is changed to 1 023 Radius R is 0 or negative in arc compensation commandedbyR 02 Ofset value has exceeded 6s Reset lt J 030 Toolposition offsetistoolage OOOO S 051 anet input oy G10 arisermacoipikcomand o r offset input by G10 or user macro input command The offset is too large
167. alues can also be changed from MDI key board 4 Feedrate and alarm 111 O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Fr Le Fp U VY XorZ cy D S XS or ZS I s Start position Xa or Za Xa Xs or Za Zs Fr Rapid feedrate Fp Measure feedrate When the start position moves to G36 or G37 which the measure position is specified by Xa or Za in advance tool overruns the area and feed at the rapid traverse And then the tool stops at point Xa vx or Za vz and over the B C and D area and move at feederate set by parameter in measure If the arrival end signal is switched on when crossing area B the No 080 alarm occurs If the arrival end signal is not switched on before point V tool stops at point V and the No 080 alarm also stops Program example O a Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 pen a Z axis measure position 100 X axis measure position Programmed zero la 200 200 7 100 I a 200 Offset amount Offset amount Before measuring After measuring X 100000 58000 LE 1 4000 G50X960000Z110000 Absolute zero program Coordinate system setting S01 M03 170101 Specifying tool No 1 offset No 1 and spindle revolution Z850000 Move to measure position If tool arrives to the check position in X19800 because the 200mm is correct measure position so the offset value sho
168. am to M02 or M03 NC is in the resetting state at this period the tool group counter for one machining program should be added up 1 No matter how many times the same group number is specified in one machining program the counter is only added up 1 the maximum lifetime is 9999 times 2 The lifetime is specified by time minute In this case the machining process is executed from the specified TAA 99 to the other tools specified by T code In the cutting mode the tool actual used time is counted once in 4 seconds except for the time of single block stop feed hold rapid feed and dwell The maximum time can be set for 4300 minutes No matter in whatever situation the tool lifetime counter of each group is counting The content of the calculator won t be cleared at power off Note When the lifetime is specified with the frequency M02 or M30 is executed the external resetting signal is input or resetting is performed and the rewind REW signal is sent to NC 2 11 4 2 The Tool Change Signal and the Tool Change Resetting Signal After one tool lifetime ends the other tool is selected based on the specified sequence When the last tool lifetime of one group is also used up the tool change signal is output After changing the tools of the group it is displayed on LCD screen The corresponding group number is specified and 194 Chapter 2 Programming the tool change resetting signal is input or MDI LCD panel is operated refer to 2 11 5
169. and unit the max shift error is half of the min command increment the error is not accumulated Note 5 The metric inch input can be switched by the setting value on page 2 5 12 Feedrate Command Shift G98 G99 Feed min or feed rev is specified by the following G codes For the details see Section 2 4 2 53 QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 2 5 13 Constant Surface Speed Control G96 G97 The following G codes specify whether the constant linear speed control is effective Constant linear velocity control The constant linear velocity is always performed before G97 is specified G97 OFF The constant linear velocity control is disabled before the G96 is specified For details see Section 2 8 2 Note G97 constant linear speed control off is set when the power is turned on 2 5 14 Stored Stroke Limit G22 G23 Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with the following modes tools cannot enter the shadow area yy The 3rd limit The 1 limit O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 The 2 limit Up The 1 limit Parameters set the boundary outside area of the set limit is set to be a forbidden area It is set by machine tool builder once set generally never change Usually this area is set with max stroke it is called stored stroke limit it is also ca
170. aning 2 8 4 1 M02 M30 End of program 1 It is indicates that the main program is end 2 The cycle operation stops and NC system resets refer to the manual issued by machine tool builder 3 When M30 is operated in Auto mode it makes the program stop and the cursor return to the beginning of program 2 8 4 2 M00 Program Stops The cycle operation stops after MOO executes When program stops all the modal information and single program operation are invariable They are started by a specified NC the cycle operation O D Q O r D N U Q is then restarted It depends on the machine builder 2 8 4 3 M01 Stop Selection Like MOO when the key on machine operator panel is pressed the cycle operation stops after the block included M01 is performed And when is pressed once again the cycle operation will be executed continually 2 8 4 4 M98 Subprogram Call This code is used for calling subprogram see the section 2 9 2 8 4 5 M99 End of Subprogram Subprogram end can be indicated with M99 Performing M99 and turn to the main program See the section 2 9 Note 1 The block followed M00 M01 M02 or M30 can not be read into the buffer Note 2 When M98 or M99 is performed the code signal and selection signal are not propagated Note 3 The other M codes are treated with machine tool other than M99 and M98 codes Because different machine tool builder has different configuratio
171. arameter Detailed introduction Setasi CC Stas PSG2 The gear ratio between the spindle and the position encoder PSG1 Overrides Te number of the spindle revolution pPsG2 o jo ji pi The number of the position encoder revolution Ee ae ee RVZRN When the reference position is The reference position return is valid in the returned in JOG mode the direction opposite with the return one reference position return cant be executed in the direction opposite with the return one Detailed introduction po Setast Stas The detection override ratio is used by X and Z axes in sequence Set code Eine eee e e li S n Eee ee ee Rte E Sie e x J Rt eee 305 sigjaweled G xipueddy Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual The capacity of the reference counter of X and Z axes in sequence Reference counter capacity detection override the pulse number of one revolution of the motor detector Set code Capacity of one cycle pope fe ft X 3000 Note If the value not listed in the above table is set the capacity is set as 8000 Note DMR and GRD are set in binary system Method of calculating CMR and DMR Step one Set the feedback pulse number of CMR and DMR Min movement unit mnvinch _ otact _ Ltmminch Formula 1 Relation between CMR and DMR Pulse command Minimum movement unit 0 001mm metric unit 0 0001inch inch unit CMR Commanded override ratio the parameter is 27 28
172. arameter 2 The stored stroke limit 3 The area inside or outside is the forbidden one which is set by the parameter or the program Whether the stored stroke limits 2 3 are valid or invalid is set by G codes G22 valid G23 invalid Automatic coordinate The workpiece coordinate system is set when the reference position return in system setting Jog mode Workpiece coordinate The coordinate system movement is executed when the coordinate system system movement doesn t comply with the actual one during programming The cutting feedrate is classified into the feeding per revolution and feeding per Cutting feedrate minute which is set by G codes G98 G99 G98 Range of feeding per minute mm min inch min 1 m min 30 000m min 0 01 inch min 12000 00 inch min G99 Range of feeding per revolution mm r inch r 0 01 mm r 500 00mm r 0 0001 inch r 50 0000inch r The speed can be selected from 0 to 200 and 10 be one level system S G50 coordinate value can be taken as the coordinate system of the commanded value About the details refer to 2 5 10 Positioning G00 Each axis can feed independently through commanding G00 The axis decelerates and stops at the end position whether the in position check whether the machine reaches the commanded position is executed is set by the parameters About the details refer to 2 5 1 Linear interpolation The linear interpolation can be commanded by G01 on the feedrate specified uolou
173. arameter setting X Z O W I K R and D millimeter can be used with 10 multiple units RD052 aL 052 BL 052 CInput in Millimeter ID052 KD052 Refer to Section 2 3 2 3 10 multiple of input unit Note 8 The standard configuration function is S4 bit numeric analog spindle function 2 2 4 Decimal Point Programming Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point in this device A decimal point can be used when entering a distance time or speed But all addresses have limitation the position of decimal point is indicated as the positions of mm inch deg and s second Z15 0 Z15mm or Z15inch F10 0 10mm r 10mm min or 10inch min 10inch r O 2 Q O r D s N U Q 3 mD Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual G04 X1 Dwell 1 second Decimal points can be specified with the following addresses X Z U W K R E and F Note 1 X and U can be input by decimal point but P cannot because the P can be employed for sequence number when commands dwells Note 2 The corresponding G code should be commanded prior to the number within one block 1 G20 Inch specifying X1 0 G04 X1 0 G04 is equivalent to is not represented to t X10000 G04 when instruct in inch the result dwell time is 10s G04 X1 0 It is regarded as G04X1000 dwell time is 1s 2 G98 mm min specifying F1 G99 Specifying F1 G99 into 0 01mm rev G99 is mm rev G98 mm min specifying G99 F1 Specifying G99
174. at P ft td are set 301 gt O D Q x On U A S D r D T Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual by the binary system 1 or 0 The contents of the parameter number with the format system are set by the decimal cod 4 Don t set the sign of because it doesn t exist in the parameters 5 The forbidden parameters must be set as 0 6 The range is set while the parameters are not used they can be set as 0 EDD Detailed Introduction of Each Parameter 0005 ORWD Detailed introduction po Setast Seta o O SCD Even S4 bit analog output or S4 bit 12 If S bit analog output or S4 bit 12 bits bits output in binary system any function is selected S4 bit analog or S4 bit 12 bits output in binary system any function is selected the corresponding S4 bit 12 bits in binary system command isn t sent while output in binary system any function is S code BCD is output selected and the corresponding S4 bit code is output otherwise S code BCD is output FMIC In the metric input the unit of the feedrate is Not 1 10 1 10 On the position displayer in the metric On the position displayer in the metric input input the displayed minimum unit is the displayed minimum unit is 0 01mm in the 0 01mm in the inch input it is O 0001inch inch input it is 0 0001inch and remains and remains unchanged unchanged MIC In the metric input
175. ation Function When the tool employed is different from the image tool used in programming or when the tool nose compensation is performed by NC this compensation function is employed And the function includes tool offset and tool nose compensation 2 6 1 Tool Offset Tool offset is not specified by using G code but T code 2 6 1 1 Reference Tool Offset When the actual tool is different with the imaginative tool in programming normally it is standard tool tool offset compensation is employed 58 Chapter 2 Programming Standard tool Actual tool I I I I I I l l Ee _ Z axis offset The standard tool nose moves along the expectant path by generally programming In this case tool nose is consistent with programmed starting point However the actual tool is hard to match the tool exactly To compare the tool nose position setting it is very convenient to measure the distance between standard tool and actual tool nose position This distance is used for offset value reference position this point can be adjusted to start QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo X axis offset Z axis offset There two modes can determine the reference position the point which is at the head of position after the reference point return is completed is the reference point or some reference position is regarded as the starting point of program after reference positio
176. ation and Tool Wearing Compensation Tool position offset can be divided into two forms the tool form compensation for tool form or tool install position and the tool wearing compensation for tool nose wearing X form compensation Actual tool Z axis wearing compensation Z axis form compensation 2 6 2 1 T Code of Tool Offset The following T codes are available 63 Graz GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual TOO o T eine compensation number or wear compensation number Tool selection Note 1 Tool shape compensation number and tool selection can be employed by setting the parameter Note 2 The tool offset is 32 pairs 2 6 2 2 Tool Offset Number Specifying tool offset number means that the corresponding offset amount and offset start are selected The wearing offset amount is O when tool offset number is 0 the wearing offset is erased Normally when the next tool is selected the shape offset is not erased and the D value of coordinate is moved only The offset amount corresponding offset number is set beforehand in offset memory by using MDI unit or G10 command The compensation amount should be corresponded with the specified offset number it includes X and Z values and tool nose values The offset with X and Z axes compensations are called tool position offset The compensation of tool nose is called tool nose compensation Shape offset O 2 Q O r D N U Q 3 m
177. axis is specified by diameter setting range 0 99999999 unit 0 001mm metric output 0 99999999 unit 0 0001inch inch output Parameter Description GANMAX r values of X and Z axes with auto tool offset function 331 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual GANMAZ_ setting range 1 99999999 unit 0 001mm metric output 1 99999999 unit 0 0001inch inch output Note1 X axis is specified by radius Note2 set data should larger than no 165 166 parameter values Cc 0165 EPCX 0166 EPCZ Description values of X and Z axes with auto tool offset function X axis is specified by radius setting range 1 99999999 unit 0 001mm 1 99999999 unit 0 0001inch Note X axis is specified by radius FR Start point A Xa or Za FR rapid feedrate FP measuring feedrate see to Parameter No 133 In G36 or G37 according to move command Xa or Za machine tool moves at rapid federate in the area A from starting point to the preset measuring point After it stops at T point it will move at the measuring feedrate as No 133 parameter to area B C D during when if it issues measuring point arrival signal it will stop at once If measuring point arrival signal is issued beyond area C and D or still not issued when machine tool arrives V point no 80 alarm occurs Parameter Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit O No SKPF slajawelied G xipueddy l e mo Description a Set to 1 Set to 0
178. ays 0 Example 10 3 2 30 2005 X axis tool wearing offset value with the offset number 5 is evaluated to the variable 30 When the offset value is 1 500mm 30 1 5 when the offset value is 0 1500inch 30 0 15 2210 8 Cutter compensation R with offset number 10 is modified into the same value with variable 8 3 Alarm 3000 When an error in macro program is checked the device enters alarm status Substituting an alarm number into the system variable 3000 the alarm LED displays after the previous block is processed the device is then on the status of alarm 3000 n Alarm information The alarm number which is never used before is regarded as the alarm number setting in the user macro program n lt 200 159 Buiwweibold zZz saideuy Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual The alarm information with 26 letters at maximum can be set between the dwelling control and recovery control 4 CLK 3001 3002 The values of system parameter 3001 and 3002 are read out the CLK the time displays therefore Substituting the value into the system variable value to preset the time Always CLK 1 3001 1 ms Resetting to 0 l effective When STL CLK 2 3002 1h Similar to the power off l signal opens S The accuracy of CLK is 16ms An overflow returns to 0 when the CLK 1 is 65536ms The CLK 2 is consecutively added to the preset The CLK cannot be executed corrected when the max time No exceeds 9544 h
179. but it is effective if it is specified in G71 block or before G71 block Note that the following four kinds of cutting mode All of these cutting cycles are performed to parallel to the Z axis the signs of Au and Aw are as follows B gt C is the finishing path B gt C is the roughing contour and A is the start tool point Au 0 Aw 0 Au 0 Aw lt 0 AUO Awd Auw Aw lt d O 3 Q O r D s N U Q 3 Tool path from A B is specified in the sequence number ns in a block the movement command along Z axis can not specified in this program The tool path from B C must be up or down monotonously When GO00 G01 is applied in the tool path program A A the cutting or positioning should be separately finished in G00 G01 mode If the tool nose center is regarded as machining start which it is completed the machining with the command of cutter compensation G71 The tool radius offset value is added to the Au and Aw as for the roughing the tool nose radius is O Au Au tool nose radius offset value Aw Aw tool nose radius offset value Note 1 The block between the sequence number ns and nf can not call the subprogram Note 2 The rest of finishing allowance of the workpiece figure cutting is performed at the last of canned cycle but parameter 307 7 can be set for cancelling this step Note 3 In the case of note 2 due to a surface finishing program is stopped from ns to nf and a lin
180. c edasataaudianieereasayrenteapteoddceetandianys 147 29 2 PEFOIMANCE OF SUDDIOOIAIN nesese enner EEEE EEE E 147 2 9 3 Control Method of Subprogram cccccccccccccsscceesscccssseecseseeceessecesseeceessecesseeceseeceeseeceeseeeeaeeess 148 2 10 USER CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAM sisisassiisscesalssccasceasabesssssnvasevacsussacsncepassscvasbevasesastsncsstbanssussscosnaeesseve 151 2101 SEIICT sites tn ia E REENE NE OIE EN EN NRN I E N O A 151 2 10 2 VAIO ssns a a a igtedereaienesttateaess 154 ZAG ZA Representaiomot Variable sienn E A 154 DAD Rere eVa lE N A 154 21023 Unden d Vinabl enaena NNN 155 2 10 2 4 Display and Setting for Variable Value c ccc eeecsssssssssssececcceeeeeeeeaaeaeeenseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaqeaags 156 210 3 Knas OF VAQMADIC niesi a a a a a 157 ZO SA TOCA Nara les A Le ae a a an des a aa oies 157 2 10 3 2 Common Variable 100 149 500 509 oo cccccccccccccceeaseetsssssseeeeeceeeeeees 157 ZAOB 3 System Vandahlen e E E N E E E E 157 2104 OQp ralonr Conan ersen n OO EEO OO 164 2 10 4 1 Variable Definition and Replacement c sracteaceaeautiwacincauicaciniaciwaGiaiamnes 165 ZNO AD AC AO E iaaaadeaeasenamencepeamaeansecine ames 165 ZAQAD M l picadom al iao irse sia ateetienetenadtseuwtia etenciba duals neiiea dea taw stone oes 165 WOA TPUNCION si vssssiceneccscs E ete tana AE A a ateeee 165 ZAO A COMPOSI SOF CalCULAL omano tiedeitsesciisaliurebloaradedaiNada en tiesrdedraaildludaao allies Acdrnslt OadeuesliesuaehTeu
181. cancel G68 G68 G68 re Double tool post image ON G69 G69 G69 Double tool post image OFF G70 G70 G70 Finishing cycle 00 G71 G71 G71 Outer diameter roughing cycle 26 Chapter 2 Programming G73 G73 G75 Closed loop cutting cycle Constant surface speed control cancel Feed min Feed rev Absolute value command Incremental value command Note 1 A G codes with the sign of yx is the start G code of each group Namely A G code can be established after the resetting key is controlled when the power is turned on or the parameter for described start G code is enabled As for G22 and G23 G22 is selected when the power is turned on G22 or G23 is a mode before resetting one of them is effective before resetting As for the G00 and G01 G98 and G99 or G90 and G91 the G code in the initial state can be QO gt D r D s N U FR O ta i S 3 3 vo selected by setting parameter 7 G20 or G21 is the state of before the power is turned off or the resetting key is controlled Note 2 G code in 00 groups is not modal They are effective only in the programmed block Note 3 When a code does not display in the above table in block or a G code without a definition and a selection is specified the alarm No 010 occurs But G60 and G61 may not alarm Note 4 Provide that some G codes are not share the same group they can be described in a same block When some G codes in the same group are described the last one is
182. code B Use the standard G codes SCTO From S command and from the rapid The speed arrival signal is not detected change into the cutting feed the speed arrival signal is detected come power on and in the clear state the initial ecu ee is G90 one the special G code state is G91 one At power on and in the clear state At power on and in the clear state becomes G98 state the special G a is becomes G99 state the special G code is G94 in B C G95 in B C At power on and in the clear state it At power on and in the clear state it becomes G0O state becomes G01 state Detailed introduction CT Setast Seta Command the offset value with the radius Command the offset value with the diameter taken as the forbidden one taken as the forbidden one one becomes valid from the next block one becomes valid from the next T code offset amount offset amount State state When STLK signal is connected the When STLK signal is connected the traverse traverse command is not executed while command and M S and T commands are M S and T commands are executed executed STLK interlock signal STLK interlock signal For the thread cutting the dry run is also For the thread cutting the dry run is not valid valid Detailed introduction pd Setast id Stas Symbols when 4 bit digit analog is output 303 gt O o Q x On U A S D r D T Sr WEE erma GSKO83Ta Turning CNC System
183. command segments in machining The modal information mechanical position etc in case of interruption in an interruption program are restored during the return to the original program so that the original program can be executed If the interruption program is fixed command M96 Pxxxx may be directly used The interruption program is called by M98 P 100 if it is not fixed K11 7 3 Reading machining information in fixed intervals lt Specifications gt To manage machining status machining information is sent out on a regular basis This exerts no impact on machining sequence lt Parameter setting gt TSE 0 Edge triggering mode MUSR 1 Enable user macro program interruption function MSUB 0 Macro program type user macro program interruption MPRM Setting of the M codes for the control of user macro program interruption MINT 0 Interruption program is executed before the end of block lt Explanations gt 372 Appendix 11 Interruption Function of User Macro Program Assuming that an interruption program does not include any NC statement the user macro program interruption is repeated when the interruption signal is ON in state triggering mode while the interruption program is started only once in edge triggering mode on a regular basis depending on the ON OFF of interruption signal Since block may interrupt in the midway corresponding to the interruption signal rise it immediately interrupts The external output of machinin
184. ctor moves to another with linear If almost these vectors are consistent and the chamfering is then not operated and the following vector will be ignored If AVxsAV limit If AVZSAV limit This vector is ignored If AVxsAV is limit AVZSAV is limit the following vector is ignored AV limit is preset in the NC unit The AV limit value is specified with the parameter CRCDL No 69 When these vector do not coincide a movement around corner occurs which movement 100 Chapter 2 Programming belongs to the following block N7 moves along the block thus the feedrate is equal to the command speed in N7 If block N7 is GOO mode the tool moves at rapid traverse rate when in the state of G01 G02 G03 or GA32 and tool moves at the feedrate 12 Interference check Tool overcutting is called as Interference Interference check function checks tool overcuitting in advance However not all the interferences can be checked by this function Interference check should be performed even if the overcutting never occurs Ca Reference condition of interference The direction of tool nose center path is different from programmed path in too nose radius compensation The path between 90 and 270 O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo 2 Except above conditions in arc machining the angle of start and end points of tool nose center is entirely different from that of start and e
185. curs 2 10 9 Especial Codes and Words in Macro Program The following codes are applied other than the codes are applied in usual macro program 1 ISO O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual O it is used a same code with program number O of EIA code must be set with parameter But it can not be employed without holes the Latin alphabet can be employed if the is also used Note that its original meaning has not to be applied D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Parameter number eT Leading hole User macro program A uses the especial word see the following OR XOR IF GOTO EQ NE GT LT GE LE User macro program B uses especial additional word see the following AND SIN COS TAN ATAN SQRT ABS BIN BCD ROUND FIX FUP WHILE DO END 2 10 10 Limiting Proceeding 1 Variables 0 1 33 100 149 500 509 System variable 2 Available variable values The max value 1077 the min value 107 3 The effective constant value in lt Expression gt The max value 99999999 the min value 0 0000001 Decimal point available 4 Operational accuracy decimal system 8 digits 5 Macro program call nestification level the max four layers a Repeated recognition number 1 3 b Nestification of the max five layers c The nestification level of subprogram call up
186. cutting cycle G92 3 Cutting cycle B for the turning end face There are 7 types of the compound canned cycle About the details refer to Compound canned cycle 2 7 2 G70 G76 1 Finishing cycle G70 2 Outer diameter roughing cycle G71 3 End face roughing cycle G72 4 Closed loop cutting cycle G73 5 End face cutting groove cycle G74 6 Outer diameter groove cycle G75 7 Thread cutting cycle G76 The function can change the revolving speed of the spindle motor so the tool The constant circle can remain the constant circle speed in any position The constant circle speed speed control A B G96 can be directly specified by S4 digits Whether the constant circle speed is valid G97 or invalid is represented by the following G codes G96 Valid G97 Invalid In the constant circle speed control A the signal of 12 bits in binary system without the contact which is the calculated spindle speed is sent to the machine g Q Oo r 4D 0 Z o O 4 O O A a gt Q Q Q C ZA Q a 5 me C O a 5 In the constant circle speed control B the analog signal in the direct ratio with the spindle speed is sent to the machine Thread cutting specified F code is replaced by E code to specify the precise thread lead in the following by E code of 6 digits range Metric input 0 0001 mm 500 0000mm Inch input 0 000001 inch 9 99999inc
187. d cutting cycle G 76 gt O D S Q x oO U A S D r D T 316 Appendix 5 Parameters setting range metric input0 16383 unit 0 001mm inch input0 16383 unit 0 0001inch also can make it by press set key to change its value Tool nose ye Ind ZANE 3rd ZAW nth If the result calculated by formula d yn 1 Jn is less than THCLM value then the clamping position of the cutting is the THCLM value Parameter No 0069 CRCDL Description CRCDL The minor move limit for neglecting at outer acute angle near 90 in tool nose radius compensation The minor move is ignored when AX lt CRCDL AZ lt CRCDL By this process it may eliminate the affection to the workpiece by the tool siajawelied G xipueddy a H Tool center path after compensation Programmed path Parameter No ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Ca a e a a i Description In position width settings of X axis and Z axis respectively Setting range 0 32767 detection unit standard setting 10 Parameter No 0074 STPEX 0075 STPEZ Description STPEX Position offset limit at stopping of X axis and Z axis respectively STPEZ Parameter No 0078 SERRX 0079 SERRZ Description SERRX Position offset limit at moving of X axis and Z axis respectively SERRZ setting range 0 32767 detection unit Parameter No GRDSX GRDSZ Description GRDSX Grid offset of X axis and Z axis respectivel
188. d of an address and its following several digits may be prefixed to a digit X 1000 wW Address Number NV Word An address uses one of letters from A to Z to defines meanings of its following digits The following table describes addresses and meanings used in the CNC One address meaning is 4 Chapter 2 Programming different because preparatory functions have different commands Fareiion ees Tearing Program No Program number Kanini Specifies a motion mode linear arc ect function X Z O XZ UW W Coordinate axis movement command axis movement command Coordinate ome word Coordinate of arc center chamfering Feedrate F E Feedrate command leading Spindle function Spindle speed command Tool Tool function Tool number tool Tool number tool offset number number BaN Switch ON OFF control command on machine side function Program no Subprogram number designation Number of Number of subprogram repetitions number of canned Repetitions e repetitions Sequence no beets eee ete aro number for specifying cycle program start designation and end The following block can be formed by using these program words N G X Z F S T M QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 io ou sdUENbES uonouny Asojesedald DJOM 8 eCUIPJOO4 9 e1pee 4 uoun jpuidS uoun JOO po pus YyOO G UOIOUN SNOSsUe aOSI In the following exam
189. ddress gt it indicates that the variable or the complement of the variable is regarded as the command value of this address For example 2 10 2 3 When the F 33 33 1 5 it is same to the F1 5 When the Z 18 18 20 0 it is same to the Z 20 0 command 154 Chapter 2 Programming When the G 130 130 3 0 itis same to the G3 1 The variable is forbidden to use after address O N For example 27 and N 1 can not be employed n n 1 9 in the block skip n can not be regarded as variable 2 Variable number can not be replaced with variable When the 5 in 5 is replaced with 30 it can not be written into 30 it is instead of 30 3 The variable value can not exceed the max value specified with each address When 140 120 the M 140 exceeds the maximum value M code must be less than 99 4 When the variable is regarded as the data of address the digits following with decimal point are rounded off 5 Using the following lt Expression gt The subsequent digit can be indicated with lt Expression gt Specifying lt Address gt lt Expression gt or lt Address gt lt Expression gt means that the value of lt Expression gt or its complement is the digit of this address Note that the constant number without decimal point in is regarded as the number at the end with decimal point For example 2 10 2 4 X 24 18 COS 1 Z 18 26 QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S
190. decimal point Leading zero can be omitted Incremental value with sign Address Example To move the X axis to 50 123mm at the rapid traverse the tool move commands are shown below GOO X 50 123 L 3 digits in the following of the decimal point The 5 digits in the front of decimal point the leading zero of 00050 can be omitted Even the leading zero can be omitted GOO can be omitted to GO GOO specifies rapid feedrate Note 3 In one block same address word commands more than two in fact the following commands are effective no alarm For example G01 M03 S200 MO8 M08 enabled MO3 disenabled 1 G code in each group is also enabled at last O gt D r D N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo 2 R and K are simultaneously commanded in arc command it is regardless of sequence and the R is enabled 3 E and F are commanded in thread cutting in a same block the posterior commands are enabled 4 X or U and Z or W the posterior one commanded is enabled Note 4 F032 and F050 input by metric are shifted with parameter also F033 and F051 refer to 2 4 4 feedrate 1 10 F032 input by mm and F024 input by inch are feed input format per rev F050 input by mm F032 input by inch are feed input format per min Note 5 A P Q Land D have many significations so the above formats are omitted Note 6 Refer to 2 2 4 decimal point input when inputting by using decimal point Note 7 The input values with p
191. des with LCD screen MDI keypad and softkey function keypad 229 Sr msz GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual amp GaSe CNC A feta Ses i AT 2y J sie re p Kaos e 23 PRG OFT PAR GRA Function buttons Function buttons display the big item similar with the chapter in the book Press the function buttons twice it changes into chapter two three times it changes into chapter three if there are these chapters The interfaces in the chapter can be selected by various function buttons and the interface can be selected by the page keys The followings are the display and contents of each chapter of each function button POSITION Display interface of current position value O Press i l i Display interface of setting once oe Display interf f l l isplay interface of macro value SETTING twice Display interface of menu switch Press om Display interface of program check once eee Display interf f tent isplay interface of program conten PROGRAM twice a 5 Q O P K O O DR Q me e 5 Display interface of program Press Display interface of NC parameter PARAMETER once Press l l l Display interface of PC parameter twice a Display interf f tool i ffset isplay interface of tool wearing offse OFFSET once aie 3 230 Chapter 4 Operation Display interface of workpiece coordinate offset Display interface of tool outline offset Display interface of alarm information
192. describes a part program to be compiled 2 2 Structure of an NC Program A program includes a main program and subprograms Normally the CNC operates according to the main program However when a command edited by the main program calls a subprogram in the main program then the CNC performs operations according to the subprogram Besides when the subprogram is commanded to return to the main program the CNC performs operations based on the main program s commands O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual The CNC memory can store 191 main programs and subprograms and the CNC system operates one of them to run the machine tool Main program Subprogram Program ommand Kansien Command n Command n 1 Main program command return Note As for storage and selection modes of programs refer to the CHAPTER FOUR OPERATION 2 2 1 Block A program is composed of multiple commands and one group of commands is called a block EL Two blocks are separated by the end code of block and the block end code is represented by character in the following explanation of the manual For example N2 GOO X10 0 Z22 0 N3 G01 Z10 0 R5 0 F100 N4 X38 0 K 4 0 N5 ZO Note 1 Character number of a block is not restricted Note 2 Block end code EIA code is used with CR ISO code is used with LF 2 2 2 Word A block consists of words A word is compose
193. direction 136 Chapter 2 Programming G75 DO 5 F150 Machining cycle G75 X40 Z 50 16000 K3000 Tool infeed 6mm every time tool retraction 0 5mm after feedrate to end point X40 rapidly return to starting point X125 tool infeed 3mm in Z direction execute the above cycle to continuously run GO X150 0 250 0 Return to machining starting point M30 End of program 2 7 2 7 Thread Cutting G76 The following figure indicate thread cutting cycle it is programmed with G76 command F E Fi A R R O 2 Q O m D NO U co Q 3 R Rapid traverse F Feedrate Note When I lt IWI there is no need to add retraction flute When 2 IWI retraction flute should be added Tool nose F G76 X U Z W __ K___D Ad A E 137 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual I Radius error i of thread If O the common straight thread can be cut K Thread height X axis direction K is specified with radius value D The first cutting depth Ad F E Thread leading Same as G32 A Tool nose angle thread angle There are six angles can be selected It is A80 in the occasion of 80 It is A60 in the occasion of 60 It is A55 in the occasion of 55 It is A30 in the occasion of 30 It is A29 in the occasion of 29 It is AO in the occasion of 0 If an Ais omitted 0 by default R Thread chamfering When the thread leading is indicated with L the r va
194. dress CH Select block skip II Replace at the beginning in the left of the sentence CIV G V The initial character of IF WHILE GOTO END DO SETVN On LCD screen the space of one character is left before the above characters and marks Deleting rewriting and inserting the program is operated based on the unit which is the characters between two cursor positions 274 Example The position of the cursor N001 X 100 _ 1 123 N002 2 X 12 3 NO003 X SORT 3 3 4 1 NO004 X 2 Z 1 NO005 5 1 2 10 IF 1 NE 0 GOTO 10 WHILE 2 LE 5 DO1 2000 2 2 10 _ 2 2 1 END1 Note 1 The cursor can t stop in the bracket T tt Control pause restore Chapter 4 Operation Example _ 1 100 No stopping in the position Note 2 The position of the cursor varies as the program is rewritten ALTER Example Z200 of X 100 Z200 is rewritten into 100 with it s changed into X 100100 c Abbreviation of the custom macro When the custom macro is rewritten or inserted it can be replaced by the initial two letters That is to say WHILE GOTO END SOR AND SIN COS TAN ATAN SORT ABS BCD BIN FIX FUP ROUND SETVN can be replaced by the marked part Example The input data WH TA 1 AB 2 LERO 3 are same with WHILE TAN 1 ABS 2 LE ROUND 3 4 4 23 Display Running Time After the automatic operation time is accumulated it is displayed
195. during thread cutting the dwell is effective during thread cutting the tool retracts to the cycle start point Operation 1 MiS0x 0 N10 Gay 51000 Moa TO100 GOO KoG 0 0 0 To101 GTS KOZ TOGO D100 I100 GTE 26 2 732 0 K900 D500 F1 5 GOO K200 0 2200 0 TO100 MiG Operation 2 139 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual _M40x1 5 M20x1 5 N10 G97 S800 M03 T0300 G00 X30 0 25 0 T0303 G76 K021060 D100 1100 G76 X18 2 Z 20 0 K900 D500 F1 5 G00 X50 0 Z 20 0 G76 K021060 D100 1100 O 2 Q O r D s N U 3 Q 3 2 Can be omitted G76 X38 2 Z 52 0 K900 D500 F 1 5 G00 X200 0 2200 0 T0300 M30 2 2 8 Notes for Compound Canned Cycle G 70 G76 1 The address P Q X Z U W I K D and A should be correctly specified in the block of composite canned cycle Set correct address and its value not to lack the address or set some address data beyond the permission range in programming 2 When G71 G72 or G73 is specified G code GOO or G01 of group 01 must be indicated in the block of the sequence specified with P or No 065 alarm occurs 3 G70 G71 G72 and G73 can not be instructed in MDI mode or No 067 alarm occurs However the G74 G75 or G76 can be instructed in MDI and Auto modes 4 M98 and M99 can not specified in the block which it is included G70 G71 G72 or G73 and between the blocks which is specified by P and Q 5 Fo
196. dy DO Layers of DO can R be nested up to 3 inside the user macro program body and subprogram 3 i 3 I O DO1 l G65 Can G66 Can G67 Can END1 DO1 M98 Can END1 2 10 6 Programming and Storage of User Macro Program Body 2 10 6 1 Programming of User Macro Program Body The format of user macro program body is same to the subprogram the creation is as follows O Program number Command M99 172 Chapter 2 Programming The program numbers are divided into the following parts 1 01 079999 Using for the program which can be stored deleted and edited freely 2 08000 08999 The program can not be stored deleted and edited if the setting is not performed 3 O9000 09019 Special macro program for the calling format 4 09020 09899 The program can not be stored deleted and edited if the setting is not applied 5 O9900 09999 ROBOT operation program Imaginary argument variable It is used for accepting the data conversion of macro program calling command is fixed That is to say the address of instruction parameter in macro program calling command should correspond one by one to variables in the user macro body acceptor Example Section 2 10 6 1 09081 GOOW 23 U 18 G01U 21 GOOU 18 21 M99 QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo 2 10 6 2 Storage of User Macro Program Body User macro program body is a kind of subprogram the storage and operation
197. e in macro program modal call When multiple modal macros are specified the next macro program is 178 Chapter 2 Programming called for performing each movement command The macro program call is effective after it is specified For example the Section 2 10 7 5 G66P9100 Z10000 1 1 G66P9200 Z15000 1 2 G67 P9200 Cancel G67 P9100 Cancel Z 25000 1 3 09100 X5000 M99 2 1 09200 Z6000 3 1 Z7000 3 2 M99 Performance sequence Block omittance without moveable O Q O r D N U Q Q 3 gt Q 1 1 CI 2 1 3 Note The modal macro program can not be called depart from the macro program call mode after 1 3 2 10 7 5 Macro Program Call with G Code G code setting with parameter can call the macro program That is N G65PA AAA lt Argument assignment gt can be replaced with the following simple command and they perform the same operations 00001 G81 X10 0 Y20 0 7 10 0 M30 179 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual NC parameter 323 81 The corresponding relationships of the G code use for calling and macro program number AAAA called are set in parameter There are 10 in GO1 G255 can use for calling the macro program other than GOO These G codes can not be specified with MDI like G65 These G codes can not be specified in the called macro program and can not be specified in the subprogram called with M code T code eithe
198. e Speed Function S Function 2 8 1 1 S2 Digital Address S and its following 2 digits are controlled to the spindle speed refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details Note When the 4 digits are specified in the code of 2 digits the following two digits are effective 2 8 1 2 S4 Digital Spindle speed rpm is directly determined by the S and the following 4 digits of S Spindle speed unit depends on the different machine builders 2 8 2 Constant Surface Cutting Speed Control 2 8 2 1 Constant Surface Cutting Speed The surface speed spindle revolution is specified after S it is regardless of tool position when the spindle turns but the surface speed keeps constant The voltage backfeed to the spindle control so spindle revolution generates the correct surface speed Surface speed unit is as follows mm m min The speed unit is determined by the machine tool builder The following G code is used for constant surface speed control ME e E G96 Constant surface cutting m min feed min speed control When the surface speed control is effective the workpiece coordinate system should be set to the Z axis becomes revolving axis X 0 X The S in the mode of G96 is regarded as S 0 when MO3 and M04 are not specified The S is enabled when MO3 or M04 is specified 142 Chapter 2 Programming 2 8 2 2 Spindle Speed Override The specified signal is transformed from machine tool which ca
199. e cties ah neat eset A EN 235 4 4 3 Display the Program Number and the Sequence NUMDET ccccccccccccescceeseeceesseeeesseeeeees 236 Aa my 21 a iy Coy 6 2 ene eat ee a ee a ene ee ee 236 AAS AQOCTAUOMTTMOMMQAUON ennenen oad RE Beales es tata Soclee eater ss tense Mees ad cates aadtS en 237 4 4 6 Current Position Display and R SCItNG ccccccccccscccccsscceesscccesseccesseceesseecesseeceeseeceeseeeesseeeesas 237 4 4 7 Display the Commanded Value cccccccccsccccsssccessscccessceessseecesseecesssecessaescsesescesseeceseeeessaeeeenas 239 44G Oen RUNCHON DC IAG eeta E A e a E eendacesadee 241 AA 8 1 Input Output Other Display and Settini sn siceicccesiinidien eens eat 241 4 4 8 2 Display and Setting the Custom Macro Variable Values ccccccccccsssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaas 243 449 MADE COD CTA ON praana a a A A AB es Aan SRA ARS es Se 245 AATO MB GODCAUON tarara e E E eananie tanta eaeaaNeaets 247 BATA PESEN eresie a casa tateeaasa dees natndntsseahadenseasa ies casb sensual aacisssnadan isaac taaleeemseahaeeeseaneccnsealse 247 4 4 12 Setting and Display the Tool Position Offset Amount the Tool Nose R Compensation AMOUNT searecs costes sscatapbat vag a ssegsea peas ea R 247 AAT Wut thes DSOLILE Vai ect ssvsacduetoactinasandeneds E swasstawitudand aucun eiae 247 AAAZ2 The Incremental Value Mputa rneer EE EE 249 4 4 12 3 Respectively Setting Tool Figure Offset and Tool Wearing Offset ccccccc
200. e digit followed with N is regarded as subprogram 2 9 2 Performance of Subprogram The subprogram is performed when it is called with main program or other subprogram The following specifications are employed when calling the subprogram for subprogram The subprogram is repeatedly once when L omits For example M98P 1002 L5 The subprogram should be called for 5 times when the command no 1002 subprogram is Subprogram number performed Calling subprogram command M98P_L_ and move the command can be indicated into the same block 147 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual O 2 Q O r D s N U Q 3 mD For example X1000 M98 P1200 In this example subprogram 1200 calling is performed after executing the movement of X axis The following sequence is from main program calling to subprogram calling Main program Subprogram When a subprogram calls another one the execution process of subprogram is same as above figure Note 1 M98 and M99 signals are not propagated to machine tool Note 2 If the subprogram specified with P can not be found the no 78 alarm occurs Note 3 Subprogram calls command M98P_ it can not be input from MDI Preparing the following main programs with MDI see the following O XXXX M98 PXXXxX NO2 And then it is performed with Auto mode Note 4 Single block is disabled when it stops in the block of M98P_ M99
201. e last axis Z is returned 4 4 20 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop Function The function is to stop machining after the commands are executed into the preset sequence number D a Select MP mode Press setting button to switch into the setting interface press to move the cursor to the setting number 180 and the address N can t move the cursor 267 gt Q O P K O DR Q ms 5 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual INPUT b Press P sequence number to stop and to input commands in order c Select 0 mode to make the machine ready for automatic operation d Press T button The machine stops after executing the data in the block with the preset sequence number based on step c Ce The preset sequence number is cleared during executing the program comparison and stop meanwhile f Ifit requires to execute the comparison and stop once more repeat the steps from a Note 1 The sequence number 0 can t be taken as the sequence number comparison and stop Note 2 The preset sequence number can be cleared by resetting Therefore automatic running is performed after setting without resetting 4 4 21 Display Parameters Press parameters press or parameters refer to Appendix 5 to display the parameters of each interface About the meaning of 4 4 22 Editing a Program 5 Q O r K O O x Q a 5 The p
202. e machine gets impact if it stops suddenly Select the automatic acceleration and deceleration function is also valid and it can reduce the mechanical impact Note 4 Select the content with the MPG insert function refer to 4 3 7 gt Q O r NK O O DR Q ms 5 4 3 4 3 Manual Absolute ON OFF Whether the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the automatic running coordinates can be selected by turning the manual absolute switch on or off on the display panel When the switch is turned on the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the coordinates When the switch is turned off the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added not to the coordinates 1 When the manual absolute switch is ON the coordinates change by the amount of the manual operation 210 Chapter 4 Operation X axis Manual operation in a P2 The coordinate values are changed by the amount of the manual operation 2 When the manual absolute switch is OFF the coordinates do not change by the amount of the manual operation X2 x1 O D Q O O Pt Zz O D 01 l i Zi 9 The coordinate values remain unchanged The following describes the relation between manual operation and the coordinate values when the manual absolute switch is turned on or off using a program example G01 X100 0 Z100 0 F100 1 X200 0Z150
203. e manufacturer and is released through CCW or CW rotation Notes 1 The machine should be operated zero return again after releasing the button 2 The troubleshooting should be executed after releasing the button 3 The motor enable is cut off after pressing the button 4 3 3 Mode selection amp 6 amp lD T PN AUTO EDIT MDI MANUAL MPG poh Operation mode is selected 1 The programs in the memory are executed Auto 2 The sequence number can be searched for the program in the memory The following program editing can be executed 207 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 1 The program is saved in the memory 2 The program rewriting inserting and deleting are executed 3 The programs are output in the memory 4 3 4 Operation Relative to the Manual The following manual operation can be executed with the switches and buttons on the operation panel and MPG 4 3 4 1 Manual Continuous Feeding The manual continuous feeding can make the machine move 1 Select manual operation mode 2 Select the movement feedrate the feedrate override switch can only be valid when the rapid movement switch is OFF gt Q O r K O O 0 DR Q a 5 Manual feedrate mm min Inching feedrate Rotary switch Metric thread Inch thread position l l mm min Inch min Inch min mm min ooo ee 0S SOS In O Y O 4 10 004 002 OB 2 Jis SS 0028 O7
204. e measure position when a command is executed CNC automatically checks the difference between the current coordinate value and specified coordinate value and it is regarded as the tool offset value When the tool moves to the measure position in offset mode as for the resultant the further offset value generates the current offset value is further offset 1 Coordinate system A coordinate system G50Xx Zz should be set beforehand before the tool moves to the measure position this coordinate system is then set Using common workpiece coordinate system when programming 2 Moving to measure position G36 Xxa Zza is specified to move to the measure position in MDI or Auto mode In this case the measure position should Xx or Zz Absolute command The tool moves to the measure position at rapid traverse when the this command is executed the feedrate is reduced when approaching measure position and then the tool moves continuously till to the end signal from measure equipment issues When tool nose approaches the measure position the measure equipment sends a signal to NC to stop the tool 3 Offset When tool arrives measure position a B when the value of Xa or Za is specified using G36 Xxa or G37 Zza the current tool offset value is further replaced by the D value between the coordinate value a or B and Xa or Za Offset value X current offset value X a Xa Offset value Z current offset value Z a Za These offset v
205. e once with tool along the workpiece surface A Press key the tool retracts and the spindle stops 2 Measure the workpiece length b select the tool figure offset page type N101 or the current tool number corresponding to the offset number N102 or N107 are also input Then input key is pressed Z and the measured workpiece length b can be input after the N flashes at the lower left corner If the Z axis coordinate zero point is regarded as workpiece surface so the ZO can be input and the key is controlled again 3 Start the spindle operate once along the workpiece surface B The Position record key is controlled the tool retracts and spindle stops 4 Measure the workpiece diameter a select the tool figure offset page typing N101 or the current tool corresponding to the offset number N102 or N107 can be input The input key is pressed X and the measured workpiece diameter value a can be input after viewing the letter N flashes and then the input key is pressed again 5 All the measured data is input with decimal point 110 Chapter 2 Programming Note Tool figure offset page Tool figure offset 91 00001 Nooo1 NO k R GOL G z GOS GO4 GOS GOG GOT O00 OOO O00 OOO O00 mo Oo ooo ey Current position Relative coordinate U lal 30 W ald 450 Worn offset Workpiece offset Figure offset 2 6 7 Automatic Tool Offset Input The tool moves to th
206. e position of SKIP signal is at the end of this block when the SKIP signal in G31 is not O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 switched on For example the Section 2 10 3 6 The operation by some sequence is performed from the intermediate point of command moves to the some canned point of machine tool and then it returns to the original position A calling command of macro program G65 P9300 X Intermediate point Z Intermediate point User macro program body specifying is as follows 09300 1 5001 2 5002 GOO X 24 Z 26 G04 U xp 5021 W zp 5022 Processing X 24 Z 26 X 1 Z 2 M99 2 10 4 Operation Command Each operation can be performed during variable The operation command programming is 164 Chapter 2 Programming same to the common calculation i lt Expression gt The lt Expression gt on the right of operation command is composed with constant variable function and operator i and k can also be replaced by constant The constant without decimal point in lt Expression gt is regarded as the last constant of decimal point 2 10 4 1 Variable Definition and Replacement Hi j Definition and replacement 2 10 4 2 Arithmetic Addition Hi j k And Hi j k Subtraction H i OR k Logic OR Each one is OR together in 32 digits H i XOR k Logic exclusive OR Each one is exclusive or in 32 digits 2 10 4 3 Multiplication Calculati
207. e power is turned on just now and the reset key or the reset signal on MDI unit is controlled on MDI LCD display panel the offset amount is cancelled or the offset number becomes 0 or OO Set parameter 8 2 TOC to select whether to cancel the offset amount when the reset key is pressed or signal is input by resetting Note When the reference position return is performed by manual or G28 or G30 the offset vector of the axis has reached the reference point is cancelled temporarily and it is restored in the next block but only when the next one is T code and the parameter 8 4 TLCC is set to 1 the offset vector can be restored 2 6 1 8 Program Example Tool nose coordinate value Z X tool number 61 O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Tool number 1 B 0 120 0 200 01 Tool number 2 C 0 180 0 050 02 X axis l B O 120 0 200 Ha A C 0 180 0 050 A Tool nose setting on program B Actual tool nose 1 C Actual tool nose 2 0 200 0 050 Programmed path AREA Lips Offset path for using 1 tool X axis Offset path for using 2 tool 30 280 CANCEL P Z X A 240 280 The coordinate value of fiX axis is diameter value when programming f Program example 1 G50 X280 0 2240 0 G00 X120 0 2200 07 11 G01 2140 0 F30 X160 0 Z80 0 G03 X227 7 Z3
208. e stroke limit alarm stop immediately is released P S alarm 98 occurs when the program restart is operated and G28 is detected while the reference position return isn t executed Note 11 After completion of search in program restart P S alarm 99 occurs when a move command is given with MDI before the axis movement operation 223 gt Q O r K O ER Q 5 AA pak E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 4 3 7 MPG Interruption A Tool position during automatical running Tool position after MPG interruption 7 y AI Z Frogrammed cutting depth Cutting depth caused by MPG interruption Workpiece 4 3 7 1 Overview The specified axis set by parameters 314 0 and 314 1 can be moved by MPG manual operation during automatic operation and added into the movement of automatic running 4 3 7 2 Operation of MPG Interruption In the following situations MPG interruption can be operated by MPG 1 In automatic mode or MDI mode 2 Movement state In linear arc helical or sine interpolation MPG insert can be performed except for the following situations In the situations below the manual interpolation can not be executed 5 Q O r NK O O x Q ms 5 CI In the alarm II The machine lock is valid III The positioning is valid CIV The interlock is valid CV Without the movement commands 3 MPG select signal MPG a
209. e system of tool nose of reference tool or some base point of tool post is automatically set It is the same as the tool is specified by G50 Xa ZB at reference position G50 Xa Zp 48 Chapter 2 Programming Tool nose of reference tanl Zero When tool nose of standard tool is at the base point X EN Th Base point a po When base point at the center of double tool holder O gt D r D me N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 Oo 2 5 10 4 Workpiece Coordinate System Offset If the workpiece coordinate system specified with G50 or coordinate system set by automatic coordinate system is different from the programming coordinate system well then the coordinate system offset can be set beforehead to coincide with the programming coordinate system Offset values can be set in offset number 00 using offset memory The setting mode is same as tool position offset value 49 AA pak E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Movement value from O to O is set by using no OO offset memory 69 00 Start base point O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 oaa amet Programming When base point position diameter value in X direction is 121mm and is 69 mm in Z direction G50 command is performed see the following G50 X120 0 270 0 Therefore the actual position can be gained by moving the current workpiece 1 00mm along X axis direction and 1 0
210. e taken as G one cycle and it stops i after each 7 paths are executed It s assumed that the tool i eee ae E path from 1 to 4 from 5 to 6 9 to 12 13 to 16 and 17 ho to 20 are taken as one ae o 3 i 3f ze i i i N A ps after G74 o gt 19 OO LTY y l IALIA IA AAA S cee ALERT 3 Note The path shown in the figure is the same as that of G71 and G72 72 B G90 G77 G92 G78 G94 G79 70 70 G71 G72 218 G71 G72 Chapter 4 Operation It s assumed that the tool paths 1 6 are taken as one cycle and it stops after each 6 paths are executed It s assumed that the tool paths 1 10 are taken as one cycle and it stops after each 10 paths are executed Note The path shown in the figure is the same as that of G74 and G75 It s assumed that the tool paths 1 4 are taken as one cycle and it stops after each 4 paths are executed 3 Subprogram calling and the single block running The single block doesn t stop in the block with commands M98P_ M99 G65 G66 or G67 However if the addresses except for O N or P are in the block the single block stops even M98P_ or M99 command in the block gt Q O r K O ER Q 5 4 3 6 4 Restarting after a Feed Hold or Stop 1 Select Auto or MDI mode 2 Press cycle start button the cycle start lamp is ON while the feed hold lamp is OFF 4 3 6 5 Manual
211. e two coordinate axes Tool will move to the specified position and regardless of where is the signal input For example G31 2200 0 X100 0 Z300 0 57 Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual A Actual movement Movement without skip signal Skip signal input from here LOO fi 100 200 300 Feedrate of G31 block is set by parameter 306 SKPF with the following two methods 1 F specifies the feedrate F code is specified by the previous of G31 block or specified in block 2 Parameter No 342 sets the feedrate User macro program can employ the tool position coordinate value when the skip signal is ON and it is stored into the system variables 5061 and 5062 5061 X coordinate value 5062 Z coordinate value Skip function can be employed when the movement value is indefinite see the following O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 a Grinding wheel standard dimension federate b Tool contacts sensor to feed tool measure Note 1 G31 is generated alarm No 35 when tool nose compensation R is employed Note 2 When G31 is commanded the parameter sets the feedrate When it is dry run the feedrate is also determined by the parameter Note 3 When the G31 is commanded if the feedrate is set by the parameter and when the skip function is employed the automatic acceleration deceleration for adding automatic measure accuracy is not performed 2 6 Compens
212. e variable or lt Expression gt replaces n Note The block with sequence number n will be performed after the GOTO n the sequence number should be placed at the beginning of the block The performance time of reverse direction difference is longer than the positive direction 2 10 5 2 Cycle When the specified conditions is satisfied between DO and END blocks of WHILE are executed otherwise the system executes blocks following END the command format is applied to the number following DO and END of IF statement which is the label used to specify the program execution range The label value is 1 2 3 P S No 126 alarm occurs when other labels except for 1 2 3 are used WHILE lt Conditional expression gt DO m m 1 2 3 cycle block END m The block is repeatedly performed from the next block of Dom to ENDm during the lt Conditional expression gt establishing that is judging the lt Conditional expression gt in Dom program It performs from next block when lt Conditional expression gt is established the next block of ENDm is performed when it is not established WHILE lt Conditional expression gt can also be omitted like IF The WHILE lt Conditional expression gt is repeated unlimitedly when it is omitted WHILE lt Conditional expression gt Dom and ENDm should be employed simultaneously The mutual corresponding relationship is distinguished from the number m Example Section 2 10 5 1 120 1 N1
213. ear interpolation G01 is not always arrives the end G02 or G03 can be done it Note 4 Sine T function is omitted in G71 block and it is valid in G70 block attention should be paid that whether the T code is required in programming if not cancel it Note 5 Z w command can not be included in the block with the sequence number ns 125 SA pak E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 1 The second type is different from the first type d The monotone increasing or monotone decreasing for the workpiece figure along X axis is not required Allowing for up to 10 grooves But the curve in the Z direction must independent the following curve is incorrect This curve in Z direction is not independently increased O 2 Q O r D s N U Q 3 2 II The first cutting of roughing is not required for vertical to Z direction cutting Any figure the Z direction can be machined as long as it is independently increased Ill A tool retraction can be applied after cutting along with the workpiece surface d set by the parameter The tool retraction amount d regarded as parameter 67 must be set in advance IV The cutting path with two slots is shown below 126 Chapter 2 Programming V The tool nose compensation value may not add to finishing allowance Au and Aw and the tool nose radius offset is regarded as 0 VI Normally the Aw must be set to 0 or the work
214. ect against the overcut or tool collision 2 8 Spindle Speed Function S Function Tool Function T Function QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Miscellaneous Function M Function The BCD code and strobe signal are sent to NC system by the digitals specified after S T and M These signals are mainly used for controlling the machine switch function S code is used for spindle control T code is used for tool change and M code is used for kinds of machine switch functions Since function configuration of the machine tool builders not always the same refer to the user manual issued by the machine builder about the address and code When a movement command and S T M codes are specified at the same block there are two ways to perform the following commands 1 The movement command and S T M codes are performed simultaneously 2 S T M codes are performed after the movement command is executed Example N1 G01 U 100 0 W50 0 M05 Spindle stops Movement and spindle x stop commands are execute at the same time Spindle stops after movement executes 50 s0 i ii Diameter programming 141 O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 erms GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual One of method from above is selected in terms of technical requirement of machine builder refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details 2 8 1 Spindl
215. ectively setting range 8 4000 unit ms Parameter No 0100 EXPTX 0101 EXPTZ Description EXPTX Index acceleration and deceleration time constant of X axis and Z axis JOG EXPTZ feed respectively setting range 8 4000 unit ms sigjawelied G xipueddy Parameter No 0104 THRDT Description Use index acceleration and deceleration time constant of X axis in thread cutting with No 107 parameter to set most proper value setting range 1 4000 unit msec 323 ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Note when time constant of No 104 parameter is small the retraction of the thread can be small and the retraction time can be shortening in thread chamfering However too small value will lead to mechanical shock So by setting time constant of parameter No 104 and acceleration and deceleration lower limit feedrate of No 107 parameter while thread chamfering is performing the retraction of the thread can still be small though this parameter value is larger Usually No 104 parameter time constant should refer to the max feedrate of thread cutting and No 107 parameter lower limit feedrate should be 2m min Parameter No 0105 FEEDT Description FEEDT Index acceleration and deceleration time constant in cutting feedrate setting range 8 4000 unit ms Parameter No 0106 FEDMX Description FEDMX Upper limit of cutting feedrate for all axes setting range 6 15000 unit mm min metric output 6 6000 unit 0 1inch m
216. ed 13th password Not activated 02th password Not activated 14th password Not activated 03th password Not activated 15th password Not activated 04th password Not activated 16th password Not activated O5th password Not activated 17th password Not activated O6th password Not activated 18th password Not activated O7th password Not activated 19th password Not activated O8th password Not activated 20th password Not activated 09th password Not activated 21th password Not activated 10th password Not activated 22th password Not activated 1ith password Not activated 23th password Not activated 12th password Not activated 24th password Not activated jE DEADLINE RELIEVE ACTIVE RETURN 6 Press soft function key SERVO mae and enter into servo and setting interface The shielding of servo ready alarm and servo cut off alarm and parameter switch can be set by level 2 authority as follows SERVO AND SETTING X SV READY ALM 1 0 OFF 1 0N X WIRE BK ALM 1 0 OFF 1 0N SV READY ALM 11 0 OFF 1 0N Z WIRE BK ALM j1 0 0FF 1 0N PAR switch 1 0 0FF 1 0N Enable switch 1 O N 1 Y 389 CGSRI HE GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual 390
217. ed after the coordinate system is set changed or moved the external workpiece zero offset amount changes The machining restart block is one of many blocks The block is after the one of the last coordinate system is set or changed before the machining stops Note 3 In P and Q modes the tool moves into the machining restart position with one axis each time After the axis movement completes the single block perhaps stops while MDI operation can t be inserted but manual operation and the returned axis can t move Note 4 During searching when the movement signals and the offset amount etc are different with the previous ones the tool can t return to the previous restarting position of machining Set the single block switch as ON or switch into the automatic mode to continue searching Note 5 During searching when the feed hold remains valid or the resetting is operated after searching the program should be restarted from the beginning After the searching ends parameter 007 CLEAR bit is rewritten into resetting state in MDI mode during resetting Note 6 When the program automatic start switch is ON the cycle start can be ignored Note 7 The manual absolute switch should be always ON and the manual operation is executed no matter before or after the machining After the manual operation before resetting one program restarting operation is commanded or the manual operation is performed along with the axis without returning
218. ed when the program is stored regardless of how block skip switch is set Note 6 When the program in the memory is output to the outer PC by communication interface QO gt D r D N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo regardless of how block skip switch is set it can be output integrally Note 7 Some optional block skip switch may not be used for some machine tools So please refer to the machine tool builder manual Note 8 When an optional block skip is specified if multiple optional block skip codes are specified in a block 1 in 1 can not be omitted Please describe 1 according to the above Example Error 3G00 X10 0 Right 1 3G00 X10 0 2 3 Dimension Word The dimension word describes tool movement composed of movement axis address its value indicates move direction and length The value modification is determined by the absolute and incremental programming Refer to Section 2 3 7 pimenclen werd eddies word address Eiciccminans A a target position in coordinate system Absolute programming Basic axis Kae a move distance incremental programming U indicates X axis ow ja indicates Z axis A e 11 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual arc interpolation k Specifying a distance l or K from starting point to arc center along the X axis or Z axis For example U 200 0 tool moves to 200 00 along X axis negative direction from current position 2 3 1 Controlled Axes
219. edge triggering mode Note State triggering state is active in signal input ON state edge triggering is active in the rise of signal ME MACINTON M codes for user macro program interruption active Setting range 03 97 Per MACINTOF M codes for user macro program interruption inactive Setting range 03 97 Note Parameters N2053 and 054 are active only when MPRM 025 Bit4 1 except this they are inactive even though be set Miss MINT 1 The NC statement of interruption program starts to be executed until the end of block user macro program interruption type II 0 The NC statement of interruption program starts to be executed before the end of block user macro program interruption type 1 Note Fortype once user macro program interruption signal UINT is input the currently executing program is interrupted and the interruption program is executed The motion after the return varies with the availability of NC statement in interruption program I With NC statement The remaining commands amount of move and suspension time disappear in the interrupted blocks II Without NC statement The remaining command in an interrupted block continues to execute However the sending auxiliary function can be correctly output in both cases Type Il The current block is not interrupted and the interruption program is executed even user macro program interruption signal is input If the interruption program has an NC statement it
220. ee 233410 el e 2 l b c a AINI 50x10 10x 104 Absolute error 3 a C OS Degree a ATAN b c 4 1 84 10 3 6 10 Note Function TAN is realized with SIN COS 2 10 4 8 Processing for Precision Decreasing 1 Additive and subtractive Note that the relative error cannot be guaranteed within 10 in additive and subtractive operation when the absolute value applies to the subtractive operation For example the actual values of 1 and 2 are as follows 167 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 1 9876543210123 456 2 9876543277777 777 2 1 67654 321 2 1 67654 321 can not be gained when calculating the 2 1 Because the user macro program precision is 8 digits of decimal system the values of 1 and 2 have the following lower precision 1 9876543200000 000 2 98 76543300000 000 Because they are binary system number it is less differences to the above values So the bigger error will generated when 2 1 100000 000 2 Logic operation The error because of the EQ NE GT LT GE and LE are basically the same as the additive subtractive Whether the 1 and 2 are equivalent is judged in above example IF 1EQ 2 indicates that the judge may incorrect When error is calculated as follow IF ABS 1 2 LT5000 If the difference of 1 and 2 is in O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 the range of this error is regarded as equivalent 3 Flo
221. eeceeeeeeeeeeeees 250 4 4 12 4 Setting the Workpiece Coordinate Offset eccere a a aa 251 4 4 12 5 Direct Input the Measured Value of the Workpiece Coordinate System cccceccceeceeeees 253 4 4 12 6 Direct Input of the Tool Offset A Mout ssc cose letatseiwtaesasiisesee nates eecbidiae Desde aaei teas 255 4 4 12 7 Inputting the Offset Value of the Counter Select Function sssseseessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaees 256 BATS Display UIC TOO AI snein a a be lick a iai 257 44 14 SCalening Mhe Frogram INUINDCL axiacaae tore tar tasa outa a tte aad E 259 4 4 15 ANQUTIAG a Progra 2 lecetencte tec cle ctvscsc ite ites EA EOE ur le uaa ate Ulery wut 260 A ALTO Doleo a PTOA asna ERRAR O elec atten Case acest a A EE 262 4A T7 Belllng ANFON aM Sansen aen aeea 263 4 4 18 Searching the Sequence NUMDEL ccccccccccsccccsssccesecessssecessceceesecessseccesseecesseecesseeeeseeeesas 263 AAT Pesta ihg a FTON aM cock sah ial cs etch eal el tae el ey se eek tale secs 264 4 4 20 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop FUNCTION ccccccccsccccssccessscseseeeeseseeseseeseeesseeeees 267 4 4 21 Display PALAMETELS cccccccccccccccccetcccsessceeessseeceseasecesssseeceseaseseessasesesssaseceseaseecsesaseceseaeeeeseaas 268 LAr EOG TOOT AIM asasan eee aaah sheay pdasednc cd N 268 ADAM Hy AIM E Gels sett ae tsa cases ct Sai dtu diac tea ead Tyce nea ta rid sedate ee war E ase 269 AAD 2 Methodo Searching a WOE easton ctai teats aene a rusia aca ein
222. efore the feed cycle start or the position display in Manual mode continues to refresh based on the input commands while the machine itself doesn t move and 221 ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual the machine coordinate doesn t change neither The function is used for checking the program Note 1 When G27 G28 or G30 command is set the machine won t move into the reference position and the reference position return lamp is OFF Note 2 M S or T functions are executed 4 3 6 11 Miscellaneous Lock MST DK M S T LOCK When MST button is ON the machine movable sheet iron is moved normally during the program running while M S and T function isn t executed the function also applies to the program check 4 3 6 12 Rapid Movement Override 5 Q O r NN O O 5 Q a 5 On the machine operation panel the rapid movement overrides buttons of the optional override 100 50 and FO can be set When the feedrate is 10m min the switch is set in the position of 50 and the actual feedrate is changed into 5m min FO is the fixed speed feedrate which is set by the machine manufacturer The function also applies to the following situations 1 The rapid movement speed of GOO 2 The rapid movement speed of the canned cycle 3 The rapid movement speed of G27 G28 G29 and G30 4 Manual rapid movement speed 5 The rapid movement speed of the manual reference position retur
223. ell checking is not performed The following status are formed when the feedhold button is controlled during executing the block which the feedhold is ineffective 1 When the feedhold button keeps at the detention status feedhold stops after the feedhold is effective at the first beginning of block 2 Feedhold button holds and then releases the feedhold light is power on but not stops till to the end of the first block after the feedhold is enabled QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo o Function on X lt Function off 7 The variable 3005 of corresponding SETTING data The data in system variable 3005 are specified SETTING data can be set When the value of system variable 3005 is indicated with binary system it is corresponding with the SETTING data 3005 TV check Punch code Input unit Input drive 1 Input drive 2 For example If 3005 5 executes the setting data is as follows TV check 1 Punch code 0 Input unit 1 Input drive 1 0 161 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Input drive 2 0 As follows SETTING DATA PO1 00006 N0006 TV CHECK 0 0FF 1 0N PUNCH CODE O EIA 1 150 INPUT UNIT 0 MM 1 INCH INPUT DEIVCE1 0 TAPE ONLY INPUT DEIVCE2 1 RS232C RUNNING TIME OOOOH OOM OOS PL LSK k 44 14 23 51 ge 8 Modal information 4001 4120 The current value the modal value commanded till to the previous block of m
224. ement without specifying is vertical to G01 of the previous block Alarm no G51 6 In the block the chamfering or corner R is specified its movement direction is incorrect Alarm No 052 Note 3 In single block the tool moves to the chamfering and corner R position which have finish executing the command in the block and stops Note 4 Chamfering and corner R can not be used for the block of thread cutting i O 2 5 4 Figure Dimension Input I O The linear angle such as chamfering corner R and other dimension value on the machine figure D can be directly entered when programming Furthermore chamfering and corner can be inserted i between the linear of random angle F Q For example y Starting 2 z2 Co 7 xd z4 H X x2 Z z2 C c1 X x3 Z z3 R r2 X x4 Z z4 or A a1 C c1 X x3 Z z3 A a2 R r2 X x4 Z z4 Note 1 A straight line is specified it is necessary to specify one or two of X U Z W and A A straight line should be specified at the beginning of next block if only one is specified When chamfering and corner are specified they should be separated by such as C_ R_ p Command Tool movement 31 O D Q O r 0 NO U pn Q 3 Or CES E E erma GSKO83Ta Turning CNC System User Manual X2 Z2 Nia X1 Z1 X3 Z3 A X1 Z1 X3 ae X1 Z1 X3 73 A2 Te a
225. en amends 269 AA 22 35 Method of only Searching an Address eromena a E ET E aes 269 4 4 22 4 Method of Returning to the Program Head cccccsssseecececceecceeceeasesessessseseeeeeceeeeeseeeeaaaas 270 BADD NASP a Word ii cies coseeivien tani asslesaadacnannechewtaiweh EE E A 270 ADDO REWIN a WOOL Cec aeieccccs ochennsnasanoiadeetesaPneans rah a A 270 4 4 22 7 Inserting or Rewriting Many Words Blocks or Character String cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 271 ist POOL C Ear aa a WO ea tee teen er nee ENS A A A MP men OT nae ane one POE TSS ON eT ey Treen Ty tr eenrey 271 Ak 229 SO Clearing beror EOB eorr E E 271 AA ODA Clearing Many BlOCk Saronni A N E RO 2q 2 BADD TE PAO ime a MeMo y oade e a E a 22 4 4 22 12 Display All Program Numbers of All Programs in the Memory cccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 212 A DD Se Edme a User WACO wcsctesgenntahscusancaadul aaa a 273 AALS PISAV RUNNING TINO ei iee E E 219 AAA MoN SWIC FUNCION sepes E E T E ae 275 IX CESK CNC GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual GSK AALS Dawno F NCU N ses creek eth cert te dah lerdal ia dae clara a a 277 AAD eM sO a Oe e E E EEN 279 4 5 DISPLAY BY THE POSITION DISPLAYER SELECTED FUNCTION sseessssecsssocessssossseesossoossseessssesoseosso 282 4 6 METHOD OF SETTING TOOLS ssssscsssiccsesasecsdetonacessesacanesdsnessedasacssosssdeasosonndasssseacascsasseseedessessasacvessecnoncesies 283 APPENDIX 1 SYSTEM VERSION INFORMATION
226. enea a A O 43 23892 G29 A tomatie R ference Position REMI Masel ase a ace E E AES 44 GSK CESK CNC GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 2 5 8 3 G29 Automatic Return from Reference Position ccccccccecceceeececceeaeeeeeaseesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 45 2 5 8 4 G30 Returns the 2 Reference Position cccccssssssssssssesessssecessessessesessvsucessesasarsesassvensavencavsveees 46 20 eo imme DWE OA E mr ise nee cee oor nea er er eee Ce nt tee ens nr ener Ree eee nn oe eer ee 46 25 10 Coordinate SySlem STING CGSO 2D ssiru e 46 2 5 10 1 Command for Coordinate System Setting colicctsn date oitesticctte beatae dant dabecateeluct dees andcecass 46 ZIAD Coordinate System Movement eaa A E 48 ZAO S Anoma Coordinate Syse S e E ana N EA 48 2 5 10 4 Workpiece Coordinate System Offset cccccsssssseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaags 49 2 5 10 5 Workpiece Coordinate System Offset Value Input Directly nennssossssssssooeeeeeesesssssssssssssssse 51 2 5 10 6 Double tool Post Mirror Image G68 G69 cc eeeeeesesssseceeeeeeceeeeeeeaaeeesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeas 53 2511 neh Metric Conversion G20 G21 V sassicasvessvcssicdssicadcsseigescideaivadeaseigches ea oaa 53 25 12 Feedrate Command Shit G98 GOOD roneo a a E 53 2 5 13 Constant Surface Speed Control G96 G97 sssessssssesssesssessssssssrssrisssessrrsssrsssesssessrsssesn 54 29 14 slor d SUOKS LIII G22 GZS rn n E a NE EE EE IE EE EE EAE
227. er 341 parameter in terms of the above items and the reading and each data of punching interface are set for number 310 313 parameters Baud rate etc 3 ISO code is set to output code 4 Setting number 315 parameter to determine when DPRNT command inputs data whether outputting the space to the previous 0 Ba BD During the data outputting the leading zero is treated by PRT DPRNT command see the following 0 Output space 1 not output 2 10 13 5 Notes 1 The POPEN data output BPRNT DPRNT and close commands PCLOS are not needed serially set When the open command is set at the beginning of program till the open command is not need set any more before the close command is set 2 Setting the paired open and close command without omission In other word the close command sends out at the end of program Open command is not applied and the close command can not be set correspondingly 3 The data output command in program is stopped using reset operation and the following data is erased Correspondingly if the resetting treatment is set with M30 or the other similar commands at the end of data output program The close command is applied at the end of this program it is 190 Chapter 2 Programming necessary to wait a moment before staring M30 or the other resetting treatment till all data are output 4 This function needs to select macro program B and I O interface 2 11 Tool Lifetime Management
228. er macro program interruption program M99 may be used to clear this state When M99 command is performed individually it is performed before the end of the execution of the foregoing programs Therefore user program interruption is also active for the last command of interruption program If it is not applicable user program interruption may be controlled with M96 M97 The single block of M99 which only includes address O N P L and M the block is considered as the same block as the previous one of the program Thus even a single block does not stop 367 OGSA I WIE GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual Gxx Xxxxx M99 It is actually identical with Gxx Xxxxx M99 They vary in whether G code is executed or not before M99 071000 MS6P 1234 4 Interruption _ 01234 Interruption GxxXxxx o Ld i ee a M96P5678 M99 g Interruption GxexXxxx M96 mgg Interruption F Fig 3 6 Return from user macro program Overlapping of user macro program interruption is not allowed during its execution That is other interruptions are automatically shielded in case of interruption If M99 is executed user macro program interruption will be active again Here M99 is executed as a single block before the end of the previous block In above example the interruption in the Gxx block of program 01234 is also active and 01234 is executed again after interruption signal reinput However 05678 is under the
229. esponding to prg no 9018 0332 UMGCD9 corresponding to prg no 9019 UMGCDO 1 2 3 9 G code calling user macro program at most set 10 of them setting range 001 255 Can t call user macro program by G00 even 00 is set Parameter No 0336 PECZER sigjawelied G xipueddy Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual PECZRZ PECZRX Z pitch error origins of X axis and Z axis setting range 0 127 According to this parameter set given point corresponding to reference point Eg pitch error origin is set to 0 given point 1 is in 8 000mm and given point 127 is in 1016 000mm so the compensation range is 0 1016 000mm O pitch error origin O machine origin 8 000mm 16 000mm 1016 000 1st compensation value is set to system parameter No 1001 X axis or No 2001 Z axis 2nd compensation value is set to system parameter No 1002 X axis or No 2002 Z axis 3rd compensation value is set to system parameter No 1003 X axis or No 2003 Z axis This example shows situation when pitch error compensation interval parameter379 380 is 8000 Parameter Description IDVICE Program being saved into the memory set the input device selection when in set interface INPUT DEVICE2 1 it means the setting is valid standard setting value 2 setting value is 2 RS232C baudrate etc should be set in parameter No 311 setting value is 3 RS232C baudrate etc should be set in parameter No 312 No 0341 ODVICE Desc
230. essessssssesssssssssessssssssrsssssssressssssree 286 APPENDIX 2 CISTOF GCOCODE Shrressin inie e a tensions 288 APPENDIX 3 LIST OF THE RANGE OF COMMANDED VALUES 290 APPENDIX 4 THE CALCULATED DIAGRAM wissssiiavccccsssvscctsdevecosetiotacdecievcetdlosiantnxessduie 293 ARE NDIA PARAMETERS sepenan E E a 297 ARRE NDIO ARARE S T eee T E A T E 345 APPENDIX 7 STATE LIST OF POWER ON RESET amp CLEARING 00 ee 351 APPENDIX 8 STORAGE TYPE PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION FUNCTION 353 APPENDIX OP EIA ION LIST esr E E TE E 358 APPENDIX 10 PROGRAM LOGK comisie ROE ET 361 APPENDIX 11 INTERRUPTION FUNCTION OF USER MACRO PROGRAM 363 APPENDIX 12 USB INTERFACE TRANSMISSION essessesssssssesssssssessssssersssssssressssssree 375 APPENDIX13 C232 SERIAL PORT TRANSMISSION 0 o i cccccccceessssseeeeeeenaes 378 APPENDIX14 SYSTEM CLOCK SETTING AND PLC PROGRAMMING 383 Contents XI Chapter 1 Summary Chapter 1 Summary 1 1 Summary GSK983Ta Turning CNC System hereafter referred to as CNC System It is a new CNC controller developed by GSK CNC Equipment Co LTD based on market and user s requirements Characterized with high accuracy high capability fixed software two axes linkage close loop semi close loop or close loop embedded PLC function it is widely applied to CNC Lathe CNC wire cutting machine tool and CNC Cylindrical grinding machine tool etc GSK983Ta Turning CNC system is employed with high speed MPU in co
231. et iii 9999999mm 9 999999inch 99 99999mm ers The spindle max 5000r min 5000r min 5000r min 5000r min revolution number Omm The coordinate value of the 2 reference position value off the reference position OFR 999 999mm 99 9999inch 999 999mm 99 9999inch incremental 0 001mm 0 0001inch 0 001mm 0 0001inch feeding Backlash amount nn The storable or the stroke limit range 99999 9mm 99999 999mm_ 79997 0078 9999 9999inch distance off the inch reference position 0 S Sa 0 S os Dwell Oms Oms Oms Oms P Seooaccems ogaggggome sbeasecoms __ se99eeeoms _ CISO Program number 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 O EIA 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 Preparatory Omm Omm Oinen I 99999 999mm 799999 99mMm 3937 0078inch G9G9 g999inch G 0 99 0 99 0 99 0 99 function Spindle function 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 0 9999 Tool function 0 9932 0 9932 0 9932 0 9932 Miscellaneous l M 0 99 0 99 0 99 0 99 function Specified 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 sequence number Repeated times 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 Specified value o Para meters gt O D Q x OO Ep O r O F r D A S vo D O F r gt D O O 3 D Q D Q S D on Same coordinate word t Times D 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 1 9999 291 Appendix 4 The Calculated Diagram Appendix 4 The Calculated Diagram D4 1 Incorrect Thread Length The incorrect parts 61 and 6
232. eter corresponding to parameter N053 N054 TSE Edge triggered interruption Note State triggered means interruption signal is valid in input state edge triggered means interruption signal is valid when it is front edge No 309 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual o OL Now Tor OR Description pT settot E The MPG each scale amount is The MPG each scale amount is changed 0 01mm 0 001inch influenced with MP1 MP2 signals MP1 MP2 MPG by no MP1 MP2 and NGMP override signal signals Move amount for MPG a scale NGMP MP2 MP1 l l nh Co f o o l oo i oo A a a 1 1 0 1 0 01 an o e o o a a a Have no servo alarm issued Servo alarm is issued when VRDY is ON even VRDY is ON before before PRDY output PRDY output Auto run with no regard to Machine lock signal is active immediately machine lock signal Note In MANUAL machine lock is always active immediately Parameter No 0027 CMRX 0028 CMRZ Description sigjawelied G xipueddy 310 Appendix 5 Parameters Command overrides of X axis Z axis respectively 1 When ACMR 0 standard in parameter No 0316 to set the value please refer to Parameter No 014 and No 015 Cod a Override setting Note when the setting code is beyond the form and the override is 1 and then the parameter is set by decimal system The standard code setting is 2 for pulse encoder 2 When ACMR 1 any override in parameter 0316
233. eviously Il Tool nose radius compensation offset number is not 00 II The movement of X Z U or W is performed in block and the movement distance is not 0 An arc command G02 G03 can not be employed in start mode if it is specified and the No 34 alarm will be generated Two blocks are read in start mode the 1 block is performed the 2 block enters tool nose radius compensation buffer This data does not display Two blocks are read in single block mode the machine stops when the 1 block is executed In the following operation two blocks are read beforehand a block or the next 2 blocks followed is performing in NC Notice The Inner side and Outer side explanations are as follows The intersection of two movement command blocks form an angle which is more than 180 viewing from workpiece side and this is called inner side when it is less than 180 it is called outer side 82 Chapter 2 Programming Workpiece T Inner side Program 180 a 2 Outer side Program k gt Workpiece 0 a 180 of Ca tool movement in inner side 180 sa Linear linear Programmed path Offset value eee Tool nose center path S Land C have the following meanings S is single block stop point L is linear interpolation movement C is arc interpolation movement R is tool nose radius compensation value II Linear arc Programmed path
234. f upright to the previous block is formed relative to movement direction when the tool nose radius compensation G G41 G42 is specified in offset mode which is not related to inner outer side machining If this code is included in the arc command and then the arc movement can not be correctly applied When the offset direction is changed by the tool nose radius compensation G code G41 G42 Section 2 6 3 5 is referred Linear to linear G42 mode a _ Sis stop point in I a single operation Arc to linear 94 Chapter 2 Programming 7 Temporarily cancelling offset If the following commands are specified in offset mode the offset is temporarily erased and then the system is automatically restored to offset mode See Section 2 6 4 2 for offset cancel and star a G28 returns to reference position automatically If the G28 is specified in offset mode and the offset in the intermediate point will be erased the offset mode will then automatically restored after the reference position return is done QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo Reference point S point stops in single block operation b G29 automatically returns from reference position If the G28 is specified in offset mode and the offset in the intermediate point will be cancelled the next block will restore the offset automatically 1 When G29 is immediately specified after G28 cog Intermediate point G42
235. face i Check whether the tool hits the workpiece when the tool is moved to the machining restarting position If it hits move the tool into the position to avoid hitting j Check whether the distance is suitable in the remaining distance k Return to the Auto mode press the cycle start button Then the tool moves to the position of 266 Chapter 4 Operation restarting machining in manual feedrate based on the sequence of Z and X axes Note 1 In the following conditions P the program restarting is not executed The automatic operation is not executed after power on II The automatic operation is not executed after the emergency stop is released or the stroke limit alarm in the stored type is not performed CII The automatic operation is not executed after setting changing or moving the coordinate system P S 97 alarm occurs caused by the above conditions I CII or resetting after 94 96 or 97 alarm Setting the coordinate system results in P S 94 alarm Moving the coordinate system results in P S 96 alarm The block of restarting machining is one of many blocks it is after the block of which the last set or changed coordinate system before the machining interruption Note 2 In P and Q modes when the tools are respectively moved to the machining restart position in single axis each time When the 1 axis movement is completed the single block stop is possible while MDI operation can t be inserted but manua
236. face speed control is enabled while surface thread or taper thread is cutting since the spindle speed has changed the incorrect thread may be occurred Therefore the constant surface speed control can not be employed during thread cutting Note 12 Chamfering and corner R is not specified in the move block previous the thread cutting block Note 13 Chamfering or corner R can not be specified in a thread cutting block Note 14 Spindle speed modification is enabled in thread cutting mode so correct thread cutting can not be performed due to the servo system is delayed The parameter 9 2 SOVC can be changed to make the spindle modification speed disabled in thread cutting Note 15 As for the G32 the thread cutting dwell is disabled 42 Chapter 2 Programming When serial thread cutting selection is applied it is possible that serial block cutting is performed and the correct thread part still retains during the block 2 5 7 2 Variable Thread Lead Cutting G34 Function Thread lead for each revolution is specified to added or reduced to perform the variable thread lead cutting Variable thread lead K is specified the increase value or decrease value of each thread in the following commands F Format G34X U Z W K An address other than K is the game as the straight taper thread cutting in G32 K values range can be employed Input in metric 0 0001 mm r 100 0000mm r Input in inch 0
237. feed button as long as the reference position return isn t executed Because the stroke limit in the memory type does not function before the manual reference position return it can prevent the movement is executed along the axial direction at rapid rate to reach the stroke end position 4 3 4 2 MPG The machine movement and the feedrate can be accurately adjusted through MPG 1 Select MPG 2 Select the movement amount 209 SA pak E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual X1 means the movement amount times 1 X10 means the movement amount times 10 X100 means the movement amount times 100 Movement amount each grid Metric input 0 001mm Inch input 0 0001 inch 0 001inch i 3 Select the movement axis Press X or Z axis movement key positive or negative is OK 4 The hand wheel for rotating the MPG CW rotation direction CCW rotation direction The directions are different based on the specification of the machine manufacturer Note 1 If MPG is rotated at the speed more than 5 rev sec the differential value occurs between the MPG revolving amount and the machine movement distance so the MPG rotation speed should not be too fast Note 2 When the machine is with the MPG the incremental feeding function is not used Note 3 When x100 override is selected the rapid revolving MPG makes the tools of the machine or the worktable is moved based on the speed of rapid movement Then th
238. ference point signal for linear scale from the pulse encoder is not RE oe co entered during its returning in grid mode Reference return can t be normally performed due to the asynchronization between one turn signal the basic point signal in linear scale feedback from the pulse encoder and the reference counter for too low speed during its returning in grid mode 092 P type command cannot be specified for program restart the coordinate 094 system setting and origin setting operations etc are done after the program interruption 091 P type cannot be specified for the program restart workpiece coordinate system offset changed by program interruption P type cannot be specified for the program restart auto running is not 097 executed after power on the releasing of emergency stop and overtravel alarm instant stop G28 is found in searching without reference point return by program restart 098 command after power on or the releasing of emergency stop and overtravel alarm instant stop Move is commanded in MDI mode after the program restart check 34 J gt 5 D 5 2 x op gt e 3 D r gt O O 4 Q x lt OD gt Q x 3 ep r Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Parameter write switch is ON RESET key is pressed after this switch is set for OFF 1 In the part program editing and storing for memory writing the powe
239. fering data When G02 and GO3 are applied they are regarded as coordinate values of arc center Tool nose radius B compensation Chamfering G40 G02 X Z I K Arc interpolation The workpiece position specified by address and K is the same that of the previous block If address and K are specified in G40 cancellation mode they are omitted G40 G01 X_Z G40 GOO X zZ I K offset cancellation mode disabled GOO X Z K Address and K are regarded as chamfering data when the G40 is not specified alarm occurs because of the incorrect format when the block is executed and K are specified with radius value 75 QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 7 For example K i lt 4 i pN U Na z i eae 3 O c B D 4 a O 12 ODiameter gt 20 0Diameter 6 ODiameter 4 No IA y T Q 3 i 3 0 Unit mm Diameter programs in G40 mode G42 G00 X6 0 G01 X12 0 W 15 0F10 G40 G00 X30 0 W15 0 14 0 K 3 0 2 6 3 5 Precaution for Tool Nose Radius Compensation 1 Tool movement when two or more blocks without movement commands are continually programmed The block without movement commands M05 M code output S21 S code output 8 G04 X1000 Dwell 4 G01 UO Feed distance 0 6 G98 G code only G22 X10000 Machine area setting G10 P01 X100 Z2
240. figure If a program describes the finishing path from A A B the machine tool will turn away the specified part according to the cutting depth Ad the rest of part of finishing is Au 2 and Aw Command path Ve ne U 2 R rapid traverse F feedrate Retraction amount e is set by parameter 67 MRCDT or parameter 67 in page It is parallel to the Z axis to cut with Ad depth at the beginning and then it is parallel to the programmed path cutting This command describes as follows G71P ns Q nf U Au W Aw D Ad F Af S Cs T CD N ns F he movement command from A A B is specified from sequence number ns to nf in the block O _ T N nf P The first sequence number of the program of path A B ns Q The last sequence number of the program of path A B nf U Diameter programming is performed along with the distance of X axis remainder and direction W Distance and direction along with Z axis remainder D Tool feed value Ad is not described for the sign Tool feeds according to the direction of A A F S T All the functions of F S T included in the canned cycle program ns to nf are ignored when the G71 is performed But it is effective when G70 executes All the F S T function specified in G71 block or before G71 block are enabled If the surface 124 Chapter 2 Programming constant speed control function is selected the command G96 or G97 between ns and nf is disabled
241. figure the standard point is on the top of the standard tool if the distance of the standard point position from the workpiece origin is X 120 0 diameter value Z 70 0 but the actual 252 Chapter 4 Operation one is X 121 0 diameter value Z 69 0 the workpiece coordinate offset amount is input X 1 0 Z 1 0 Then the expected coordinate system can be obtained Setting the actual offset amount uses the method of the workpiece coordinate system offset direct input in 5 12 5 which is very simple Note 1 The workpiece coordinate offset becomes valid immediately after setting the offset amount Note 2 After setting the workpiece coordinate offset amount the coordinate system is set by G50 the workpiece coordinate offset amount doesn t function Example G50 X 100 0 Z 80 0 has been set no matter how much the offset amount is the present tool standard position X 100 0 Z 80 0 is set as a new one Note 3 After setting the workpiece coordinate offset amount the manual reference position return is executed if there is the function of the automatic coordinate setting it functions and the set coordinate system is offseted immediately Note 4 The offset amount of X axis is the diameter value or the radius one is specified by the diameter or the radius of the part program 4 4 12 5 Direct Input the Measured Value of the Workpiece Coordinate System As the following figure shows the coordinate system can be offseted with the direc
242. g information adopts user macro program DO to output modal information and position information An interruption program may execute in parallel with the original block However the machining will stop for a while at the end of the original block and before the end of the interruption program K11 7 4 Using the same program for general cutting and special cutting lt Specifications gt Each executive block is provided with special move But this command is not used in general program lt Parameter setting gt TSE 1 State triggering mode MUSR 1 Enable user macro program interruption function MSUB Subprogram macro program type user macro program interruption MPRM Setting of the M codes for the control of user macro program interruption MINT 1 Interruption program is executed after the end of block lt Explanations gt The interruption program shall be commanded as follows Oxxxx M97 __ Disable interruption M96 aw ___ Enable interruption M99 Therefore user macro program interruption is executed at the end of each block in the original program The special action to be performed is commanded beforehand in an interruption program The program part that needs no user macro program interruption is disabled using M97 373 CGSRI WE GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual 374 Appendix 12 USB Interface Transmission Appendix 12 USB interface transmission L12 1 General Parameters of NC and
243. g the offset direction the inner side and outer side concepts cannot be considered The following explanations show the case when G41 or G42 are employed to change the offset direction When it is changed by the offset value sign see Section 2 6 3 2 3 Supposing the offset value sign is positive in the following illustration 1 Linear to linear Programmed path Tool nose center path Il Linear to arc Programmed path 92 Chapter 2 Programming III Arc to linear Tool nose center path Programmed path IV Arc to arc G42 Tool nose center path O gt D r D me N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 vo V Tool movement when an offset is normally performed without intersection When offset direction is changed with G41 and G42 from block A to B if the intersection with offset path is not required then the corresponding vector will be generated at the starting point of block B Linear linear Tool nose center path Offset vector Programmed path cyo G41 Linear to arc 93 O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Tool nose Center path Programmed path Arc to arc 642 Ct Arc without an end Programmed path _ een a Tool nose center path Center 6 Tool nose radius compensation G code in offset mode A vector o
244. gnal on the machine side can be controlled by two digits after p M2 digits address M 2 One block can only be commanded one M code rj During rapid feeding the linear acceleration deceleration in Jog or Auto mode o acceleration deceleration is adopted to save the positioning time O External power supply Except for power supply ON OFF button on NC device the contact signal from a ON OFF the machine operation panel out of NC device can also cut off the power ra supply i immediately stops NC resetting can be operated out of NC device All feeding commands stop through resetting The machine decelerates and stops Feed hold The feeding of all axes temporarily stops restarting can be operated by the a cycle start key and the manual operation can be executed before refeeding Servo ready signal After the servo system is ready the signal is sent from the machine side The brake axis is locked without sending the signal NO READY is displayed on LCD without the signal NC ready signal When NC power supply is connected and controllable the signal is sent into the machine side 5 When the power supply is cut off and the control unit is too hot stop sending the signal to the machine side 198 Chapter 3 CNC Specification and Configuration Function NC alarm signal The signal is sent when NC is in the alarm state NO OO Distribution completed When the movement command is executed completely CNC sends the signal signal If M S T a
245. gramming X Z 0 Workpiece coordinate system for actual setting 51 O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Origin for programming 1 Manually cutting workpiece is performed along side A with reference tool 2 After INPUT button is pressed on machine operator panel tool retracts and spindle rotation stops 3 In exterior page input offset number N100 then input Zi to store the measure distance in above figure into offset memory O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 4 Manually cut workpiece along side B 5 Tool retracts and spindle rotation stops after the button is pressed when the X axis does not move 6 In contour page input offset number N100 then input x to store the measure distanceainto offset memory From 0 to 0 the movement value is automatically set into the offset memory of which the offset number is 00 and the workpiece is immediately moved If the offset value of reference tool is 0 When the reference tool nose is at the origin the tool nose coordinate value in workpeice system X 0 0 Z 0 0 is set Base point X72 i mp However the tool offset function is effective if tool offset value is set according to the above figure As for the movement of workpiece coordinate system the measure value input is directly employed The base point workpiece coordinate
246. h Changeable thread lead Based on the added or subtracted value of the thread lead per revolution the Dwell during the thread When the thread cutting is executed by G92 or G96 the tool retracts immediately and returns to the start position if the system is in feed hold state 202 Chapter 3 CNC Specification and Configuration Function The consecutive thread cutting blocks can be specified by G32 G34 and the Consecutive thread pulse distribution interruption time is between blocks To make the interruption N N N gt N o gt cutting time 0 the cutting depth is changed continuously and the thread cutting is executed in one point repeatedly and the cutting won t damage the thread teeth During the automatic operation when the tool has slight feeding or retraction Manual insert function rotate the manual pulse generator during machining the tool moves the N N corresponding distance based on the pulse number generated by MPG In Auto mode add up with the commanded pulse however the workpiece coordinate system has been moved the corresponding pulse distance 73 Display the running time Each unit s min h or 0 1 h can be displayed and reset Automatic acceleration During the cutting feed or the manual continuous feeding the time constant of N gt deceleration during the automatic acceleration deceleration function with the index type is set by cutting feed the parameter from 8ms 4000ms
247. h ON Add OFF Not add The cutting feedrate can be fixed in 100 through the signal from the machine side Manual continuous feed 1 JOG feeding JOG feedrate can be switched in 24 levels with the rotary switch the ratio is in 24 equal levels And the standard panel is divided into 20 levels 2 Manual rapid feeding The rapid feeding can be operated in Jog mode the rapid feedrate is set by parameters Incremental feed The following incremental feeding amount can be positioned so the manual position can be executed in high efficiency Incremental feeding amount 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100mm Input in metric system 0 0001 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10inch Input in inch system Reference position The reference position return A has the following contents return A 1 Manual reference position return 2 Reference position return check G27 3 Automatic reference position return G28 4 Return from the reference position G29 Reference position The reference position return B not only has the function of the reference return B position return A but also has the 2 reference position return G30 200 Chapter 3 CNC Specification and Configuration Function Stored stroke limit 1 The stored stroke limit 1 is set by the parameter to divide the area outside which forbids the machine movement Stored stroke limit 2 3 1 The stored stroke limit 2 G22 G23 The area inside is the forbidden one which is set by the p
248. h on the power At power ON To clear parameters At power ON PARAMETER and DELETE keys to switch on the power Concurrently press the RESET and DELETE keys or PROGRAM and DELETE keys to switch on the power To clear programs At power ON gt Concurrently press the CANCEL and DELETE keys or To input ON Parameter No INPUT P gt data parameters PARAMETER INPUT parameter write switch OFF RESET A N gt offset No INPUT gt gt offset data gt MDI input TO input offset OFF E k OFFSET Caia Enum Move the cursor to the item to be altered data To input data MDI SETTING INPUT a APPENDIX 9 Operation List 1 pi ram number cursor Program Edit PROGRAM e 9 CUSO b gt Cursor number search Auto PROGRAM oT number cursor ICANCEL cursor Sequence Search des Auto PROGRAM Program number search N sequence number gt Edit Cursor search word search search pf ei PROGRAM Input the address or data to be searched 1 cursor Address Sa PROGRAM Input the address to be searched lj cursor Classification protection i Operating procedures switch pares eF T men o IIE Ca Program To delete one Edit PROGRAM a program number DELETE delet Search the block to be deleted H Edit PROGRAM ar atacand ns m DELETE delete oe Edit PR
249. hange after auto drift compensation parameter set ADFT of No 006 Note When the compensation is over 500 No 412 or No 422 alarm will occur Parameter No 0132 LOWSP Description siajawelied G xipueddy LOWSP Spindle min speed G96 in constant surface speed control only valid when the fifth bit of No 307 parameter SLOW 1 setting range 0 9999 unit rom Parameter No 0133 ACALFL Description 328 Appendix 5 Parameters ACALFL Measure speed with auto tool compensation function apply to all axes setting range 6 15000mm min 6 6000inch min Parameter ea Description GRMX1 GRMX4 The max number of spindle revolutions corresponding to gear 1 4 S code is 4095 in binary output revolution number when 10V in S4 analog output only valid with peripheral speed constant arbitrary control function setting range 1 32767 unit RPM 1 For gear 1 4 the min spindle revolution number are the same Parameter No 307 fifth bit SLOW 1 LO spindle motor speed 4095 spindle speed oy 0 E 22 123 parameter Mhn spindle speed parameter Max spindle speed 2 when to gear 1 4 the min spindle revolution number are not the same Parameter No 307 fifth bit SLOW 0 sigjaweled G xipueddy Spindle motor speed 4095 spindle speed 123 parameter No 343 344 345 346 par par par par 329 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Parameter No 0134 SPDMX SPDMX Spindle max speed limi
250. has occurs press ALARM to find the alarm content and it is twinkling EDIT It means the executing is being performed or is to be edited Select the different switch based on the different modes there is AUTO automatic MDI manual data input HNDL hand wheel JOG Jog mode and machine zero return not displayed SRCH It means the present program number is being searched and it is twinkling RESTR It means the period from the program restarting to the last axis return and it is twinkling 5 Q O r K O O x Q a 5 234 Chapter 4 Operation 4 4 2 Key Input Display The content input by the address and the numerical keys are displayed in the left lower corner of the screen A E mE im r T D m RAR m Se ON O gt A D LSK BUF EDIT 14 31 16 iN COMND RESTR MDI Q D The data input can t be executed in position or alarm screen Si Except for the program editing one word composed of one address and the digits can be input BS CANCEL Press can clear one input word During the program editing it is not limited in one word but in 32 words CANCEL The input last word can be cleared by once and the input words can be cleared one by CANCEL one from the behind by continuously pressing 255 gt Q O r K O O 5 Q a 5 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 4 4 3 Display the Program Number and the Sequence Number
251. he VRDY signal has not been set for ON before PRDY signal does 405 ara seno ayer Use manaleeetce rs oo and servo system Use manual reference return 408 eae ana anos singe sam a14 424 ae ao gnen egoon oo feedback and axes single alarm 414 424 are also given together 410 The position offset at the stop of X axis exceeds the setting J The position offset in the moving of X axis exceeds the setting i X axis offsets excessively above 500VELO a The position offset of X axis exceeds 32767 or the speed command value of DA converter goes beyond the range from 8191 to 8192 The alarm is usually a result of incorrect settings 44 musmato o r O S e S inductosyn scale of X axis 9 eterearen GMR seana is the result of incorrect CMR setting The position detection device for the pulse encoder of X axis is out of order AN 417 The servo postion loop tSt Xaxsismcoret cus Position offset exceeds the setting when Z axis ane 421 Position offset exceeds the setting when Zaxismoves 422 Zaxis drifts excessively more than S0OVELO The position offset of Z axis exceeds 32767 or the speed command value of DA converter goes beyond the range from 8191 to 8192 The alarm is usually a result of incorrect settings 2 pgutoom sca att oo S S Oa o R inductosyn scale of Z axis emeresutormeonea MR senna o S is the result of incorrect CMR setting 2 deacons disconnection alarm 427 mre servo postion loop LSlof
252. he coordinate system moves III The automatic coordinate system is set after the reference position return IV The coordinate system zero clear is operated Ca After power on or the emergency stop is released or the stroke limit alarm is released the reference position return is operated before the machine is restarted b The tool is moved to the program machining start position in Jog mode and set the modal data and the coordinate system same with those of states of the machine restarting c Set or change the offset amount if it s required o Cd Set the machine operation panel slat as ON PROGRAM Ce Press to display the program Search the program if it s not the required one t f The program is returned to the start position in Auto mode press t 1 g Q sequence number press and the interface is switched into the program restarting one Search the restarting block of the sequence number During searching when the same sequence number occurs for many times it s stipulated that the ahead four digits are the times which the searched sequence number occurs in the block and the last four digits are the sequence number 4 Qi1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 sess patton LF times sequence number When the time is 1 the ahead four digits are omitted and the leading zero of the other sequence numbers can be omitted except for the specified times h After searching ends LCD screen displays the program restarting inter
253. he forbidden area Note 2 pressing the ESP button Tool is moved from the forbidden area by the G23 mode If the setting is wrong correcting it and the reference point return performs Note 4 An axis without reference point return function does not forbidden area so forbidden area alarm on this axis is inexistent The whole area becomes forbidden area when any axis does not have reference point return function so note that when specified with No 020 parameter Note 5 As for the setting of forbidden area if two setting points are same the forbidden area has the following definitions The 1 limit No definition for forbidden area The 2 limit The whole area is forbidden area The 3 limit The whole area is forbidden area when inner area is specified There is no forbidden area when the outer area is set Note 6 The set beyond the machine stroke is invalid for protection Note 7 Tool can be moved reversely when tool enters forbidden area and the alarm is generated Note 8 When the area is set even if the dimensions of the coordinate value of two points are specified wrongly the rectangle formed by these two points will be established this area Note 9 G22 and G23 should be set in different block Note 10 The movement axis stops after entering forbidden area the max movement value 8ms stops Note 11 The 2 limit is set by parameter the 3 limit boundary can be set by parameter or in MDI mode Note 12 The too
254. he key of cycle start again and again in single block mode 2 Application 117 2 Q O m D NO U Q 3 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual The application of thread chamfering avoids opening a clearance groove in the end of thread which the diameter is less than the bottom diameter In this case the strength of screw will be strengthened and it is very benefit for the screw need to be hermetic Groove opened Turing to diagonal in the end of tool retracting a Without chamfering a Chamfering Note 1 The precautions are relative to the thread cutting same as G32 The feedhold is supplied to achieve the dwell during the 2 operation and the tool will stop after completing the 3 path at the rapid traverse rate Note 2 When the dwell is applied in thread cutting the tool will be retracted with diagonal as long as entering feedhold state in the ane step in thread cutting and it returns to the start point along the X and Z axes separately Stop position O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Normal circumstance ____Feedhold Place with feedhold The others feedhold are invalid during retracting 3 Taper thread cutting command F G92X U Z W Il1 E 118 Chapter 2 Programming R Rapid operation selection L Thread lead Because the servo system delays the retraction tool angle i
255. he roughing is performed with G71 G72 and G73 up to 3 programs determined by address P and Q can be stored So when G70 executes search is not needed The block determined by address P and Q can be rapidly found out After several roughing G71 G72 and G73 are finished and several fine machining cycle can be performed together In this case the finishing as for the 4 cycle and its followed will be delayed to execute because the memory searches G71 P100 Q200 G70P100Q200 t The finish machining can be performed for each time and the search is not performed when it is not more than 3 cycles G70P300Q400 The search is performed when it is more than 4 cycles Note 4 Tool returns to the start point at the rapid traverse rate when G70 command is completed The NC data followed by G70 command in the block is read into Note 5 For composite canned value cycle G70 G73 the subprogram can not be called in the block of sequence numbers are from ns to nf Note 6 The memory address is stored with G71 G72 and G73 during rough lathe cycle Cancel is performed after the completion of G70 The memory address stored can be erased by resetting operations Example 7 2 1 Composite cycle programming G70 G71 131 QO gt D r D N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo O 2 Q O m D s N U Q 3 2 Or l CES I 132 GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual x Starting point p
256. hen input output device 1 2 3 4 is used control code DO1 DO4 is used or 1 2 3 4 not respectively e ee reese STP2 When input output device 1 2 3 4 is used set 2 bit or 1 bit stop respectively Set the baud rate of input output device 1 2 3 4 respectively 1 2 3 4 334 Appendix 5 Parameters Baud rate BAD1 2 3 4 Note with ROBOT interface select baud rate of data transmitting between NC and ROBOT is set BAD4 Note see to parameters 340 and 341 oo Set to 1 Set to 0 Begin to execute interruption Execute interruption program program after current block immediately user macro program executed user macro program interruption interruption II Set hand wheel interruptions of X axis and Z axis respectively 2 Ea ll ll ll Description ES E Output nothing to leading zero Output blank space to leading zero when when DPRNT instruction is DPRNT instruction is used to output data used to output data DPRNT outside data output instruction S analog voltage output is S analog voltage output is changed by changed by 8ms time interval 64ms time interval old specification new specification No ee eee ee ee eee ee ee Description ae Set to 1 Set to 0 gt O D Q x oO U A S D r D T 335 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual CDSCG No frequency detection of DSCG Do detection this parameter is always feedback resolver and set to 0 after initi
257. in inch output Parameter No 0107 THDFL Description THDFL Lower limit of X axis index acceleration and deceleration FL in thread cutting sigjawelied G xipueddy 324 Appendix 5 Parameters setting range 6 15000 unit mm min metric output 6 6000 unit 0 1inch min inch output When this parameter is large enough the retraction of the thread can be small and in thread chamfering tool retraction time can be shorten However if the value is too large mechanical shock may occurs So please choose proper value according to the machine situation standard setting 2000mm min refer to parameter No 104 1 In thread chamfering X axis rapid rate THRDT THDEL PRMII04 PRMIOF 2 perform thread chamfering Time constant THRDT PRAI104 X axis rapid feed X axis cut feed Chamferme THOFL PEM107 confirm after parameter setting After the parameter setting in cutting thread operation G92 mode dry run at max feedrate in thread cutting and confirm the following items in thread chamfering non chamfering situations respectively 1 Detect the wave of X axis TSA in thread chamfering and make sure that overshooting is within 5 2 Ensure that the shock to machine is not huge Parameter No 0108 FEDFL Description gt O D Q x oO U o S D aa D a T Lower limit of index acceleration and deceleration in cutting feedrate FL setting range 6 15000 unit mm min metric
258. in the offset inputting by G10 or user macro C aeons The intersectional point can t be got by tool nose R compensation C Or tool nose compensation B specified less than 90 intersection point compute gt 5 D 2 x O gt e 3 D r 033 Modify the program or set the 4 and 3 bits of the parameter No 1 to 0 and 1 respectively 034 Compensation start or cancellation is made in G02 G03 in tool nose R compensation Modify the program Skipping cutting G31 is commanded in tool nose R compensation En 038 Overcutting occurs due to the arc start or end point coincides with the center in tool nose R compensation 345 Js Wey 9 xIpueddy Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 039 Overcutting occurs due to the chamfering round corner R at start cancellation or G41 G42 switching in tool nose R compensation 040 Overcutting occurs in tool nose R compensation G27 to G30 are commanded for an axis without reference point return Modify the program or set the 6 and 7 bits of parameter No 0 to 1 the O 3rd bits of the parameter No 20 to 1 1 G30 is commanded without returning to reference point after power on or emergency stop 2 When a storage type travel limit option is provided a move is executed without returning to reference point after power on or emergency stop 050 Chamfering and corner R are specified in a thread cutting block No G01 command in next block af
259. inch gt lt gt O D Q x On U A S D r D T N X N 0 2 inch x Parameter No Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual LPGIN Position control loop gain setting range 1 9999 unit 0 01 sec JOGF JOGF JOG feedrate of the override switch lying 100 spot setting range 1 150 unit mm min deg min mm output 1 60 unit O 1inch min 0 1deg min inch output or 1deg min inch output standard setting 20 roost JOGF JOGF JOG feedrate of the override switch lying 10 spot Setting range 1 150 unit mm min metric output 1 60 unit 0 1inch min inch output Eg Set 20mm min to Parameter No 91 Manual consecutive feed Feedrate override gt O D Q x On U o S D rr D T 322 Appendix 5 Parameters 21 200 720 14 23 200 1400 30 24 200 2000 40 Note1 the federate take 100 feedrate as the base and change in geometric series And other feedrates can be got by setting 100 federate through parameter Note2 in sheet above the speed error is 3 Parameter No 0092 RPDFX 0093 RPDFZ Description RPDFX Rapid traverse rate of X axis and Z axis respectively RPDFZ Setting range 30 24000 unit mm min metric output 30 9600 unit 0 1inch min inch output Parameter No 0096 LINTX 0097 LINTZ Description LINTX Time constant of linear acceleration and deceleration for rapid of X axis LINTZ and Z axis resp
260. including the tool offset Note 2 Tool nose compensation specified by G50 is temporarily erased Note 3 if G50 is followed by 01 group modal command execute the G50 and change the current modal of 01 group to be command modal Example G50G00X20 Z30 execute G50 coordinate setting and change the current modal of 01 group to be GOO 2 5 10 2 Coordinate System Movement Workpiece coordinate system can be moved using the following commands G50 U u W w When the old coordinate value is X and Z axes and the tool nose coordinate value is X U and Z W in new coordinate system When programming by diameter the values of X and U are diameter X axis tool B tool A P 7 4 a 1 02 3 056 Z axis The workpiece coordinate system with same zero points can be set by the following G50 command when the tool B is replaced of A in the above figure G50 U2 04 W3 056 Diameter programming 2 5 10 3 Automatic Coordinate System Setting If the automatic coordinate system setting is valid with parameter whether the automatic coordinate system setting is valid is set by parameters 309 APX and APZ And the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set after manual reference point returns In this case coordinate values a and B should be set by No 375 and No 376 parameter beforehand If above parameters are set beforehand when manual reference point return is completed coordinate values a and in the coordinat
261. ing is as follows 7 Command input from MDI In this case the tool nose radius compensation does not executed 8 When the arc inside machining is less than the tool nose radius compensation of tool nose radius In this case tool overcut may occur when it is in outer offset Tool will stop to display the alarm No 41 or after the corner moves to end after the previous block begins If the signal block switch is ON the tool will stop at the end of previous block The No 041 alarm occurs Tool nose center path Pali Stop point The stop point when signal block switch is tuned on jl ny If the tool does not stops Tool nose center path Programmed path MA KN z i Corner arc is less YY than tool nose radius Overcut 80 Chapter 2 Programming 9 The machined slot is less than the tool nose diameter When tool nose radius compensation forms tool nose center movement path the reverse of program direction the overcut is then generated Here after the previous block begins or after the corner movement is applied the alarm No 041 occurs and movement stops Stop point Tool nose center path Programmed Tool nose center path Negative move to programmed path Overcut 10 Machined line is less than tool nose radius When a program of some line is less than tool nose radius when the line is employed the arc QO gt D r D me N U FR O Ca R S gt 3
262. ing point is taken as the end point of current block and then the overcutting will be generated in the vertical direction of tool movement 98 Chapter 2 Programming Ne U200 W100 N7 52l N8 G04 U100 N9 W1000 Here N7 N8 are performed SSS is depicted that the tool stops for 3 times when single block operates b When offset cancel command is specified When the block without tool movement is gather together with offset cancel command A vector in the vertical direction of the previous block tool movement is generated its length is equal to the offset value and this vector is cancelled in next command O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo N6 U1000 W 1000 a N7 G40 x N8 UO W1000 10 Blocks with G40 and I K E a b tool moves to here in G40 block Tool center moves to X axis in G42 block i Programmed path G42 G42 mode o4ox 721 In this case note that the NC gains an intersection regardless of the inner side or outer side machining 99 O 2 Q O r D N U Q 3 mD Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual oe n C42 AL K When an intersection can not be gained the tool moves to the normal of previous block at the end point of the previous block Tool nose center path Programmed path 11 Corner movement When two or more vectors in the end of a block are generated tool ve
263. ing the incremental 1 and 2 N1 1 1 2345 N2 2 2 3456 N3 G01 X 1 F100 X move to 1 2345 N4 X 2 X moves to 2 3456 N5 X 11 2 1 2 is 3 5801 X moves to 3 58 Because 1 2 3 5801 so N5 can not return to the origin Suppose that the N5 is N5 X ROUND 1 ROUND 2 It is equivalent to N5 X 1 235 2 346 the program can return to the initial point 2 10 4 5 Composing of Calculation The above operation and function can be combined The priority sequence of calculation is function multiplicative operation and additive operation Example 1 2 3 SIN 4 l and indicate operation sequence 2 10 4 6 Calculation Sequence Changes by Using The prior part of operation sequence is included with Bracket including function up to 5 layers at most 166 Chapter 2 Programming Example 1 SIN 2 3 4 5 6 to 5 indicate operation sequence 2 10 4 7 Precision The precision should be considered when programming and using the program of user macro program function 1 Data format The data used in user macro program is as the following floating point format M 2E Where M 1 digit symbol 31 digits binary number E 1 digit symbol 7 digits binary number O gt D r D me N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 vo 2 Calculation precision The following errors are generated after one calculation is performed The error accumulates when computing repeatedly oe
264. ins unchanged ii Input P 9999 and press input button All the execution data of the group in which the cursor is including are completely cleared which is same as the function of the tool setting refer to 2 11 3 2 11 6 Setting the Parameter The parameters of the tool lifetime management are set as below eg fo eee LCTM 1 The tool lifetime is specified by time 0 The tool lifetime is specified by frequency GRST 1 After the resetting signal is output the execution data of each group is cleared 0 After the resetting signal is output the execution data of the lifetime end group is cleared TLSK 1 Skip the tool and the group number is input 0 Skip the tool while the group number is not input 2 11 7 Alarm O D Q O r 7 NO U Q Q 3 The following alarms are not GSK983T standard ones The group number exceeds the maximum value 16 The group number specified in the machining group isn t set 142 The tool number in the group exceeds 16 T code doesn t exist in the program setting the tool group 145 The group number specified by TA A88 doesn t comply with the a 2 11 8 Other Precautions In the last part the part program memory and edit areas are reduced some space for the tool lifetime data area In EDIT mode it will occupy more space when the data are registered into the part program and the edit area introduced in 11 2 196 Chapter 3 CNC Specificat
265. ion and Configuration Function Chapter 3 CNC Specification and Configuration Function 1 Controlled axis X and Z axes two axes Controlled axis 2 number Two axis linkage control meanwhile meanwhile 3 Language The standard The standard language is Chinese it can be set as English is Chinese it can be set as English S MODEL B isas follows 4 Number of 192 points input points Environmental Number of 128 points aans Program Max 5000 e 2 Environment temperature 0 C 45 C during running 20 C 55 C in other situations 3 Relative humidity lt 90 Without condensation lt 95 40 C 4 Vibration lt 0 5G during running lt 1G in other situations conditions 5 Environmental air Please contact with the manufacturer when NC device is used in the environment with much dust cutting oil solution or organic solution in high concentration 1 Servo system a The system alarms when the error of the error register is greater than the setting value in the stop state The system alarms when the value of the error register is greater than the maximum setting value The system alarms when the position detection system is abnormal The system alarms when the drifting voltage is too big The system alarms when the speed control unit is abnormal gt Q O r 4 OO 2 Z o O 4 O O A a 5 Q Q Q C s Q a m c O a 5
266. its value a 0064 THDCH Chamfering width in thread cutting G92 G76 Setting range 0 127 unit 0 1 pitch which can be set by MDI panel R Rapid traverse F F code command E E code command Z axis siajawelied G xipueddy 314 Appendix 5 Parameters Due to the delay of servo system the chamfering showing as the left is less than or equal to Threading chamfering Threading cycle G76 r chamfering part in thread cutting Parameter No 0065 GROVE GROVE Return of G74 and G75 setting range metric input 0 16383 unit 0 001mm by radius inch input 0 16383 unit 0 0001inch also can make it by pressing set key to change its value Parameter No 0066 THDFN THDFN Finishing allowance of G76 gt O D Q x oO U o S D aa D T 315 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual setting range metric input O 16383 unit 0 001mm by radius inch input O 16383 unit 0 0001inch All the value above is specified by radius This parameter can be set by MDI panel ADDRESS SET refer to No 68 parameter also can make it by press set key to change its value Parameter No 0067 MRCDT Description setting range metric input O 16383 unit 0 001mm specified by radius inch input O 16383 unit 0 0001inch specified by radius also can make it by press set key to change its value cutting feed Parameter No 0068 Description THCLM Min cut depth of threa
267. ject to change without further notice II Preface Safety Precautions Safety Responsibility Manufacturer s Responsibility Be responsible for the danger which should be eliminated and or controlled on design and configuration of the provided CNC systems and accessories Be responsible for the safety of the provided CNC systems and accessories Be responsible for the provided information and advice for the users User s Responsibility Be trained with the safety operation of CNC system and familiar with the safety operation procedures Be responsible for the dangers caused by adding changing or altering on original CNC systems and the accessories Be responsible for the failure to observe the provisions for operation adjustment maintenance installation and storage in the JOG This manual is reserved by end user This manual is reserved by end user We are full of heartfelt gratitude to you for supporting us in the use of GSK s products MI C GSK CNC GSE IV GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Contents Contents MD GIVElY and Storage stn Gan nian nia eA ls ea I EO heck bororo accep aN CO ei e E T deed dss I T ALIES LEMEE EE E ETA ETE EAEE A EAEE AAE E PEATEELE AENEA EEE E a ee I E TV OUDICS OO WING aena I CHAPTER 1T SUMMARY coirene a AEEA AAA EE l LL SUMMARY acuis a E EEEE Ra E E 1 T2 PRECAUTIONS eesriie ii AAA R AN EENET EE NENEEEAEEEE sev aes 2 CHAPTER 2 PROGRAMMING orree aare
268. l block skip switch is different based on the different machines about the details refer to the manual of the machine manufacturer switch on the operation 220 Chapter 4 Operation panel is normally set as the BLOCK SKIP 1 4 3 6 8 Feedrate Override The feedrate specified by the program can multiply by the override The commanded speed multiplies by the override corresponding to the scales of O 200 and the increment is 10 Note 1 The switch is used with the manual feedrate switch which is set by the machine manufacturer Note 2 During the thread cutting this switch is invalid and the override is normally 100 4 3 6 9 Dry Run gt Q O P K O mm Q 5 In the memory or in the cycle running commanded by MDI the dry run is valid F function is useless and the machine is moved at the following speed Rapid traverse button ON OFF Rapid traverse Cutting feed Rapid traverse button ON Rapid traverse Max inch feedrate Rapid traverse button OFF Inch feedrate refer to the notes Inch feedrate Note 1 Whether the dry run is valid or not is set by NC parameter 6 0 RDRN when the rapid feeding is commanded Note 2 Whether the dry run is valid or not is set by NC parameter 8 0 TDRN during the thread cutting 4 3 6 10 Machine lock za MACHINE LOCK The movement command pulse stops when the screen MACHINE LOCK switch is ON or the operation panel machine lock is valid Ther
269. l can not be retracted from forbidden area when movement axis enters the common position of forbidden area which is set by the 1 2 and 3 limits The tool can be retracted by performing the operation in Note 3 Chapter 2 Programming 2 5 15 Skip Function G31 The linear interpolation of X u and Z w are specified by G31 like G01 if the skip function is input during the command execution and the rest part of the block executed should be stopped to execute the next block G31 is a one time completion command only the block is enabled The movement after the SKIP function input is determined by in the next block is incremental or absolute 1 When the next block is incremental command The next block from the breakpoint is performed with incremental movement For example G31 W1000 0 U50 0 Skip signal input from here 50 0 LOO a Actual movement m QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo meee Movement without skip signal 2 When the next block is absolute command Only one axis is specified Tool moves to the specified position along with the specified axis when the skip signal is introduced the other axes keep invariable For example G31 2200 0 X100 0 100 0 Skip signal input from here 4 7 200 0 Actual movement Movement without skip signal 3 When the next block with absolute command is to be specified th
270. l moves to the specified position at the rapid traverse rate If tool reaches the reference position the indicator of reference position is ON If only one axis reaches the reference position the indicator of this axis s reference position return is ON If the specified axis not reached there the alarm occurs No 092 Note 1 If an offset value is specified a specified position reaches by G27 command will move an offset value If a tool offset is not reach the reference position the corresponding light is OFF Usually the offset should be erased before G27 is specified Note 2 The inch mechanical system is entered in metric even if the tool programming position is offset 1u from reference position and the indicator light is also ON The min input value is less than the command incremental of mechanical system Note 3 G27 function just for the 1 reference position of machine O 2 Q O r D s N U Q 3 mD 2 5 8 2 G28 Automatic Reference Position Return Format G28 X u Z w Function Auto reference position return is specified by this command for the specified axis Positioning to the reference position is determined by the intermediate point specified by the X u _ Z w Tool moves to intermediate point on all specified axes at rapid traverse rate after G28 block is employed rapid traverse reference position return is then performed Reference position return indicator light is ON
271. l operation can be inserted the returned axes can t be moved Note 3 During searching when the conditions of input signal and the offset amount etc are different with the previous ones the tool can t return to the correct machining start position Even the single block switch is ON or switched the searching continues in MEMCRY TAPE mode Note 4 During searching when the feed hold is valid the resetting is operated during or after searching the program is restarted from the beginning While the searching ends the resetting state is set by parameter 006 CLER in MDI mode Note 5 When the program restarting switch is ON the cycle start is ignored Note 6 No matter before or after machining the manual absolute switch is always ON during the manual operation After the manual operation is executed one program is restarted rather than reset or the manual operation is executed along the axis which hasn t been returned to the machining restart position its assumed that the manual absolute switch is ON no matter whether the manual absolute switch is ON or OFF Note 7 In the following situations the tool can t be returned to the correct position in principle Ca The manual absolute switch is OFF during the manual operation b The tool is moved when the machine is locked c The external mirror image function is used d The coordinate system isn t set at the start position of the incremental programming Ce The program mirr
272. ll letters can be specified other than G L N O and P It is specified in terms of address form and it is not necessary for the especial address sequence But I J and K must be specified by alphabetically B A D yoni LOO O RK n Can B__ A D _ a J L orep Cannot The address evaluated in argument assignment and the variable numbers used in macro program body have eee corresponding relationships 176 Chapter 2 Programming a a O gt D r D s N U FR O ta i S 3 3 vo 2 Argument assignment II A B C J K J Koo o The arguments are specified other than in the address of A B and C Address l J and K as a group can be specified the arguments for 10 groups When multiple arguments are specified at the same address they should have a line from the presetting sequence The address can be omitted if it is not necessary The address commanded in argument assignment Il and the variable number of the variable used in macro program have following corresponding relationships The subscript 1 10 of I J and K are indicate the sequence of the commanded group Note G65 must be specified before any arguments Argument assignment can use negative sign decimal point 3 Argument assignment and II can be mixed use The specifying is not alarm even if arguments and II are specified in G65 block simultaneously As for the same variable if the arguments and Il are specified
273. lled software limit The 2 limit Set these boundaries by parameters or in MDI mode inside area of the set limit is set to be a forbidden area G22 command forbids the tool to enter forbidden area G23 command permits the tool to enter the 2 limit area and the 3 limit area The 3 limit Set these boundaries by parameters or programs Select either inside or outside area to be forbidden area by the parameter 86 RWL G22 command forbids the tool to enter the forbidden area and G23 command permits the tool to enter the forbidden area just like the 2 limit area The 3 limit command setting or modifying are performed by the following definition commands G22X_Z K A X Z Seca B CI K The 3 limit can be set by parameter 155 158 54 Chapter 2 Programming Xl Z gt K When the area is set by parameters or in MDI mode points A and B in the figure below must be et A X1 Z1 B X2 Z2 When setting the forbidden area by parameters or in MDI mode the distance X Z I and K from reference position to point A point B is specified with the min movement unit output unit The programmed data is then converted into the min movement unit is regarded as parameter setting O The data of forbidden area is determined by the position of tool checking See the following figure 5 of Tool position at the N reference point y Forbidden area a 3 Q Lis If checking from point C tool to enter
274. lue Input with G10 The offset value can be entered from program when using the following commands G10 P X Z R Q or G10 P U W R Q P Offset number X Offset value along X axis Absolute Z Offset value along Z axis Absolute 109 O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual U Offset value along X axis Incremental W Offset value along Z axis Incremental R Tool radius offset value Absolute Q Imaginary tool nose number The value specified in X and Z axes are regarded as offset value setting by with absolute command it corresponding to the offset number specified by address P The value is specified with address U and W which is added to the current offset value for the corresponding offset number when it is specified with incremental value Note 1 Address X Z U and W can be specified at the same block Note 2 By using this command in block the tool makes fewer advances this command is also used to input an offset value once the command is continuously specified and enter these values instead of MDI One by one 2 6 6 Directly Input Tool Offset Value by Manual Measure Trial Cut Tool Setting b sia Surface A a 7 0 r Ch he ee d jy i Surface B TX Supposing the workpiece coordinate system is set in advance See Section 2 3 5 and Section 2 5 8 1 Start the spindle with manual mode operat
275. lue is in the range of 01 12 7L 0 1Lis regarded as incremental and it can be set by parameter 64 THDCH O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Tool nose loading can be released in this cycle by cutting with cutting edge If the first cutting value is Ad then the Nth cutting value is Ad Vn each cutting value is stated The least cutting depth can be operated 68 THCLM with parameter SETTING There are four kinds of feed direction also the inner thread can be machined The thread cutting is shown as the above figure the cutting feedrate between C and D are described with F or E code The tool in the other path is rapid feedrate The incremental signs in the above cycle are shown below U W Negative It is determined by the directions from A to C and from C to D I Negative It is determined by the direction from A to K Positive always positive D Positive always positive The finish lathe remainder value a Radius programming can be set by parameter 66 THDFN the range is indicated as 0 000 16 383 mm or 0 000 1 6383 inch Example 7 2 7 1 Multiple cycle program G76 138 Chapter 2 Programming Multiple cycles x GOO 80 0 150 0 CTS KOLIO6O Dia 2005 GTE X60 64 225 0 E3680 D1800 Fe o 2 Q O m D NO U s co Q 3 Note The precaution of thread cutting is same to the G32 and G92 thread cutting cycle When entering keep state
276. mand Canned cycle is performed again after M S or T command For example NO003 T0101 N010 G90 X20000 Z10000 F200 N011 GOO T0202 N012 G90 X20500 Z10000 Note 3 The thread chamfering begins to perform as long as a signal from machine tool is received But the common machine tool builder deal with the signal like this send it to machine tool with corresponding M code this signal is used for thread chamfering and it is send to signal NC from machine tool Note 4 When thread chamfering M code is applied in thread cutting it must be specified in the block before G92 suppose that G92 is specified in the same block with this M code the thread chamfering will not be performed because of the signal delay between machine tool and NC 2 1 4 Canned Cycle Use 1 Linear cutting cycle 2 Taper cutting cycle Surface of material Surface of material Surface of finished product Surface of finished product 3 End face cutting cycle 4 Taper end face cutting cycle Surface of material Surface of material Surface of finished product Surface of finished product 7 Note To protect against the overcut or the tool collision the canned cycle start point should be set in the position beyond the range of closed figure formed by workpiece path Operation 122 Chapter 2 Programming 3J Q oS D DO U Example 1 Example 2 a N16 G50 2506 R G96 5180 HAS H10 G50 2500 3 Tez668 G96 186 H3
277. measure the tool compensation amount Note When STL or SPL is ON the tool change resetting signal and the tool skip signal can not be input 2 11 5 Display and Inputting the Tool Data 2 11 5 1 Display and Rewriting the Tool Group Number In the part program memory and edit areas the tool group number can be displayed and rewritten like the common program Definitely the program is rewritten as 11 2 otherwise it can t be saved in the tool lifetime area 2 11 5 2 Display the Tool Lifetime Data during the Machining Program Executing In any mode press the diagnosis key twice display the 1 page of the tool lifetime data on LCD screen Display the data of two groups on one page Press the page key to display the data of each group one by one The tool change signal of maximum 5 groups can be displayed at the bottom of each page If 6 or more groups exist one arrow cursor is displayed in LCD To understand the data of one group select the address N Input the group number and press the input key or move the cursor to GRP of the next group and display the data 2 11 5 3 Preset the Tool Lifetime Counter Select MDI mode to rewrite the tool lifetime counter i Input Poooo and press the input button Then the counter of the group in which the cursor is is preset as ooo while the other data of the 195 QO gt D r D 9 N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 vo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual group rema
278. min N333 ae X rpm User Manual X is the spindle speed before N333 block The spindle speed never changes when G96 turns into G97 mode The S value of G96 is enabled when G96 G97 When the S is not specified the S 0 m min is applied feed min 2 8 2 5 Example X Tool path after offsets Programmed path O D Q O r 7 NO U Q Q 3 200 300 400 800 600 TOO 800 900 10001100 12001300 14001500 1050 1475 N8 G00 X1000 0Z1400 0 N9 T33 N11 X400 0Z1050 0 N12 G50S300 max spindle speed N13 G96S200 Surface speed 200m min N14 G01 Z 700 0F 1000 N15 X600 0Z 400 0 N16 Z The spindle speed calculated by NC system is proportional to the surface speed of coordinate value programmed position of X axis When offset is valid the surface speed is not calculated by the coordinate of X axis after offset For the end of N15 on the above illustration the speed is 200m min in 600 diameter it is tool nose not tool post center If X axis coordinate value is negative NC system calculates the surfaces speed by absolute value 144 Chapter 2 Programming 2 8 2 6 Relationships Between Spindle Speed and Surface Speed Spindle speed rpm 800 600 400 2200 Surface speed 2000 sins Spindle speed rpm is consistent with 2 1600 surface speed m min about 16mm radius 1400 D NO 1200 1000 Spindle speed with S code U a00 4 amp e ee Ae S i Y F
279. mm 00007 G0 X36 0 25 0 M3 S500 Start the spindle and position to the machining starting point add the tool width in X direction G74 D0 5 Machining cycle G74 X20 0 Z 20 0 13000 K5000 F50 Tool infeed 5mm in Z direction tool retraction 0 5mm After infeed to end point Z 20 rapidly return to starting point Z5 tool infeed 3mm in X direction Execute the above cycle to continuously run 135 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual M30 End of program 2 7 2 6 Outer Grooving Cycle G75 The following command in the figure is used to finish the cycle This case is the same as G74 except the Z axis replaced X axis Its character is drilling the depth hole along with X axis and easy to chip removal and outer lathe slot along with X axis Z W and K must be omitted in this case G75X U _Z CW __ Ai K Ak F__ D Aq O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 G74 and G75 are used for slotting and drilling separately and they can be retracted automatically there are four kinds of feed direction for them Note The retraction value e in cutting can be set with parameter 65 GROVE or set in parameter 65 GROVE in SETTING page Operation Program suppose the grooving tool width is 4mm and the least increment is 0 001mm 00008 G00 X150 0 Z50 0 M3 S500 Start the spindle speed 500 GO X125 0 Z 24 0 Position to machining starting point add the tool width in Z
280. mm along Z axis direction 50 Chapter 2 Programming 69 00 g Sari base point 121 00 As the above figure shown if the standard point is at the too nose coordinate system is moved and set the needed coordinate system by using the same method The move value along X axis is 1 0mm and 1 0mm along Z axis Then execute G50X120 0Z70 0 again and the workpiece coordinate system will be set correctly When setting the movement value the explanation is the most simple and convenient in section 5 10 5 Note 1 Workpiece coordinate system is immediately moved after offset value is set Note 2 If coordinate system is set again with G50 after offset setting movement value is omitted and to execute the workpiece set by G50 Example If the following command are specified the coordinate value of current base point is X 100 0 Z 80 0 regardless of how the previous movement value is set G50 X100 0 Z80 0 Note 3 After the offset is set if manual reference point return or automatic coordinate system setting is performed the offset works and the coordinate system is then immediately moved 2 5 10 5 Workpiece Coordinate System Offset Value Input Directly Workpiece coordinate system is not consistent with the coordinate system set by G50 or the automatic coordinate system so moving the coordinate system by inputting the offset value directly is performed when programming X Z 0 The coordinate system is employed when pro
281. mming N Side A Workpiece coordinate _ system zero point Usually it is impossible for the tool to position to the origin So the tool is at the P position of workpiece in the abovementioned figure Commands are performed in MDI mode below G50 XaZB the workpiece coordinate system is correspondingly set However hard position of P point is the reason so the following steps should be performed Manually cut Side A of workpiece The tool leaves and the spindle stops along the X axis the Z axis does not move Measure the distance of B and specify G50 ZB in MDI mode press the DATA INPUT and CYCLE START keys to set the workpiece coordinate system into NC in MDI mode The measure method of a value is similar to B When side A and B are cut with a same tool the offset value is 0 when different tools are employed the difference between two tools is regarded as offset value to store Offset value measure see Section 2 6 5 Method 2 The coordinate system is set after positioning to the starting point is performed When the tool is positioned to the starting point the following steps should be performed 1 Cut manually side A of workpiece 2 Z axis does not move and the tool leaves from the X axis and the spindle rotation stops 4 Measure the distance of in the following figure 3 Clear the relative coordinate value of Z axis address W see Section 4 4 6 5 C
282. mount 0119 The spindle offset compensation amount S analog output 0120 0123 When the spindle speed command is 10 V the spindle speed are corresponded to the gears 1 4 0124 0125 Offset compensation amount 0132 The spindle minimum revolution speed G96 in the constant surface speed control mode 0159 0160 The 2 reference position 0163 0164 Value r of X and Z axes in the automatic tool compensation 0165 0166 Value of X and Z axes in the automatic tool compensation 0300 0304 Fixed parameters 0305 0308 Various parameters 0310 0313 Baud rate of I O device 0316 Parameters about the rotary transformer and the inductosyn 0317 The codes corresponding to custom macro gt O D Q x On U A S D r D T 299 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 0342 Skip cutting speed 0343 0346 The spindle minimum speed controlled in the constant surface speed corresponding to the gear 1 2 3 4 0358 Maximum input value of the incremental Maximum input value of the incremental wearing offset offset ba Rete chic T value of the automatic coordinate system input in mm metric system 0379 0380 Setting value of the automatic coordinate system input in inch inch system 0388 Maximum value of the wearing offset List of parameter function Whether the servo disconnect signal is valid or invalid S Whether the automatic drifting compensation is valid or not 2 Whethe
283. n 4 3 6 13 Program Restart The function of the program restart is that when the tool gets damaged the machining program is operated in the midway or the program is interrupted for the other work the program continues to execute from the interrupted position after getting ready and the modal data before the interrupted position are all reserved the following example is shown as below When the program 01111 runs to line N60 the program is interrupted to change the tool and then the program continues to run from N60 The detailed operation step is as below 222 Chapter 4 Operation PROGRAM Program_lock on D1111N1111 O1111 N10 GOO XO ZO N20 GOL X50 0 Z100 0 F500 N30 X100 N40 Z50 N30 X30 Z 30 N60 X50 A90 N70 A170 R20 N50 M30 EK RAK BAK EDIT 14 26 31 CHECK DIR PRGRAM O gt A 1 In Auto mode press the Program restart button on the operation panel the lamp of the button is ON and then input P or Q the interrupted block number on the program aN interface which is shown as the following figure O PROGRAM Program _lock on 01111N1111 D 01111 5 z O mD N10 GOO XO ZO N20 GO1 X50 0 2100 0 F500 N30 X100 N40 Z50 N50 X30 Z 30 N60 X50 A90 N70 A170 R20 N80 M30 Q 60 LSK AUTO 14 28 20 is a 2 Input Q 60 and press the cursor key search the sequence number N60 of the block after N60 is searched the
284. n 600 00inch min 15000inch min 600 00 inch min feedrate overrid ion 0 01mm r 0 0001 inch r 0 01mm r 0 01 inch r 500 00mm r 50 0000inch r 500 00mm r 50 000 inch r Cutting 0 1 15000 0 0 01inch min 0 1mm min 0 01inch feedrate i mm min 600 00inch min 15000 0mm min 600 00inch 1 10 set by paramet 0 001mm r 0 0001 inch r 0 01 mm r 0 0001 inch r ers 500 000mm r_ 50 0000inch r 500 000mm r 50 0000inch r Raid 00 60 mm min 60 mm min 6 0 inch min 6 0 inch min PACAS 15000mm min 15000mm min 600 0inch min 600 0 inch min independently Cutting feedrate UPPErHMIEVAUE 6 mm min 6 mm min 0 6 inch min 0 6 inch min Manual Eee 15000mm min 15000mm min 600 0inch min 600 0inch min eda eras 1mm min 0 04inch min 0 5 mm min 0 02 inch min pce 2000mm min 78 7inch min 1016mm min 40inch min gt Oo D 5 Q x Oo Ep O r O F A S 5 Q D O F r gt D O O 3 3 Q D Q S C D on 290 Appendix 3 List of the Range of the Commanded Values F cod F 0 01mm 0 0001 inch 0 01mm 0 0001 inch RRR 500 00mm 50 0000inch 500 00mm 50 0000inch Thread lead E code F 0001 mm 0 000001inch 0 0001mm sea cae 500 000mm 9 999999inch 500 0000mm B Thread 0 001mm r 0 001mm r 0 01 inch r 0 01 inch r lead F code F 500 000 50 0000inch r_ 200 900 50 0000inch r 1 10 mm r mm r 0 01 inch 9 999999iInch feedrate setby e le 0 00001mm 0 000001 0 00001mm param
285. n value O gt D r D me N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 vo OFT Imaginary tool nose direction parameter 8 3 T2D setting In this case the range of offset number is 1 9 and the range of offset value is as follows 71 Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Offset value 0 mm 999 999mm 0 inch 99 9999inch Offset value corresponding offset number 00 is always 0 offset number 00 cannot set offset value 2 6 3 4 Workpiece Position and Movement Command The workpiece position should be specified when compensation is performed with tool nose radius rear tool post system Gcode Workpiece position Tool path G40 Cancellation Move along programmed path Move at the left of programmed path G42 Right Move at the right of programmed path Wark G41 Imaginary tool nose on the programmed path ps Py Imaginary tool nose number 1 8 Imaginary tool nose number 0 O D Q O r 7 NO U Q Q 3 cao X axis o axis Tool nose center on the programmed path Coordinate setting can change the workpiece position which is shown below front tool post system G41 workpice on the left side 7 SISI S 11111111L Workpiece X G42 workpice on the right side Note 1 If the value of tool nose radius compensation is negative the workpiece position changes 2 G40 G41 and G42 are modal 12 Chapter 2 Programming CAT Xer
286. n LCD it doesn t change even at power off These signals are not only set by LCD but also by the corresponding buttons on the operation panel The signals are taken as connected no matter the signals from the machine operation panel or LCD Therefore any signals are cancelled or cut off from the machine operation panel the signals can still be switched with LCD Refer to the machine operation panel for MDI LCD switch interchange 1 Setting and display The states of above signals on LCD can be displayed with the following operations O K a Display SETTING SETTING E CI Select the 3 interface for setting firstly press for setting and then press a twice aa 5 o C II Because there are two interfaces select the required interface with or buttons The 1 page Display the selected switches except for the block skip ones The 2 page Display the selected switches except for the block skip 1 9 ones b Setting The following operation is performed after display 4 t C I Press 4 or to move the cursor to the item to be changed C I After pressing the address P insert during connecting insert 0 during disconnecting Input P 0 or input 276 Chapter 4 Operation MENU SWITCH PO1 00006 N0003 SINGLE BLOCK 0 0 0FF 1 0N DRY RUN 0 0 0FF 1 0N AUX FUNC LOCK 0 0 0FF 1 0N MACHINE LOCK 0 0 0FF 1 0N DISPLAY LOCK 0 0 0FF 1 0N MANUAL A
287. n be set the specified surface speed or spindle feedrate into eight control shifts such as 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 and 120 Note The parameter 9 5 SOV should be set to 1 to make the spindle speed override valid When the SOV is set to 0 the spindle speed override is invalid 2 8 2 3 Max Spindle Speed Clamping The max spindle speed is specified in G50 S the constant surface speed unit is r min G50S_ When the spindle speed controlled on the constant surface speed is reached to the above value which is specified with program this speed is clamped at the max value When a constant surface speed control is selected and the maximum spindle speed can be set with parameter 134 SPDMAX In this case when the constant surface speed control mode G96 or G97 is applied the spindle speed is limited below the max speed 2 8 2 4 Rapid Traverse G00 In the rapid traverse block included GOO the cutting will not be performed in rapid traverse then the constant surface cutting speed is not changed along with the changes of tool position and the corresponding constant surface speed will be calculated at the program end position and sent to the spindle Note 1 When parameter 9 4 SSCR is set to 0 the surface speed should be calculated in GOO mode along with tool position Note 2 The max spindle speed is without set when the power is turned on the speed is not clamped Note 3 If the max spindle speed is set with G50 command
288. n can be started at once K11 3 Fuction specification K11 3 1 User macro program interruption ENABLE MASK Even user macro program interruption is not used it is not necessary to change the program For this purpose parameter ENABLE MASK 025 MUSR is provided for selecting user macro program interruption lf user macro program interruption is set to MASK in the parameter M96 and M97 will be output to the outside as common M codes If it is set to ENABLE M96 and M97are processed internally without inputting to the outside 364 Appendix 11 Interruption Function of User Macro Program K11 3 2 Subprogram type and macro program type interruptions The modes of user macro program interruption include subprogram type interruption and macro program type interruption Therefore the parameter 025 MSUB is designed for selecting an interruption mode e Subprogram type interruption Interruption program is called by a subprogram That is the values of local variables remain unchanged before and after interruption In addition the interruption is not counted as the nesting of calls e Macro program type interruption Interruption program is called by a macro program That is the values of local variables change before and after interruption In addition the interruption is not counted as the nesting of calls The calls nesting of subprograms and macro programs executed in interruption program are accumulated to their numbers
289. n return is completed 2 6 1 2 Tool Offset T Code T codes have following meanings When T2 1 Too o offset number Tool selection When T2 2 TOG G0 te to offset number Tool selection 59 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual G10P00 The selection of T2 1 or T2 2 depends on parameter 8 3 T2D setting Note T code selection depends on setting of machine tool builder 2 6 1 3 Tool Selection Tool is selected by the T codes with corresponding tool numbers For the corresponding relative between tool selection number and actual tool refer to the appropriate manual issued by the machine tool builder 2 6 1 4 Tool Offset Number Tool offset number have two meanings If tool offset number is specified the corresponding offset distance is then specified and also the offset function is executed tool offset number O or 00 indicates the wear offset is cancelled Offset distance corresponds to offset number and the offset memory should be set by MDI LCD display panel See Section 4 4 12 There are three kinds of compensation for the appointed offset number The compensated offset is performed by the X and Z axes which is called as tool position offset Compensation R is regarded as tool nose compensation O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 OFX OFZ OFR OFT X axis Z axis Tool nose R Imaginative tool offset offset compensation nose direction Offset number
290. n stops at the end of block Stop Programmed path y2 5 Interference V1 V 6 Interference Vector V2 and Vs are ignored due to the interference and then the interference is generated O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 between V and Ve The alarm displays and tool stops c when checking the interference it is actually not generated Example is as follows 1 Depth is less than tool nose radius Programmed path Tool nose center path Although the interference is not generated actually yet due to the direction of tool path is different from programmed path the No 41 alarm generates and tool stops 2 Depth of groove is less then tool nose radius Programmed path Tool nose center path Stops here 104 Chapter 2 Programming The direction of tool path is different from programmed path Same as the illustration 13 Deal with the chamfering and corner a When chamfering or corner arc applies and when the corner exists and interference ignores the cutter compensation executes b In offset cancel mode a start block or when the offset direction changed the compensation is not performed and the tool stops and an alarm occurs No039 Tool nose center path j Programmed path QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Cc If the programming obliquity is less than 1 P S No 52 and No 54 alarms will not
291. n the memory mode Between two non cutting blocks or the error detection is valid once the commanded speed decelerates into 0 the next block is executed the in position detection is not performed The start button on the keypad panel is sent to the machine side NC starts after it receives the start signal return from the machine side Appendix 5 Parameters NC becomes the clear state with the reset NC becomes the reset state with the reset button the external reset signal the reset button the external reset signal the reset and the rewind signals refer to Appendix and the rewind signals refer to Appendix 7 TV check is not performed in the control TV check is performed in the control output output part the note part part the note part The relative coordinate display can be The relative coordinate display can be preset preset with command G50 G92 with command G50 G92 RDRN Dry run is also valid for the rapid feed Dry run is invalid for the rapid feed command command Detailed introduction ones wp Obes Te ONES Oe nl ek Bucgomantanie B EE Oe EOB codes are output with LF EOB codes are output with LF CR CR When the incremental offset function is The input offset value is taken as the selected the input offset value is taken as absolute one only valid for the tool nose the incremental one only valid for the tool offset amount R nose offset amount R Use the special G
292. n4 uoleunByuoy pue uoneaoads ONO a deuD by F About the details refer to 2 5 2 Arc interpolation G02 Programming can be executed in the range of 0 360 About the details refer to 2 5 5 G02 Clockwise CW G03 Counter clockwise CCW The dwell time of the next block movement can be specified by G04 About the G04 details refer to 2 5 9 It is commanded by address P or X Conversion between The input of inch or metric system is selected by G code About the details inch metric system refer to 2 5 11 G20 G21 G20 Inch input G21 Metric input Thread cutting G32 The straight taper and end face threads of the lead are specified by F code and the cutting are commanded by G32 W Setting the coordinate Use the commanded values of X and Z axes after G50 and the present tool Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual The cutter compensation is specified by G codes G41 or G42 the tool nose Cutter compensation radius value of each tool can be stored into the memory G40 G42 G40 Cancel the offset G41 Compensation in the left of the tool movement direction G42 Compensation in the right of the tool movement direction The maximum compensation value is 999 999mm or 99 9999inch About the details refer to 2 6 3 There are three types of the canned cycle About the details refer to 2 7 1 Canned cycle of sole 1 Cutting cycle A G90 cutting of outer diameter type G90 G92 G94 2 Thread
293. nd Local Variable of User Macro Program Macro program is called once with G65 G66 or G code the macro layer level is added 1 the level of local variable is added 1 simultaneously Namely Macro program call and local variable have the following relationships Main program 182 Chapter 2 Programming 0 00 0 0 G65P __ ae G65P _ E G65P_ G65P_ ps M99 pos M99 pn M99 n M99 Local variable Level 0 Level 4 1 Local variables from 1 33 can be employed in main program Level 0 2 The local variable Level 0 is saved in main program as long as the macro program Level 1 is called with G65 the local variables from 1 33 are employed in new macro program Level 1 and arguments can be entered from them 3 is same 3 The local variables Level 1 2 and 3 are all stored when the macro program Level 2 3 and 4 is called for each time and the new local variables are employed Level 2 3 and 4 4 The local variable stored in 2 and 3 is restored to the initial status as long as it returns with M 99 from each macro program 2 10 8 Relationships with Other Functions 1 MDI operation Macro call operation and control commands are not be commanded in MDI mode MDI can be inserted in macro program performing even if when the single block stops The command related to the macro program is exceptional If the MDI mode is operated the macro program is not called even if it is in the macro program call m
294. nd dash line a For the rapid traverse the tool path is indicated as the dot line eeee for the cutting feed movement the tool path is indicated as the real line 4 4 25 1 Operation 1 Setting the number of drawing For drawing various parameters must be preset and they can be set no matter in any mode GRAPH a Press the following drawing parameters are displayed on LCD GRAPHIC PARAMETER 00006 N0003 0l AXES 0 XZ 1 ZX 2 Z X 02 RANGE MAX MIN gt Q O P D O O aD mm Q ms 5 x 0 0 o O0 03 SCALE 100 04 SCREEN CENTER X 0 05 SCREEN CENTER Z 0 06 OFFS 0 0N 1 0FF 0 LSK sr EDIT 15 17 33 fem aww I t 2 Press or L key the cursor is moved to the target position 3 Operate with P and input the drawing parameters are set 4 The steps DG are repeated to set the required numerical values 2 Note of the drawing parameters AXIS PLAN SELECT Set the drawing plane XZ 0 left ZX 1and right ZX 2 279 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual z X x 0 1 2 RANGE MAX MIN In the range set the maximum and the minimum values of the tool path in the figure X 0 0 Z 0 O Setting range O0 99999999 1 0 001mm or 0 0001inch Cnormally 1 0 0001mm or 0 00001inch The input unit 10 Setting range 1 100000 1 0 01 time Cnormally CRI CENTER X value Set the coordinate of the drawing ce
295. nd movement commands are in one program block the signal can execute M S and T function after the movement commands end Signal in the cycle The signal is sent when NC is in cycle running running Automatical running start The signal is sent when the automatic running is started NO O N N indicator signal T Feed hold indicator The output signal is sent when the feed hold is in the dwell state signal 28 29 Interlock The commanded axis feeding can be forbidden independently Any one axis is interlocked in the movement the interlock signal is released after all axes in the mechanical part decelerates and stops and then the axes are accelerated and restarted Overtravel The signal occurs after the machine reaches the stroke end the axis movement decelerates and stops the overtravel alarm occurs Miscellaneous function BCD code signals of M S T and B function and the strobe signal are forbidden lock to send to the machine side Machine lock The machine does not move while the coordinate is displayed the movement The machine lock is also valid during the machine block executing Dry run In dry run mode the feedrate is JOG one The rapid feed command G00 remains unchanged the rapid feed select is valid However the dry is also valid based on the parameter setting Commands can be executed in the programs one by one Skip optional block Through connecting the optional block skip switch
296. nd points of programmed path it is more than 180 Example for condition Tool nose center path Programmed path The direction of two paths is entirely different 180 Programmed path There is completely different for the two paths 180 Example for condition 101 Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Prog rammed path ra i 7 8246 Center T e e T NS G01 U2000 W8000 111 N6 G02 U 1600 W3200 l 8000 K 2000 122 N7 G01 U 5000 W2000 r 2000 it is cutter compensation value of T11 O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 r2 6000 it is cutter compensation value of T22 In above illustration the arc in block N6 is in the first quadrant The arc passes 4 quadrants after the cutter compensation is applied b Interference modification in advance 1 Delete the vector for causing the interference When the tool nose radius compensation is performed vector V1 V2 V3and V4 are generated between A and B Vs Ve V7 and Vg are generated between B and C Checking the near vector at first if the interference is issued they will be ignored But if the vector will be ignored because of interference is the corner last vector they can not be ignored Interference check between V and V Interference V and V are ignored Interference check between V3 and Ve Interference V3 and Ve are ignored Interference check between
297. ne operation panel is used for inching feeding of the machine 100 pulses per revolution are sent from the MPG The movement distance of per grid is switched with the switches on the 2 g Q O r 4 ee Z o O 4 O O A a gt Q Q e 5 Q C s Q a 5 T 5 O a e 5 Manual pulse generator machine side Metric input 0 001 0 01 0 1mm Inch input 0 0001 0 001 0 01inch 204 Chapter 3 CNC Specification and Configuration Function J Q Oo r 4D Q gt 2 Z o O 4 O O A a 5 Q 5 Q Q C s Q a 3 m C 5 O a 5 205 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Chapter 4 Operation 4 1 Power ON OFF 4 1 1 Power On 1 Please connect the machine power supply based on the manual of the machine manufacturer 2 Connect CNC power supply after pressing the power on button on the machine operation panel 4 1 2 Power Off 1 Confirm the cycle start button LED indicator on the machine operation panel is OFF 2 Confirm the machine movable part is in the stop state gt Q O r K O O 0 DR Q a 5 3 Press the power off button on the operation panel to cut off CNC power supply 4 About cutting machine power supply refer to the manual of the machine manufacturer Note After the system powers off it should be powered on again after
298. ng Method 4 Automatic coordinate system setting When the corresponding parameter is set a coordinate system is automatically set after the reference point return is performed Coordinate values a and are separately set by parameter 375 and 376 when input in inch is performed when input in inch they are set by the parameter 379 and 380 The tool nose can not be positioned at the reference point so tool position can be compensated by using tool offset function see the Section 2 6 1 or workpiece coordinate system movement function see Section 2 5 10 2 3 6 Reference Point The reference point is a fixed position on the machine tool The reference point return function is to perform the tool to return the reference point A program can not be randomly started from a certain position on workpiece coordinate system but it can be started from the reference point accordingly In this case the reference point is a certain point on the machine tool and the point corresponds to the zero of the workpiece coordinate system and makes the program finish the machining normally G50 command should be commanded when the tool returns reference point to set the workpiece coordinate system 2 3 7 Absolute Command and Incremental Command Command for B gt A Command Address in the following figure Absolute Specifying end point on X coordinate value of X axis ieee command workpiece coordinate system Z coordinate value of Z axis
299. ng the parameter number and meaning same with the NC parameter number and its meaning Note 3 About the relative content remark please refer to the introduction of parameters in Appendix 5 Setting the program protection lock can t be executed if it is OFF or it can be executed even it is OFF and the two status can be switched with parameters a Mode selection is set in MDI mode 4 b Press or to move the cursor to the item to be changed the address N can t gt Q O P iN O x Q as 5 be moved by the cursor HP INPUT c Press the address the numerical value to be set and then press to be input 4 4 8 2 Display and Setting the Custom Macro Variable Values All of the common variables and the local variable values of the macro itself which is called currently can display on LCD 243 gt Q oO r D O 1 x Q a 5 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual MACRO VAL PO1 Program lock on 00001 NOOO 0001 00100 000 00002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 LSK k 44 14 48 50 set Peer sme f The macro variable values void refer to lt undefined variable gt of 10 2 3 of chapter three is displayed as blank When the absolute value exceeds 99999999 the system displays s OVER FLOW When the absolute value is not O but be less than 0 0000001 the system displays UNDR FLOW Display 1 Select the
300. nies eee ie a eee i eee hale cee lta 20 Day MAP TION E cesta veasgenateieecles esaeoa te neces odes aoe oats 21 24 1 Rapid Traverse oR RN a nT a a ee ae 21 2AA RATHI TO CON ANC aera satel ihe sa edad desea esse aids NOA eA aD 22 ZAS SMCAG Loa orreina a aer e 23 2A FECI TTO cali c clan colt ET a ie ee Lae A ence date 24 2 4 5 Automatic Acceleration Deceleration cccccccccsscccsesssscesenseeesenseecesssaeeesssaeeeeseaeeceseaseeeeeaeeeesaes 24 25 PREPARATORY FUNCTION G EUNCTION sccusccsvaceiesdeciss seceewivedsdeuscosaxsiendutass EAEEREN EAER EENES 25 20k AF OSINOIIIG C GOOD seseina AE EE EERE 27 292 Ener Inert OLY CG0 annaa a a a a a a N 28 2 5 3 Ghamfering and Comer Paces sosesn sagen aroia E E AE EE EE A E EEE NENNE 29 294 Foure DIMensondNpU asia a AA 31 259 ArCinterpolation G02 G03 7 reidarnine inaa a hans a a a ies 34 2 5 6 Feedraie for SIN Curve COntrol CGOZ ciseccccsccvessccoversoserevessevessasorersevenssenvesersavencesoneneseatesesdavenes 38 20 7 Tmead CUMING G32 GIAI aporiaan er AAA AA buses thiandadtoabesestneasten tea E E AE NA 39 272i Lincar laper Thread Cutting LGI ienaa E E E E alame 39 25 02 Natiable Thread ked Curtis G3 Siuro i hacet oe raadaatneiat tie neadee hole weal Gtehacas sie 43 XT Consecutive read Ci Senen cedar E E ENE O duane 43 2 5 8 Auto Reference Position Return G27 G30 cas casen sia teesee ial lactate oie is tes tat iil eats 43 ZOO G27 Reference Position Return Cech riscsssonar onn
301. not be stored in SRAM memory 3 Method of key lock after unlocking Ca Set a different value in parameter No 408 with that in No 387 b Switch off the NC power once and then switch on it again OGSA m HE GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual Parameter No EIKES Store the password number for lock Setting range 1 99999999 aoje The program lock is disabled by entering the same value as in parameter No 387 The program lock is active when a different value is entered Note 1 When the value of parameter No 387 is set to 0 the program is unlocked and remains unlocked even the NC power is switched ON OFF Note 2 Don t set a value other than 0 in parameter No 387 when lock is not necessary J10 5 Cautions 1 Proceed as follows if the set password No 387 is forgotten a Completely clear the memory unlock b Input all parameters except No 387 c Save program number 9000 9899 into memory d Seta password in parameter No 387 lock 2 After O9000 O9899 programs saved and edited other programs beyond O9000 09899 should be called before the lock function is enable When the program number is 9000 98939 it is time to set the password and switch to Edit mode and finally enter into PROGRAM interface as the following shows This interface is disappeared when new program beyond O9000 O098939 is created PROGRAM 09080 Nosol ook CAUT ON STOP PUSH RESET CONTINUE RETURN MODE TQ MEMORY OR TAPE LSK BUF INC
302. not move during programming the tool moves around the tool 2 3 2 Increment system Increment system is determined by the following two elements 2 3 2 1 The least input increment input unit The minimum units are specified by the tool movement these minimum units are specified by mm inch 13 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 2 3 2 2 Minimum movement unit output unit Minimum movement unit of machine tool is specified any group of the following can be employed by using mm inch or degree units DT The least input increment The least movement unit Input in mm outputinmm 0 001mm 0 001mm Input in inch output in mm 0 0001inch 0 001mm Input in mm output in inch 0 001mm 0 0001 inch Input in inch output in inch 0 0001inch 0 0001 inch O 5 Specifying the diameter the min movement unit of X axis is also a diameter value D Whether the least movement unit of machine tool is either 0 001mm or 0 0001inch is determined A by the set parameter in advance SCW 5 0 L Whether the least input increment is either 0 001mm or 0 0001 inch is determined by the G code R or set by MDI E G20 The least input increment 0 0001 inch Z G21 The least input increment 0 001mm The mode of power on is still that of G20 and G21 before power on 2 3 2 3 10 fold input unit magnification The least input increment input in mm can be changed into 0 01mm by the parameter 5 1 MIC The least input increment in
303. ns please refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details 2 9 Subprogram Some canned sequence is included or the modal displays repeatedly in a program the sequence and modal can be regarded as subprogram to store to the CNC memory and simplify the program The subprogram can be called in memory working mode A subprogram can call others subprogram When main program calls a subprogram it is regarded as one step call The occasion of performing of four nested call subprogram is as follows 146 Chapter 2 Programming Main program Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Me J M O l First nested __ Second nested_ Third nested _ Fourth nested A subprogram can be called repeatedly with a calling command and a calling command can be repeatedly called for 9999 times 2 9 1 Execution of Subprogram O X XX X nn 2 22 2 222222 222222 uu 288 9 O 3 Q O r D s N U pn Q 3 M99 The subprogram can be specified after O EIA or ISO at its beginning M99 might not to be specified with single block at the end of subprogram For example How to input the subprogram into the memory see the operation section 4 4 15 4 4 17 for details Note In order to make NC program is harmonized with the others systems The subprogram of previous block also can be written into N X X X X X instead of O or The system records th
304. nt A B and C directions Feed movement of CNC machine tool some are operated by the spindle drives tool and some are operated by the workpiece on the worktable The abovementioned coordinate axes are Supposed to the workpiece stops the tool is feed movement direction which is related to the 12 Chapter 2 Programming workpiece If the workpiece movement is specified it is indicated with character In terms of relation of movement the workpiece movement direction is reversed to the tool movement that is X X Y Y Z Z A A B B C C In a similar way negative directions of both movements are reversed each other O Q O D N U 5 Q Q 3 D Q Direction on the machine tool coordinate axis is determined by the type and component layout of each part of the machine tool For the turning machine Z axis is identical with the spindle axial line the distance between parts and tool is enlarged by movement along Z axis direction X axis is vertical to Z axis which is corresponding to revolving tool post movement the distance between parts and tool is enlarged by movement along X axis direction Y axis it is nominal consists of right hand coordinate system rule with X axis and Z axis Note the following items during programming a Program must refer the standard coordinate system Right hand square coordinate b Supposing the workpiece is
305. nter in the workpiece coordinate system CRT CENTER Z value It will be automatically set once the range of the maximum and minimum values are set after drawing for one time 3 Description of the tool path gt Q O r K O O x Q a 5 GRAPH Press once more when the drawing parameters are displayed and the following figure occurs on LCD 280 Chapter 4 Operation GRAPH X 41 814 Z 94 818 Current position same as the absolute coordinate value 15 18 03 STOP G PARA GRAPH DRAW E N D Drawing state display DRAW 2 Press w DRAWING is displayed on the status bar at the lower right corner on LCD If there has already existed the figure it will be cleared 3 The automatic running starts and the tool path is given END DRAW 4 Once press the drawing stops And then press key restart drawing after the previous figure disappears Note 1 The drawing is operated based on the changed coordinate value during automatic running therefore the program should be started during automatic running The machine should be locked if only drawing is required Note 2 When the feedrate is too high the drawing can t be performed correctly Then decelerate in dry run mode for drawing 4 Example gt Q O P iN O O D x Q as 5 Conditions Specified by the diameter Input unit 0 001mm Drawing plane 1 AXES 1 281
306. ntersection P1 or P2 which is without chamfering the outer chamfering is limited When chamfering path is consistent with the intersection P1 or P2 without chamfering the outer chamfering is limited When the chamfering value is more than the specified limit value No52 and 55 alarms occur 14 MDI inputs command The command which is input from MDI does not perform the tool nose radius compensation In automatic operation mode when the NC program specified by absolute value is performed and the single block function temporarily stops the MID operation executes the automatic operation is then restarted and the tool path is as follows At the moment the vector at the start of next block is shifted and the other vectors will be generated by the following two blocks So the offset after point Pe can execute the tool nose radius compensation In this case the vector at starting point of the next block executes translation and the following two blocks generate other vectors The following 2 block point P in the following figure executes the tool nose radius compensation Vs MDI command 107 QO gt D aa D s N U O Co i S 3 3 vo O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Tool nose center path When point Pa PB and Pc are programmed with absolute command after the block is performed from Pa to Ps and the tool
307. ntrol circuit exclusive LSI semiconductor memory and newly storage parts improving greatly the reliability and the performance price ratio The system can be matched with AC servo motors widely applied in the world using a high capacity pulse encoder as a detecting element which forms a close loop CNC system In the manual the GSK983Ta Turning CNC system s programming operation and parameter explanation are described System selection functions are also described at one time in this manual but all selection functions are not always included in the actual equipment Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder when the user uses the functions Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 1 2 Precautions CNC machine tool control function is not only determined by the system function of CNC controller also by the machine tool s strong circuit servo equipment CNC controller and machine operation control The manual cannot narrate the combination of control functions programming and operations in detail it explains the CNC system function and control functions about all kinds of machining lathe in detail The user must refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder The proceedings narrated in this manual are prior to the manual issued by machine tool builder In the manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the proceedings however we Ja deyD cannot describe all matters otherwise it
308. number A AAA called are set in parameter Up to ten of MO6 M255 can be called with macro program except a part of specified M codes These M codes can not be specified with MDI like G65 and they can not be specified in the macro program of G M and T codes can not be specified in the subprogram called with M or T code either QO gt D r D N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Setting the following parameters ee ee l l E S 2 10 7 8 Subprogram Call with T Code T code calling subprogram command can be employed by setting parameter N__G_ X It is same operations as the following two blocks 149 t N_G_X_Z_ M98 P9000 T code t is regarded as argument storing into the common variable 149 T code displays on the page of COMND but the TF T codes are not output This command can be specified with MDI but it can not be specified in the same block which is called with M code When the T code is specified the subprogram call is not performed but same to the common T code in the macro program call with G code or subprogram call with M T code Setting the following parameters 3 TM CR Note When TLCC of parameter number 8 is 1 the compensation is enabled in the block of T 181 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 2 10 7 9 Decimal Point Position of Arguments Generally arguments are applied with decimal point if the decimal point is not performed the position of decimal p
309. o the actual movement amount is different with the displayed value Note 2 The position is displayed in inch in inch input and it is displayed in mm in mm input During switching from 282 Chapter 4 Operation mm to inch or from inch to mm the position displayer is cleared to O after pressing the resetting button No matter from mm to inch or from inch to mm the switched displayed data don t change only the position of the decimal point will change Note 3 For the compensation amount like the backlash amount etc which belongs to the mechanical type the displayer doesn t display 4 6 Method of Setting Tools A Mechanical zero return tool setting LJ 1 Press VEROS to enter the mechanical zero return mode and then X an Z axes return to the mechanical zero 2 Select any one of tools 3 Start the spindle the tool is cut along the workpiece end face it is assumed as face A after pressing NERO the tool is retracted from face A the spindle stops the length of is measured take point O as the workpiece zero coordinate the workpiece zero is the origin O refer to the following figure D aN O D i Start position a T Face A eee GEOM GEOM 4 Press and to enter the interface of Its assumed to INPUT use 01 tool offset input N 101 100 01 tool offset and then press the lower left N on the screen is twinkling and then input
310. ock or from the next specified T code is set by parameter 8 4 TLCC When NC parameter 8 4 is 1 the new offset becomes valid from the next program 0 valid from the next T code Note 2 Input only when the letters on the lower right corner don t twinkle otherwise input NO and then the letters don t twinkle 4 4 12 3 Respectively Setting Tool Figure Offset and Tool Wearing Offset 1 Display the tool wearing offset On interface the 1 chapter is displayed press key for several times or the WEAR softkey the following interface occurs TO WEAR OFFSET POI WO2 000 000 000 000 000 000 wo3 000 000 000 000 000 000 wo4 000 000 000 000 000 000 wos 000 000 000 000 000 000 wos 000 000 000 000 000 000 gt Q O r K O O 0 x Q a 5 elolololol olol LSK 44 MDI 14 55 26 e ee 2 Display the tool outline offset OFFSET OFFSET On interface the 3 chapter is displayed press key for several times or the GEOM softkey the following interface occurs 250 Chapter 4 Operation TO OUTLINE OFFSET POI NO X R coi 000 000 000 000 000 000 coz f 000 000 000 000 000 000 cos 000 000 000 000 000 000 cos f 000 000 000 000 000 000 cos 000 000 000 000 000 000 cos 050 000 100 000 000 000 ololololol olol LSK t 14 56 05 Jeejee Tool outline offset figure Setting GEOM WE
311. odal command can O gt Q O r 0 NO U Q Q 3 2 m be computed by reading the system variables 4001 4120 using the modal information The unit is effective when the unit is specified System variable Modal information G code 01 group G code 02 group E code F code M code Sequence number Program number S code T code Example 2 10 3 5 X axis automatic tool offset 162 Chapter 2 Programming Measure feed __Measure point hopeful position Xa 50 0mm min Allowance range 5 0mm Measure the start Feedrate position Xa 10 0 A calling command of macro program G65 P9018 Xxa Macro program body is as follows 09018 Program number 1 4001 keep G code of group 01 GOO X 24 10 0 Measuring the start position at rapid traverse rate G31 X 24 5 0 Measuring IF ABS 5061 5081 24 LT5 0J GOTO 9018 Allowance range checking 3000 80 PS PS alarm 80 N9018 4 BIN BCD 4120 AND255 Tool compensation number G10 P 4 X 5061 24 Compensation G 1 M99 Modal information recovery System variable from 4001 to 4120 can not be used for the left of command operation 9 Position information 5001 5102 Position information can be computed by reading out the value of system variable 5001 5102 It is radius when the radius is applied it is diameter when the diameter applies The unit is mm or inches in term
312. ode 2 Sequence number index The sequence number can not be indexed in macro program body 3 Single block The blocks other than macro program call operation command and control command can be stopped even if in macro program The block of macro program call G65 G66 and G67 operation and control commands are not stopped even if in the mode of single block But after the following data or parameters are set the single blocks are all stopped other than macro program call Using for the test of macro program body EA 2 ee es 183 QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual pt f tye ft oe ee A Macro program statement in 01 7999 09900 9999 are performed single block stop when MCS7 1 Macro program statement in 08000 8999 are performed single block stop when MCS8 1 Macro program statement in 0O9000 9089 are performed single block stop when MCS9 1 When macro program single block stop is employed it is regarded as unmovable in cutter compensation R when the incorrect compensation may occur Strictly speaking although the movement is specified and it is same to the movement value 0 This setting is prior to the 3003 single block stop control that is if the MCS7 8 and 9 1 even if the 3003 1 or 3 single block stops and not to be controlled in the corresponding range of program number MCS 7 8 and 9 are the parameter used with macro pr
313. ode Above actions are shown below Rapid rate Reference return magnetic switch time sequence diagram So called reference point return in magnetic switch mode means that in the action 1 after rising edges of ZDX and ZDZ signals which replace the grid signal emerge the feed stops and reference point rerun end signals ZPX and ZPZ are issued Moreover the reference point return detection cannot be performed by G27 Parameter No 0086 LPGMX C a e Description LPGMX Servo loop gain constant setting of X Z axes LPGMZ gt O D Q x On U o s S D r D 3 T 320 Appendix 5 Parameters E Setting value 2048 x ___ L E 7V 7V 1000rpm motor 3 5 V 7V 2000r min motor L Mechanical move amount for motor one turn mm or inch a detection unit mm or inch eg L 2mm E 7V motor 1000r min 7v setting value 2048x7 2x0 0005x1000 3584 detection unit 0 0005mm Machine tool Loop gain series feed amount for motor per 7V 1000r min servo motor turn 7V 2000r min servo motor 3584 1792 1792 896 3584 1792 4779 2389 2389 1195 4779 2389 7168 3584 3584 1792 7168 3584 3584 1792 i ae m zr 7168 3584 To X axis the left value of sign is for radius programming right one for diameter programming Sheet above is standard and the max Feedrate limit value should be considered if DMR and CMR unchanged 321 N 4mm 4deg 3mm 3deg 2mm 2deg gt lt 0 5inch 0 4
314. ogram checking so it is very necessary to set these parameters to 0 if the macro program checking ends 4 Skip optional block When the code occurs in the middle of lt Expression gt On the right of arithmetic expression or i Q O r 0 NO U om Q Q 3 in the middle of it is regarded as division sign instead of skip optional block 5 Operation in the mode of edit In order to not damage the user macro program body and subprogram stored due to the incorrectly operation the following setting is as shown 3 1 PRG 9 3 1 PRG 8 PRG8 1 User program body or subprogram of program number 8000 8999 PRG9 1 User program body or subprogram of program number 9000 9899 can not stored deleted and edited but all the programs are deleted when the power is turned on and the above limitation is not applied when single program punching issues 6 Program page displays depart from the edit mode Normally when macro body and subprogram are called the called program displays the previous program can be kept performing the following settings 3 1 MPD 8 When MPD8 1 MPD9 1 user macro program body and subprogram of the corresponding 184 Chapter 2 Programming program number 8000 8999 and 9000 9899 can not be displayed on the program screen external the edit mode 7 Reset The clear status occurs using the reset all of the local variable and common variable 100
315. oint is regarded as the following ee a a A D B C H E F In the mode of G99 F In the mode of G98 l J K M S T mma The values in the table are indicated the decimal point position is starting from the least effective digit As for the address E F in the bracket is the parameter FMIC 1 it is the digit of following of O aD r D s N U O ta Q S 3 3 m vo decimal point when the other addresses are parameter MIC 1 2 10 7 10 Distinguish from M98 Subprogram call and G65 User macro program call 1 G65 can specify the arguments but M98 can not 2 The command is performed other than M P and L and convert to the subprogram in M98 block but G65 is converted only The others are not performed 3 The single block stops when the address is not included O N P and L in M98 block But G65 not stops 4 G65 changes the grades of local variable but M98 not changes that is 1 before command G65 is different to the 1 inside the called user macro program body And 1 before command G98 is different to the 1 inside the called subprogram 5 Up to 4 layers of call time is gathered with G65 but the G98 call time is 4 layers When the user macro program A or B selection is applied 6 When MDI operation is inserted in Auto time of M98 is 4 layers in Auto but it is separately reached to 4 layers in MDI mode G65 arrives 4 layers in all modes 2 10 7 11 Nestification a
316. ommands The control code of DC2 output from NC side 2 10 13 2 Data Output Command BPRNT DPRNT Data output command BPRNT DPRNT 1 BPRNT a b eG nace f The digit of significant below the decimal point Character Variable Character output and variable binary output are performed when performing BPRNT command a Word the specified words are output in terms of ISO code the command word can be performed is as below shown Letters A Z Numbers Special character QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo An asterisk is output by a space code b All variables are stored with a decimal point Specify a variable followed by the number of significant decimal places enclosed in bracket A variable value is treated as 2 word 32 bit data including the decimal digits It is output as binary data staring from the highest bytes c When specified data has been output an EOB code is output in terms of the setting code ISO d Null variables are regarded as 0 2 DPRNT a _ b c q Number of significant decimal places Number of significant digits in the integer part Variable Character The DPRNT command outputs characters and each digit in the value of a variable in terms of the code set in the settings ISO a For an explanation of DPRNT command see items a c and d for BPRNT command b When outputting the variable specify followed by the variable numbe
317. ompensation II B function 0057 0059 Machining time 0062 Spindle speed arrival signal timer 0064 Chamfering width during the thread cutting 0065 Retraction amount return amount of G74 and G75 modes 0066 Finishing surplus in G76 mode 0067 Retraction amount in G71 and G72 modes Minimum cutting depth of the thread cutting in G76 mode 0069 During the tool compensation the very small movement amount in the machining situation of the acute angle closed to 90 is ignored 0070 0071 In position width 0074 0075 The position offset limit value during stop 0078 0079 The position offset limit value during moving 0082 0083 Grid offset amount 0086 0087 Servo loop gain override 0090 Servo loop gain 0091 JOG feedrate 0092 0093 Rapid movement speed 0096 0097 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant for the rapid traverse rate 0100 0101 Manual feeding time constant 0104 X axis acceleration deceleration time constant in the thread cutting mode 0105 Cutting feed acceleration deceleration time constant 0106 Upper feedrate during the cutting feed 0107 Lower limit value of X axis in the thread cutting mode 0108 Lower limit value of acceleration deceleration in the thread cutting mode 0109 0110 Lower limit feedrate of manual feeding in the acceleration deceleration 0113 Minimum speed F0 during the rapid movement override 0114 Lower speed during the reference position return 0115 0116 Backlash compensation a
318. on Hi x k Product Hi j k Quotient H i AND k Logic OR Each one is corresponding for 32 digits 2 10 4 4 Function i SIN J Sine Unit degree 1 COS J Cosine Unit degree i TAN J Tangent Unit degree i ATAN J K Arc tangent Unit degree 1 SQRT J Square root i ABS J Absolute i BIN J Conversion from BCD to BIN ji BCD J Conversion from BIN to BCD i ROUND J For integration Round off i FIX J Values following the decimal point are casted out i FUP J Round off for the following of decimal point Addition 1 Note Usage of Function ROUND 1 The common decimal point is round off when the operation command OR IF WHILE are 165 QO gt D r D me N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 Oo O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual used in conditional expression For example 1 ROUND 1 2345 1 becomes 1 0 IF 1 LE ROUND 2 GOTO 10 When 2 is 3 567 ROUND 2 becomes 4 0 2 When address command is used the least setting unit in this address is rounded off For example G01 X ROUND 1 If 1 is 1 4567 the least setting unit of X is 0 001 this program becomes G01 X 1 457 But in this example it is same to GO1X 1 ROUND in the address command is mainly used in the following occasion For example The program returns to the beginning point only mov
319. on LCD screen on unit of hour minute and second the unit two seconds Based on setting the time shown on the following figure is S O S o o A displayed When the system is on the other interface press or to switch D SETTING DATA P01 00006 N0003 Q D TV CHECK o 0 0FF 1 0N g PUNCH CODE 0 O EIA 1 1SO 9 INPUT UNIT o 0 MM 1 INCH INPUT DEIVCE1 o O TAPE ONLY INPUT DEIVCE2 o 1 RS232C NENKLING TIME QOOOH OOM 105 LSK EDIT 15 16 38 LSK EDIT 15 16 38 Note 1 The accumulative time is the running one excluding the single block stop and feed hold time Note 2 After the automatic operation stops the power supply is cut off and the maximum error is 6 minutes after power on again Note 3 The time can be preset through setting operation and the data numbers are 57 58 59 please refer to 4 4 8 4 4 24 Menu Switch Function Use LCD to replace the switch on the machine operation panel to power on off the CNC memory and the switch quantity on the machine operation panel can be reduced through the function The signals of LCD switch are as below 213 ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 1 SINGLE BLOCK 2 MACHINE LOCK 3 DRY RUN 4 BLOCK SKIP1 9 5 XMIRROR IMAGE Z MIRROR IMAGE 6 DISPLAY LOCK 7 Auxiliary function lock AUX FUNC LOCK 8 Manual absolute value MANUAL ABSOLUTE Once the switch signal is stored in the memory o
320. ont tool post system Imaginary tool nose number 2 Imaginary tool nose number 1 l Imaginary tool nose number 4 Imaginary tool nose number 3 Imaginary tool nose number 5 Imaginary tool nose number 6 Imaginary tool nose number 7 Imaginary tool nose number 8 QO gt D r D me N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 io O Q O r D NO U Q 3 mD Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual X Rear tool post system Imaginary tool nose number 1 Imaginary tool nose number 2 Imaginary tool nose number 3 Imaginary tool nose number 4 Imaginary tool nose number 5 Imaginary tool nose number 6 Imaginary tool nose number 7 Imaginary tool nose number 8 The imaginary tool nose number 0 and 9 are employed when tool nose center is consistent with starting point Set imaginary tool nose number for according address OFT in each offset number 70 Chapter 2 Programming Imaginary tool nose 0 or 9 2 6 3 3 Tool nose Compensation Value Setting Tool nose compensation value tool nose radius value This value is set in MDI mode and it corresponds to the last 2 bits numerical of 4 digits T code Note the offset number specified Tooodo OFX OFZ Offset Offset value of Offset value of number X axis Z axis 32 groups Note The offset number can be set by the least effective number of T code it is determined by the OFR Tool nose radius compensatio
321. oordinate system is employed in the manual X Z Z X Right hand coordinate system Left hand coordinate system 2 3 5 Coordinate System and Machining Starting point Workpiece coordinate system should be memorized to CNC during programming the tool moves 15 O DE Q O r D s N U Q 3 mD Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual and a program operates should be performed from a starting point But the starting point and tool coordinate value should be offered by using G50 Fig 3 4 2 G50 Workpiece coordinate system setting Workpiece coordinate system of NC is specified by G50 X aZB command Firstly X a and Z B are applied to CNC this command is offered at the head of a program or the command is offered from MDI when the tool is at start position Refer to the CHAPTER FOUR section 4 4 9 MDI run mode It is very easy to position to the starting point if the workpiece coordinate system is firstly confirmed 1 MDI LCD display panel command GOOX aZB G00 is positioning command 2 Manual feed moves the tool to X a and Z from viewing position Workpiece coordinate system is determined by the following modes Mode 1 Performing G50 in MDI mode Workpiece coordinate system origin When a tool is positioned at the origin of workpiece coordinate system the following commands can be specified in MDI mode after positioning G50 X0 Z0 16 Chapter 2 Progra
322. or 3 100 e ee 3 00 5 200 Sy cS SS ES a O 40 e0 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 260 300 Radius mm 2 8 3 Tool Function The digit followed the T code indicates the tool A part of data is also used to indicate the tool offset number of offset amount The following two descriptions are selected with parameter 8 3 T2D O Tool offset number Tool selection 1 T2 1 setting T O O 2 T2 2 setting T oo O O O a ae Tool offset number O Tool selection Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for corresponding T code and tool amount Example T2 2 N1 GOO X1000 Z1400 N2 T0313 The 3 tool and the 13 offset value are selected N3 X400 Z1050 Tool selection number is propagated to the machine by BCD code with strobe signal Note Some machines is specified to a tool selection with a one digital 145 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 2 8 4 Miscellaneous Function M Function When a two digit is specified with the following address M a two digit BCD code and a strobe signal are sent to machine tool side These signals are used for controlling the ON OFF of machine function One M code is specified in one block When two or more M codes are specified only the last one is effective Different M code selection depends on different machine refer to the user manual issued by machine tool builder for details The following M code includes exceptional me
323. or else it may cause serious danger Preface Safety Precautions ANNOUNCEMENT mDelivery and storage Do not put over six packing boxes in piles Never climb the packing box stand on it or place heavy items on it Do not use cable connected with the product to drag or carry products Take particular care of the front panel and the display of the system Moistureproof exposure and rain measures are needed mCheck before acceptance Confirm the required products after opening the package Confirm the products are not damaged in transportation Confirm all parts are full and not damaged in accordance with the detailed list Please contact with GSK when the product type is inconsistent with the required or the accessories are lacked or the products are damaged in transportation mWiring Only qualified persons can connect the system or check the connection The system must be earthed and the earth resistance must be less than 0 10 The earth wire cannot be replaced by zero wire The connection must be correct and firm to avoid any fault or unexpected consequence Connect with surge diode in the specified direction to avoid damage to the system Switch off power supply before plugging out or opening electric cabinet E Troubleshooting Switch off power supply before troubleshooting or changing components Check the fault when short circuit or overload occurs Restart can only be done after troubleshooting Frequent
324. or function Attention should be paid when using the down round numbers command Example When 1 0 002 in 2 2 1000 is calculated result of variable 2 is not exact 2 may be 1 99999997 When 3 F IX 2 is specified result of variable 3 is 1 0 rather than 2 Herein correct the error firstly and then perform the down round numbers or round up to get the right result 3 F IX 2 0 001 3 ROUND 2 4 Triangle function The absolute error occurs in the triangle function but the relative error cannot be less than the 10 so note that when the multiple divided calculation performs and after the triangle function is calculated 2 10 5 Control Command The program schedule can be controlled using the following command 2 10 5 1 Conditional expression IF lt Conditional expression gt GOTO n The block its sequence number n begins perform from a same block when lt Conditional expression gt is established the n can be replaced with variable or lt Expression gt the next block is consecutively performed when the condition is not established If the IF lt Conditional expression gt is omitted it is unconditionally branched to the block with 168 Chapter 2 Programming sequence number n lt Conditional expression gt are divided into the following items j EQ k j NE k j GT k gt j LT k lt j GE k gt j LE k lt The lt Expression gt can be replaced with j and k And the usabl
325. or image function is used f The manual operation is inserted during the axis returning g In the machine lock state the machine is unlocked after the program is restarted h The program restarting command is sent when the block of the skip cutting or the block before the one of the absolute command is executed i The restarting program is commanded when the combined block of the canned cycle is executed j After searching ends the coordinate system is set or offseted But in case of c the tool return can be operated in P mode in the block after the one of switching ON OFF Then the same state is hold in the mirror image interruption Moreover in case of f the tool return can also be operated in P mode Caution no alarm occurs in the above situations Note 8 No 60 alarm occurs when the specified program only includes M98 M99 the macro program calling commands G65 G66 G77 or the macro program sentences or the block not stipulated is searched Note 9 P S alarm 98 is issued after the power is on or after the emergency stop is released or the stroke limit alarm stop immediately is released and the program restart is commanded and G28 is detected while the reference position return is not executed Note 10 P S alarm 99 after the program restart searching ends the axis movement is executed in MDI mode Note 11 RSTR is twinkling at the bottom of LCD screen after the program restarting is commanded and before th
326. origin parameter No 336 337 interval parameter No 383 384 amount parameter No 1000 2127 of each axis pitch error may be set by parameters And the compensation amount may be multiplied by 1 2 4 and 8 according to the pitch error compensation override parameter No 024 I Compensable axes X Z axes IL Compensation points 128 127 intervals III Compensation value Compensation point 0 7xcompensation override minimum move unit Compensation override x1 x2 x4 x8 for all axes IV Compensation interval Minimum set interval Maximum set interval Metric system 8 000 20 000 000 0 001 mm Inch system 4 000 20 000 000 0 00001 inch Maximum compensation distance set interval x128 Actual compensation interval shall be set depending on the optimal value between the maximum compensation distance and machine travel in the ranges as listed in the above table When the set interval is less than the above minimum set interval compensation is impossible at a predetermined position Now it is necessary to reduce the feedrate The minimum set interval of X axis by diameter is 16000 mm Metric system 8000 inch Inch system Here the pitch error compensation data is set by diameter H8 3 Parameter Parameters concerning pitch error shall be set in the following parameter numbers in MDI mode or emergency stop mode H8 3 1 Pitch error compensation override KORNEA a i E E E Parameter No T 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PLM
327. osition the specified address is searched in sequence N1234 X100 0 Z125 0 S1234 N5678 M03 Searching scanning word To search M03 displayed word 1 Input M 2 Press searching is started and the cursor points below M letter gt Q O P q D O O DR Q ms 5 269 Sr mz GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Note Ki can t be used for searching word and address 4 4 22 4 Method of Returning to the Program Head 01100 NO0001x12 34 215 67 G0O1X12 5 M04 Beginning Searching scanned word displayed word ED 1 Method 1 In mode press yel the program is displayed from the beginning 2 Method 2 Search the program number 3 Method 3 Q a Setin O mode PRGRAM b Press the function button to switch into the interface of t c Press E the program is displayed from the beginning 4 4 22 5 Inserting a Word To insert T105 oo N1234x100 0 Z125 0 S1234 N5678 M30 5 Q O r K O O x Q a 5 To search 1 Search or scan one word before the word to be inserted Ca Refer to 4 4 22 1 during scanning b Refer to 4 4 22 2 during searching the word The cursor is on the place of Z1250 2 Input the word to be inserted INSERT 0 L5 press Note 1 When the data are inserted without the address insert the data into the present word editing unit on the above example search Z1250 the cursor is below Z once 2
328. ours y Example 2 10 3 3 Timer 3 A calling of macro command z G65 P9101 T Waiting time ms Macro program the initial setting sequence is as follows 09101 3001 0 WHILE 3001 LE 20 DO1 Waiting the setting time END1 M99 5 The single block stops waiting for the completion signal control of miscellaneous function The single block stop function can be controlled when substituting the following value to the system value 3003 the next block is consecutively performed till the following block is not finish the signal FIN of miscellaneous function S T and M The distributed signal DEN is not sent out till the finished signal is not applies Note that this point can not be specified which the miscellaneous function is not waiting for the finished signal 3003 Single block stop Signal after M function finishes Enable Waiting For example 10 3 4 Drilling cycle Incremental programming A calling command of macro program G65 P9081 L Repeated times R Point R W Point Z Macro program body is as follows 09081 Single block stops 3003 1 160 Chapter 2 Programming GOOW 18 18 equivalent to R GO1W 23 23 equivalent to W GOOW ROUND 18 ROUND 23 3003 0 M99 6 Feedrate speed override and exact dwell checking 3004 are disabled As for the following block when the following values are substituted in system variable 3004 Feedhold and feedrate are disabled and the exact dw
329. own below Format G02 K xX U amd F G03 Revolution direction CCW G03 End point position End position in workpiece coordinate system Distance to end point Distance from start to end point Distance from start to center Distance from start to center Radius specifying _ aT Arc radius arc within 180 Radius specifying Chapter 2 Programming 4 Feedrate F Feedrate along arc The direction of CW or CCW applies when the coordinate system is in right or left hand G02 X U Z W I K F Diameter programming X axis End point 7 Starting X Z axis G03 X U Z W I K F Diameter specifying O gt D r D s N U FR O ta i S 3 3 vo X axis eZ axis G02 X U Z W R F Diameter specifying 35 Or CES E O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Arc center X axis End point R axis Diameter programming G02 X5 0 Z3 0 12 5 F0 03 Or G02 U2 0 W 2 0 12 5 F0 03 or G02 X5 0 Z3 0 R2 5 F0 03 or G02 U2 0 W 2 0 R2 5 F0 03 X L va os Sr Y A 1 9 7 GAG Vis ii BE Lo N Unit inch E O O 9 a S f 0 O g Note 1 This word can be omitted when I or K is zero Note 2 and K separately specified the distance from the start to center along X and Z axe
330. p oKIP The function allows the block with the first word is skipped MENU SWITCH PO1 00006 N0006 SINGLE BLOCK 0 0 0FF 1 0N DRY RUN 0 0 0FF 1 0N AUX FUNC LOCK 0 0 0FF 1 0N MACHINE LOCK 0 0 0FF 1 0N DISPLAY LOCK 0 0 0FF 1 0N MANUAL ABSOLUTE 0 0 0FF 1 0N X MIRROR IMAGE 0 0 0FF 1 0N Z MIRROR IMAGE 0 0 0FF _ 1 0N LSK 4 ek 14 25 02 set eo over At the beginning of the block one slash with one numerical value n n 1 9 is specified and the BLOCK SKIP switch on the machine operation panel is ON the specified optional block skip switch number n correspondence the information included in n block are ignored in the memory mode When the BLOCK SKIP switch number n is OFF the information of the block specified by n is valid which means the operator can decide whether skip the block with n or not 1 can be ignored in 1 However when two or more optional block skip switch is used for one block 1 in 1 can t be ignored Example Not correct Correct 3G100x10 0 1 3G00x10 0 The function is ignored when the program is registered into the memory and the block with n is also stored in the memory no matter whether the block skip switch is ON or OFF The stored program in the memory can be output no matter whether the block skip switch is ON or OFF Even during the sequence number is being searched the optional block skip switch is also valid The number of the optiona
331. parameter 1 0O N LSK 44 EDIT 15 23 18 LSK eee EDIT 15 23 18 Note new parameter is active after restart 4 Transmit pitch compensation Pitch compensation is valid only when it is operated in NC1000 parameter interface The operation procedure is like the one of parameter transmission as following NC PARAMETER P17 00006 N0003 NO DATA 1000 OO 0 1001 0 0 1002 0 0 1003 0 fr 1004 0 0 1005 0 0 1006 0 0 1007 0 0 1008 0 0 1009 0 0 1000data para Pitch error compensation value of i aris LSK EDIT 15 25 53 Note pitch compensation transmission should be performed in emergency stop mode and it is active after restart 380 5 Appendix 13 C232 Serial Port Transmission Transmit offset Offset transmission should be performed in offset interface as follow shows and the operation procedure is like the one of parameter transmission TO WEAR OFFSET POI NO R X wor 000 000 000 000 000 000 wo2 000 000 000 000 000 000 wos 000 000 000 000 000 000 wor 000 000 000 000 000 000 wos 000 000 000 000 000 000 woe 000 000 000 000 000 000 elolololol olol P 9999 LSK 44 EDIT 15 24 16 LSK see eee EDIT 15 24 16 es co 381 CGSRI WE GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual 382 Appendix14 System clock setting and PLC programming Appendix14 System clock setting and PLC
332. piece overcut may occur and the tool nose will cut into the side of the workpiece VII X U and Z W must be indicated in the first block of specifying workpiece form If the Z axis O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo movement is not applied in the first block the WO is then specified 2 Usage for two kinds of cycles First kind Specify an axis in the first block of specifying workpiece form Second kind Specify two axes in the first block of specifying workpiece form When the Z axis movement is not applied in the first kind and machining with the second kind W should be set to 0 For example The first kind the second kind G71 P100 Q200 G71 P100 Q200 N100 X U N100X U Z W N2000 ear naa N2200 aiiis 2 7 2 2 End Face Roughing Cycle G72 G72P ns Q nf U Au W Aw D Ad F f S s T t The execution of this cycle is the same as G71 other than parallel to X axis it is shown as below 127 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual rae pc af q _ Tool path OQ gt A Ss D N L R rapid traverse R F feedrate E Tool retraction amount is set by parameter 67 MRCDT or by parameter 067 in SETTING Co page Explanation 1 Cycle cutting parallel with X axis is done 2 Coordinate offset direction with finishing allowance Au Aw indicate coordinate offset and cut in direction when finishing Sign relationship of
333. ple 00100 00200 00300 N201 M98 P0300 M98 P0200 N202 M99 P0200 N98 P0400 ee N203 M99 b If a M99 command executes in main program the control will return to the beginning of main program therefore For example a M99 is inserted in the fit position of main program the block which the optional block skip function is closed the control returns to the beginning of main program when M99 executes If the optional block function switch opens the M99 is then omitted and control to the next block The control can not return to the beginning of the block if M99Pn is inserted it returns to the LPPE block which the sequence is n 149 O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Close the skip NOOA optional block N0050 switch NO060 0070 M99P0030 Switch on the skip optional block N0090 M02 c Subprogram and main program are indexed from MDI See the section of index of Chapter Four 4 4 14 So a subprogram can be performed from beginning In this case the M99 command is performed the control will return to the beginning of subprogram and perform repeatedly In the above operation if you want to stop the block at a fit position you can insert the M02 or IM30 in this fit position When the skip optional block switch is power on the above command executes if you
334. ple for program table one row indicates as a block one grid of a block indicates as a program word Program no 0 Program record Programmer Confirm K A F S T M L D 5 4321 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual N10 G5 X220 219 0 0 0 0 N11 GO X176 213 Pee feo tT PELLE Pe dete 13 Histor tft tert t tt fet ft tt a po B D O S S Aaen a a HIHI X860 0 lar E i fees 13 rp D Serpe D E 2 2 3 Format Input O D Q O r 7 NO U Q Q 3 Each program word composed into a block should be in accorded with the following format If the input is variable block format the number of program word in the block and word number in a programming word can be changed It is very convenient in programming and GSK983Ta CNC system uses this format 1 Metric input RD053 F032 S02 T03 N04 G02 aL 053 BL 053 E034 l MO IDO53KD 053 F050 S04 T04 2 Inch input RD044 F024 S02 T03 N04 G02 aL 044 BL 044 EON G M02 l ID044 KD044 F032 S04 T04 Note 1 a X or U B ZorW Note 2 Address and digit meanings are as shown below X L 0 g3 o The 3 digits in the following of decimal point he 5 digits in the front of decimal point Leading zero can be omitted With sign Absolute or incremental value Address Chapter 2 Programming D O 5 3 The 3 digits in the following of decimal point The 5 digits in the front of
335. ponding and K value is firstly performed and then move to the end point position with nonlinear movement the results are shown below 37 O gt D r D 9 N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 vo Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual L End point Start point Center of circle Note 7 Feedrate can be specified using address F in arc interpolation see 2 4 2 the error of corresponding actual feedrate is within 2 The feedrate performs along the arc after tool nose compensation is executed Note 8 When I K and R are specified simultaneously R is enabled but I and K are omitted Note 9 and K are specified zero arc tool straightly moves from start to end using G01 mode 2 5 6 Feedrate for SIN Curve Control G07 Function An axis in arc plane is not moved during arc cutting command the interpolation performs only it is regarded as imaginary axis along the feedrate of axis another feedrate of axis O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 SIN curve change is formed Format G07 a0 a is regarded as imaginary axis G07a1 a is regarded as movement axis Specifying as follows GO7 ZO Z axis is set to an imaginary axis G02 X0 Z0 110 0 F4 Feedrate of X axis changes with SIN curve GO7 Z1 Cancel imaginary Z axis F Note 1 The imaginary axis is only enabled for automatic operation It is disabled for manual That is movement
336. programming N14 1 System clock setting N14 1 1 Enter system clock management interface Clock setting is in the system management interface that appears when the power is just on When the system enters the version interface press key and enter into the system management interface OPERATOR puFnnhubS9E PLANT LAND 11 js aZqWBA ADMIN LAND h4eg35Fmz BH JpGia23fUw N14 1 2 Enter system setting interface Input correct password of the level 1 user and press to enter the operation options for level 1 users 383 CGSN I Hii GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual FILES MANAGE OPERATOR Press f or Number key to choose item Press again to enter into system setting different alter authority is given by the system automatically according to the user levels after the alteration is done press the set key to save the corresponding date into the system 2013 Y j4 M D H M S 1 0 CHN 1 ENG 0 C232 1 USB PASSWORD fs PASSWORD PASSWORD PASSWORD PASSWORD PASSWORD 1 O M 1 T 2 M 5 axis N14 1 3 Period function setting 384 Press soft function key Appendix14 DEADLINE period password as follows NO a th password 1 24th NO 1th password Olth password 02th password 03th password 04th password 05th password 06th password 07th password 08th password 09th password 10th password lith password 12th password Not activated
337. ps when the spindle stop The spindle stops when the spindle stop foe eer ane Oe eer eas is O display display PROD When the current value is displayed Display the actual position after the tool display the programmed position position compensation and the tool cutter compensation CTHD Continuous thread cutting not Not operate continuous thread cutting recommended po Detailed introduction S Detailed introduction PL Seas eae a l 1 Setas0 O as Setas0 O magnet switch mode grid mode magnet switch mode grid mode Z axis reference position return direction Z axis reference position return direction and and the gap initial position at power on is the gap initial position at power on is negative positive gt O D Q x On U o x S D r D s T 304 Appendix 5 Parameters ZMX X axis reference position return direction X axis reference position return direction and and the initial position of the gap at power the initial position of the gap at power on is on is negative positive Note 1 For the axis with the reference position return function the reference position return direction is same as the gap initial direction at power on while for the axis without the reference position return function the parameter only includes the gap initial direction Note 2 After the power on the gap compensation is executed when the movement direction is set by the p
338. put character and continuously press CANCEL the characters are cleared one by one from the end to the beginning The block more than 32 characters can t be input in one time it should be divided into several segments 261 gt Q O r K O O x Q a 5 ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual INSERT f After the inputting is correct press PROGRAM Program lock on 00002 N0002 00002 G50 X500 0 Z200 0 M12 EEA EE EDIT 15 12 27 AY cost on rr fT g Input the following programs with the same method Ch When the input content should be rewritten the operation is same as editing 5 30 program i At the beginning the cursor is moved to the last input character for input continuously The INSERT operation is exactly same as j After all input ends the operation is completed Press vey button to return to the beginning 4 4 16 Deleting a Program The program stored in the memory should be deleted When the program protection unlock is valid lock is invalid r a Select mode PROGRAM b Press it will be switched into any interface of program check or program content or program DELETE Cc After inputting O press the program of the input program number will be deleted 262 Chapter 4 Operation 4 4 17 Deleting All Programs When all programs stored in the memory are deleted the program protection unlock is valid lock is invalid
339. put in inch is not changed The following items are not be changed a Different input b Display unit c Range for max command value d Units for step and manual feed e Offset input f Others Note 1 The input unit in the manual is either 0 0001 inch or 0 001mm Note 2 When input in metric is performed the display unit is 0 01mm by setting the parameter 5 2 MDL 14 Chapter 2 Programming 2 3 3 Maximum Stroke The maximum stroke can be specified in the system see the following table Input in mm Input in inch Input in mm Input in inch Output in mm Output in mm Output in inch Output in inch 99999 999mm 3937 0078inch 99999 999mm 9999 9999 inch Note The above stroke should be changed with the different of machine tool please refer to the machine tool manufacture s manual 2 3 4 Program Origin and Coordinate System The program origin and coordinate system should be confirmed in programming Normally the program origin is a random point at the workpiece For example X axis origin is specified at the center of workpiece and Z axis origin is specified at the left surface of workpiece terminal surface See Fig 3 4 1 QO gt D r D me N U FR O Ca R S gt 3 Oo Program origin Fig 3 4 1 Program origin This coordinate system is called workpiece coordinate system There are two coordinate systems one is left hand and the other is right hand Right hand c
340. r Setting the following parameters PTET ST Wiss eran at Sco rani O D 3 S414 oe D gt 2 4 O Q S 2 10 7 6 Subprogram Call with M Code 3 2 M code set with parameter can be called subprogram That is N G X _ e e ore M98 PAAAA the command can be replaced with the following simple one but the operation is same Similarly to M98 subprogram displays at the COMND page but MF and M codes are not delivered The corresponding relationships of M code XX called with subprogram and the program number AAAA called by subprogram must be set into the parameter Up to three of M03 M97 can be employed for this kind of macro program call other than the M30 the MBUF1 MBUF2 of the parameter number 35 36 This command can be specified with MDI but it can not be employed the arguments Subprogram call will not be performed when these M codes are specified into the macro program called with G code or the subprogram called with M T codes And these M codes are regarded as common Setting the following parameters PTE 8 Ree wa car cose rea SB e OB ea O 180 Chapter 2 Programming 2 10 7 7 Macro Program Call with M Code M code set with parameter can called macro program that is N G65PA AAA lt Arguments specifying gt Same operations can be realized using the following commands 00001 M50 A1 0 B2 0 NC parameter 43 50 The corresponding relationships of the M code use for calling and macro program
341. r then specify the number of digits in the integer part and the number of decimal places enclosed in bracket One code is output for each of specified number of digits starting with the highest digit For each digit a code is output according to the settings ISO The decimal point is also output using a code set in the settings ISO Each variable must be a numeric value consisting of up to eight digits When high order digits are zeros these zeros are not output if PRT bit 7 of parameter 315 is 1 If parameter PRT is 0 a space 189 O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual code is output each time a zero is encountered When the number of decimal places is not zero digits in the decimal part are always output If the number of decimal places is zero no decimal point is output When PRT bit 7 of parameter 315 is 0 a space code is output to indicate a positive number instead of if parameter PRT is 1 no code is output 2 10 13 3 PCLOS PCLOS In order to release the connection of I O unit specify this command when all data output commands have terminated DC4 control code is output from the NC 2 10 13 4 Required Setting When Using this Function 1 The punch output is applied using the output unit by setting the number 341 parameter but it can not be input the storage box in this occasion 2 The number of output unit is preset to the numb
342. r 2 Programming 2 7 1 2 G92 Thread Cutting Cycle G92 The tool rapidly traverses from starting point to thread starting point cuts the thread surface rapidly retracts to thread surface at last rapidly returns to the starting point which cut path is a closed path For multi thread such cycle cutting is executed When there is a consecutive command following G92 for deep cut again cycle cutting again is executed Using consecutive command gradually increases cutting deep amount and deep thread cutting can be executed 1 Linear thread machining describes by using the following command F G92X U Z W E R Rapid traverse F Description with F code E Description with E code Selection L Thread lead Because of the servo system delays the angle in the left figure is about 45 or less than 45 The sign of digital followed address U and W is relative to the direction of path 1 and 2 in the occasion of incremental programming That is to say if path 1 advances along the negative direction of X axis the value of the U is negative The range of the thread leading and the limit of spindle speed and so on are the same as that in G32 Thread cutting Thread chamfering can be finished in the thread cutting cycle and it is started by a signal from machine tool Retracting distance r is set by the parameter 64 from 0 1L to 3 1L here L is leading The steps 1 2 3 and 4 can be finished by pressing t
343. r A OERE EEA OT 3 21 WHAT ISP ROGRAMMING aiana a a a a E 3 22S IRUCTURE OFAN NC PROGRA M sheni aeea E ENEE EEA EEEE EE E SE 3 Zieh MBIOCK SEET E E NE 4 Ze WO e e e a e e e eden aes 4 ee F Oa PU ee a a a a 6 22A Decimal Font Frogamiii Ng sce o e a it 7 226 ME COMMANA VAIO es EE E A T N ETTR 8 220 Progar NUMO ss EE E A E ASE E A 9 22 OguUonceNUMDET rensie IN 10 2230 OOWHONALIDIOCK SKID ariaa T E inte ct as oh lke cia ot on ele ee at 10 23 DINENSION WORD sosiccsicecacxsicdicvesscccavszscdanceacsscavwescdsaceansssasvascdeacavasesesvascivacevadesesseactiessiaciaestesenevauseneneniteedce 11 ZO CONMONCO AXCS A A A A 12 Zakil Coordinate GAS aNd Movements ieseni a a E 12 23A WICKTETNCNT SYSICIN aaea a a ieuteasyiedeat teas 13 2321 The least put increment MOUL UNIT siaina ban e a eT i a a e a aa 13 2322 Mmim n Movement umt OUTPUT Uni ee a E EE 14 2S2 TO Toldinpa init maa 1 FIC aO Mei a mada oetuditadaccectenearoadintass 14 VERS ero ama MIMOUN 1 1 0 lt emma en E a O 15 2 3 4 Program Origin And Coordinate System ccccccccccssccssscsssscseseeeesecesseeceseeeseeeeeseeseseeesseeesseeessas 15 2 3 5 Coordinate System and Machining Starting POINL ccccccccccccccsscccesssccesssccesscccesssecesssecessseeeeses 15 2360 Haec TONNE testes rate cle a a a a ast dn a eakeond aides 19 2 3 7 Absolute Command and Incremental COMMANA cccccccccccccessscseseccesesessseseessseceesseeeesseeeesas 19 2 3 8 Opecilying Diameter and RadiUS ikon
344. r execute the in position check 014 015 Detect the override setting DMR 026 Whether the alarm occurs when VRDY signal is connected before output PRDY 027 028 Setting command override CMR 031 032 Setting the feeding commanded limited value 070 071 In position width 074 075 Limited value of the position offset amount during stop 078 079 Limited value of the position offset amount during moving 082 083 Grid offset amount 086 087 Servo loop gain override Servo loop gain 124 125 Drift compensation amount of X and Z axes 128 129 Servo phase displacement amount 316 6 Whether execute the CDSCG feedback Whether execute the CDSCG feedback frequency detection detection beset ieee ected E E e position detection system is set for the rotary transformer the SS a or the pulse encoder gt in S4 bit or S code BCD 009 S4 bit code output the voltage symbol analog output ail Setting the spindle override function SOV Select the spindle stop signal for the normal open contact or NC contact SSTP The number of the spindle motor revolution during the spindle gear change The number of the spindle revolution during the spindle exact stop Setting the delay time of the spindle speed arrival signal 119 A spindle speed offset compensation value S4 bit analog output 120 123 When the spindle speed commanded voltage is 10V the spindle maximum revolution number corresponding to the gears 1 4 speed cont
345. r is cut 1 off As the alarm occurring press DELETE and RESET key simultaneously 0 for power on to clear the memory The absolute values of data by decimal point are beyond the range allowable 0 111 Datum exponent by floating point exceeds the range ee na a 113 ee 112 Divisor is zero 113 Function unallowable for user macro program A is used 114 Format other than lt expression gt is wrong 115 Value that can t be defined by variable is commanded me Parentheses nesting are beyond uerit 719 The argument of SORT is negative or that ofthe BCD is negative 122 The caling times of macro program are beyond the range 1 4 124 DOEND does not corespond one by one f 125 mhetomatot FORMULA swo o 126 Value n is beyond the range 12ns3 in DO statement 127 Commands of NC MACRO are mixed togetner J 128 Value n is beyond the range On 9099 in GOTO statement 7129 _ Address unallowable fs used in lt argument assignment 131 5ormore alarms occur in external alarm message a Sormore alarms occur extemal alarm messages 182 Uenege message 15 peed operaron message the external operation message 134 Thetooigroup numbers are overrange 16 S D A S 140 Tool no used is larger than 9932 The tool group commanded in part program is not set 142 The tools in a group are over 16 T code is not stored in the block of a program for tool group setting 14 KAN se
346. r the occasion of G70 G71 G72 and G73 the following commands can not be applied between the blocks which are specified with P and Q x The one shot G code other than G04 Dwell G code of group 01 other than GOO G01 G02 and G03 G codes of group 05 and 06 M98 M99 6 This dwell is valid and manual operation can be inserted when the canned cycle is performed But this cycle should be returned and restarted at the beginning of manual operation 140 Chapter 2 Programming When the manual operation is performed if the tool not retracts to its original position when restarting again even if the manual switches are opened the tool offsets the tool path because of the movement amount of manual operation 7 The sequence number between block P and Q must not same to the one of the stored block in program when the G70 G71 G72 or G73 is executing 8 In G70 G71 G72 and G73 chamfering or a corner R function can not be used in the block specified with P Q or No 069 alarm occurs 9 In G71 G76 cutting cycle the tool nose radius compensation is no used 10 Marco program interruption function can not be used when compound cycle is being executed 11 In general condition the tool start point should be set in the position beyond the range of closed figure formed by the workpiece path And the end coordinate of the block between P and Q should be correct check the program and the machining path before workpiece processing to prot
347. read cutting cycle Complex canned cycle Range of thread length see the following F 0 01 mm 500 00mm 0 001 inch 50 0000inch 0 0001 mm 500 0000mm 0 000001 inch 9 999999inch Spindle speed limitation is as shown below R gt 1 Max feedrate Thread lead length R Spindle speed r min Lead mm or inch Max feedrate mm min or inches min Max feedrate is limited by least one of the following speed 1 feederate per minute of Max command speed 2 Max speed value is limited by motor or machine tool Note 1 The spindle speed is read from the position encoder installed on the spindle Feed min is converted and the machine tool moves with the converted speed Note 2 Speed override is disabled for the converted speed Note 3 The converted speed is clamped Address F specifies the thread lead and the address F is the same as F used to specify feed min or feed rev Address E is only used for specifying the thread lead The last one of thread leads specified by E and F is enabled When thread cutting is not processed for feed min and feed rev F code keeps enabled regardless of E code In thread cutting block when E and F are in the same block the latter is valid Example program using the following Enabled feedrate thread lead sequence 23 QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 2 4 4 Feedrate 1 10 Feedrate inpu
348. rformed in a start up block the block starts after a start up block tool nose center is positioned to the programmed path of the block which is vertical to the starting point 4 Offset cancellation A block in G40 changed from G41 or G42 is called an offset cancellation block G41 G40 _ block for offset cancellation At the end of the previous block before the tool offset cancellation the tool nose center moves to a position which is vertical to the programmed path The tool is positioned below End point a aS om wee Programmed path 74 Chapter 2 Programming 5 When G41 G42 is newly specified in mode G41 G42 In this case the tool nose center at the end point of the previous block is vertically positioned to the programmed path of the previous block G42 G42 W 500 0 U 500 0 The above tool nose center position is not performed in the block in which G41 G42 is first specified 6 When the tool movement direction and that of workpiece are different in a block including G40 command If the tool retraction is performed in the specified direction the tool nose radius compensation X U and Z W should be cancelled at the machining end of the first block in the following figure G40X U Z W K l K U W Tool movement direction G40U W I K Workpiece position address and K must be in the same block with G40 and when address and K are specified without G40 they are called cham
349. ride The switch can be adjusted the spindle speed override from 50 120 4 3 9 Spindle Feeding Axis Interlock Switch gt Q O r K O O 0 DR Q a 5 No matter in whatever mode the position marked 0 is OFF and the position marked 1 is ON When the feeding and the spindle are ON the feeding axis and the spindle interlock are invalid When the feeding is OFF but the spindle is ON the feeding axis interlock is valid while the spindle interlock is invalid and the screen external information is displayed 2001 When the feeding axis and the spindle are OFF the feeding axis and the spindle interlock is valid and the screen external information is displayed 2002 228 Chapter 4 Operation 4 3 10 Manual Miscellaneous Function The function and the execution logic of these keys are set by PLC programming please refer to the PLC user manual of the corresponding version They respectively control ON OFF of each part of the machine pressing it once is ON and the switch is OFF USER1 USER10 are the undefined keys and redefined based on the user requirements gt Q O P K O x Q 5 The tool change key can be used for manual tool change debugging About the detailed method please refer to PLC user manual of corresponding version And the Nixie tube displays the current tool number 4 4 GSK983Ta Main Unit GSK983Ta main unit is shown as the figure below and inclu
350. ription ODVICE Output device selection Standard setting value 2 setting value is 2 RS232C baudrate etc should be set in parameter No 311 setting value is 3 RS232C baudrate etc should be set in parameter No 312 Parameter gt O D Q x oO U o S D rr D T 338 Appendix 5 Parameters PSKPFL FL speed of skip cutting applied to all axes setting range 6 15000 unit 1mm min inch output oO re GRMIN 1 GRMIN2 GRMIN3 GRMIN4 Description GRMIN 4 gear shift minimum spindle rotation number in constant surface control 1 4 G96 mode Setting range 0 9999 unit RPM Only valid when parameter No 307 SLOW 0 0363 PCFBKX 0364 PCFBKZ Description PCFBKZ Move amounts of X axis and Z axis in servo feedback detection PCFBKZ Note1 Servo feedback detection is not performed as it is set to 0 Note2 The move amount of servo feedback detection is fixed at 0 255mm 0 025inch Note3 the setting value is machine movement so it should be small as possible but not SO small to alarm Make sure to set a proper one Parameter No 0375 PPRIMX 0376 PPRIM Z Description PPRIMX Values of X axis and Z axis respectively set by auto coordinate system in PPRIMZ metric input mode The distance from the set origin point of the coordinate system to the 1 reference point is set by metric setting range 0 99999999 unit 0 001mm With inch metric switch select parameter 379 380 should be se
351. rms of d 1 F ae i Defining the figure A A B to the program The program commands are as follows G73P ns Q nf AD K Ak U Au W Aw D d F Cf S Cs N ns The commands from A A B are indicated into the block which its sequence number is from ns to nf N nf P The first sequence number of part machining block Q The last sequence number of this part is machined in the block I Retraction distance and direction along with X axis CAI saci Radius programming K Retraction distance and direction along with Z axis AK U The finishing remainder with respect to X axis direction 129 O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual AU ein Diameter programming W The finishing remainder with respect to Z axis Aw D Segmentation number Ad this value is equal to the repetition times of roughing F S T The F S and T functions in G73 block are is valid but the F S and T functions in the block in which the sequence number from ns to nf are all ignored According to the different signs of Au Aw Ai and Ak there are four kinds of different feed mode by G73 cycle machining A is the start tool point B C is the workpiece contour B C is the roughing contour B C is the finishing path The tool returns to point A after the cycle is completed 1 amp it0 ki Ausi Awe 2 i Skel Aus Awe O 2
352. rogram content stored in the memory can be rewritten and the program word is rewritten based on the unit di 2 1 Select mode PROGRAM 2 Press 3 Select the program number If the program has been already chosen direct operation from the step 4 otherwise search the program number 4 Search the word to be rewritten Ca Scanning Cb Searching with word 5 Rewrite insert or clear the word Note 1 Concept of the word and edit unit The word is composed by the address and the following digits Because the concept of the word is not clear regarding to the user program the concept of editing unit is used Editing unit is the object to rewrite or clear During scanning for one time the cursor is moved to the head of the editing unit and the word can be inserted behind the editing unit The definition of the editing unit 1 Before one address switching into the other one 2 Address character IF WHILE GOTO END DO EOB Based on the definition one word is also an editing unit About the explanation of editing strictly soeaking the word should be called as the editing unit Note 2 During the program editing the machining pauses because the single block stop or feed hold the program is not allowed to execute after the program rewriting inserting and clearing otherwise the program can t be performed correctly The program content is displayed on LCD after it is continued executing Therefore 268
353. rol The allowed maximum spindle speed 140 S4 bit analog output gain adjustment S4 bit binary system 12 bits output analog output low speed limited value and it is valid for all axes or the single axis 0343 0346 The spindle minimum speed in the constant surface speed control OO to the gears 1 2 3 4 se When the aaron nee rere position return decelerates set the acceleration as 1 or O DECX DECZ 012 Method and direction of the reference position return gt O KO D mD gt x on op sof U 2 S D a an D 5 D ep 300 Appendix 5 Parameters fen a E a 014 015 Capacity of the reference counter of each axis Whether the reference position return function is valid or not 082 083 Set the grid offset amount of each axis Set the low speed rate after the reference position return decelerates 159 160 Distance of each axis from the 2 reference position to the 1 one 007 Set the incremental value or the absolute value during the offset amount input Specified by the radius or the diameter during the offset amount input 010 Whether the data can be set when the program lock is OFF on the machine side 040 The limit detection allowance value of the external tool compensation B forbid to use 040 056 The data override of the outer dimension of the external tool compensation B forbid to use Set the very small movement amount is ignored during the cutter compensation
354. rvice There are no P and L commands at the beginning of the program for tool pe The tool groups are over 16 E l Dialogue 150 Corner R is commanded in the block of threading or rapid command programming Dimension direct input is commanded in the block containing the following command dialogue programming Dialogue 1 Non modal G code other than G04 programming 2 G02 G03 G90 G92 G94 or either of them in 01 group 348 Appendix 6 Alarm List Dialogue programming Dialogue The address behind is not C or R in drawing dimension direct input programming 154 Drawing dimension direct input is commanded for cutting direction block in Dialogue compound canned cycle G71 G72 II type programming No move is commanded in the block that has chamfering or corner R or in Dialogue next block programming 2 lines intersection can t be defined by 2 blocks containing drawing Dialogue dimension direct input programming In block X U _ _A__ angle command A depart from the range of Z axis 157 O or 180 1 in block Z W A __ angle command A depart from the range of X axis 90 or 270 1 158 Intersection can t be got for two lines angular difference is within 1 in drawing dimension direct input 152 Chamfering or corner R is not allowed for insertion too large 156 170 Alarm is issued for No 8000 8999 9000 9899 program edit which is disabled by parameters See parameter No 3
355. s 5 LSK 4 MDI 49 56 COMND RESTR MDI Cc Press the page button _ the interface of the next block will pop up which is shown as the following figure 245 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual NEXT BLOCK MDI 00001 NOOO D Note Here displays the next program The blank column is to input the program command SSeS He pd gt o oTr zas Note The softkey MDI is concave LSK t 14 50 47 COMND gt RESTR n MDI d Press the following keys in turn on the panel LJ Ant EEA Ia INPUT U10 5 is input e Press the following keys in turn on the panel gt Q O r K O O x Q a 5 VV ae oe e INPUT W20 5 is input which is shown as the following figure 00001 NO001 10 500 20 300 SUMMA SON eX soo vr fs amp LSK 14 51 36 Jeejee f Press the cycle start button on the machine operation panel to run the block 2 Before pressing cycle start clear Z 200 5 in X 10 5 Z 200 That is to say only run X10 5 246 Chapter 4 Operation a Press based on the following sequence input b Press 3 Clear the modal data Because G code mode and F E and T can t be cleared so the right modal data should be input again to correct 4 4 10 MDI Operation Start Press cycle start execute the command input by MDI
356. s 45 or less than 45 Operation F The described speed by F code E The described speed by E code O 3 Q O D N U 5 Q Q 3 D Q M50 1 5 G36 UG W G36 UA W G56 31868 TH1H8 G56 318668 TH1H8 G97 31000 HOS GO 51000 HOS GHA 470 0 245 8 T6161 HOB GEG A68 8 245 8 T161 HOB GO 49 4 Z 32 0 I 6 166 F1 5 GO 449 5 Z 30 0 FILS A49 0 5 A49 2 5 A48 5 Au8 9 5 A468 5 5 ASG 7 5 G36 UG W G36 UG WAS H36 H30 5 2 7 1 3 Inner Outer End Taper Face Turning Cycle G94 1 End face machining uses the following command G94X U Z W F 119 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual R rapid traverse F Described speed with F code In the occasion of incremental programming the positive negative sign of digital followed address U and W is relative to the direction of path 1 and 2 That is to say if path 1 advances along O 2 Q O m D s N U Q 3 2 the negative direction of Z axis the value of the W is negative The steps 1 2 3 and 4 can be finished by pressing the key of again and again in single block mode 2 Taper machining cycle is indicated by the following command G94X U Z W K F A R rapid traverse F Described speed with F code In the occasion of incremental programming relationships between the positive negative sign of 120 Chapter 2
357. s The sign should be considered End point End point Start point Start point 1 Center j of circle Center of circle 36 Chapter 2 Programming Note 3 In programming when the X Z U and W are all omitted or U and W are zero or the position specified by X and Z are same with the starting point the center is indicated by address and or K that is a round of 360 is specified For example G02 I Note 4 An arc within 180 can be specified when address R is employed in programming and it is can not be specified when the arc is more than 180 So G02 R and G03 R are not specify the whole round but arc of 0 does So the tool not moves Note 5 When address R value specified is less than the half distance from start to end point including R 0 R is omitted and a half round is generated If R is negative No 023 alarm occurs Note 6 When programming with I and K and the end point is not on the arc the tool moves in terms of the following figure 1 In arc command end point of two axes is coordinate one of them is on the arc after tool reaches the coordinate value of the axis end move directly to another axis end coordinate values by linear mode X End point T Center of circle II In arc command block when end point of two axes are not on the arc the arc path formed by corres
358. s not much changer Note 2 Acceleration deceleration is separately performed to each axis X and Z axes and the feedrate of each axis is changed between blocks so the actual tool path is inconsistent with programmed Actual tool path path For example a tool is only decelerated to feedrate along X axis in a block here the Z axis Q Q direction acceleration produces the actual tool path as shown below jel D N Te Programmed U path O Q mm a 3 5 Q The actual arc radius is less than the programmed arc radius in arc interpolation see the D4 3 in appendix four In the occasion of machine tool allowance and In order to reduce this error the small acceleration deceleration time constant of cutting feed is employed 2 5 Preparatory Function G Function Two digits following address G determines the meaning of the command for the concerned block G codes are divided into the following two types Type One shot G code The G code is effective only in the block in which it is specified The G code is effective after specifying once until another G code of the same Modal G code group is replaced For example G01 and G00 are modal G codes in group 01 G01 X i Zs G01 is effective in this range Xl GOO Zs There are 3 series G codes One is standard G code the other is special G code B C Two selections of the codes are set by parameter 7 5 GSP This manual uses standard G code Special
359. s of Variable In terms of variable number the variable can be divided into local common and system variables Usage and character of each variable is different 2 10 3 1 Local Variable 1 33 Local variable is that the local variable employed in program That s it to say the variable i is used by calling in program in any case and the local variable i is used by calling in program in another place both of them are actually different So if macro program A calls macro program B in multiple calls the value of the local variable used in macro A will not be destroyed due to it is employed in macro B Local variable can be transferred and assigned by arguments for the corresponding address of arguments refer to Section 2 10 7 the initial status of the variable not be transferred is lt Vacant gt the user can use it freely the local variable 1 83 will be cleared to lt Vacant gt when power OFF 2 10 3 2 Common Variable 100 149 500 509 Local variable is the variable employed in local in program the common variable are employed with main program and each macro which the subprogram calls from main program So the common variable i computed the result from some one macro program can be employed in other macro program The usage of common variable can not be applied in system user can employ it freely Common variables from 100 to 149 are cleared into lt Vacant gt when the power is turned off but from 500 to
360. s of input system The system variable from 5001 to 5102 can not be used for the left of command operation System Position information Read in ar Semen 5001 End coordinate in the section of X axis A B S I O End coordinate in the section of Z axis 5021 Current coordinate in the section of X axis A B S M Cannot l Current coordinate in the section of Z axis 5041 End coordinate in the section of X axis A B S O T Cannot 5042 End coordinate in the section of Z axis 5061 X axis skip signal position A B S K P 5062 Z axis skip signal position O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual X axis tool offset value Cannot Z axis tool offset value X axis servo position deviation Cannot Z axis servo position deviation Meaning End point Current coordinate Current coordinate The effective coordinate of top command Equivalent command Equivalent to position of SKIP to POS MACHINE POS ABSOLUTE signal in G31 Coordinate Work Machine coordinate Work coordinate system System system coordinate system coordinate system system Tool offsets Image tool Considering tool nose Considering tool nose Considering tool cutter nose position base point position base point position nose base point compensation without position considering Note Tool position offset value is not the offset amount for the previous block but for the current block Th
361. s represented as 35 commanded M codes T is represented as 2 commanded T codes S is represented as the last commanded S codes At the starting position of M or T codes it displays the first commanded code op g Press ast button it is OFF Ch Observe the figure output M S and T codes with MDI output in MDI mode In such situation M S and T codes to be output aren t displayed on the program restarting interface CI For the automatic return in Auto mode check whether the distance displayed on the remaining distance is correct or not and whether the tool hits the workpiece when the tool is 265 gt Q O r K O O x Q a 5 ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual moved to the machining restarting position In Jog mode the tool is moved to one position on which the following movement doesn t hit the workpiece and then press the cycle start button Then the tool moves to the position of restarting machining in manual feedrate based on the sequence of Z and X axes and RESTR disappear and the machining starts from the block of the program restarting 2 The machining type Q is restarted after the following situation occurs Ca Cut off the power supply b Press the emergency stop button c The machine instantly stops due to the stored stroke limit alarm d The coordinate system is changed after the previous automatic operation Example C I G50 command is given by MDI II T
362. s with above factors The compensation at the compensation point n n 0 1 2 127 is only defined by the zone mechanical error of n compensation origin 1 x compensation interval n compensation origin x compensation interval i e compared the absolute value of actual displacement amount of mechanism setting for the compensation positions is as follows error move more set to compensation value error move less set to compensation value H8 6 Others H8 6 1 Cancellation of pitch error compensation In pitch error compensation setting if a previous value of an axis is required to be eliminated it can be done by following methods 1 Select the parameter No which set the axis compensation to be eliminated 2 Set the compensation to 9999 Either of the selected parameter No in 1 for compensation of the axis is available for elimination H8 6 2 Precautions for setting gt go ge eD Q x lt 0 Op r Q OQ eD a go eD Y rm 9 H mMm e i O e go eD mD Op Lad mD gt E mD mD 356 Appendix 8 Storage Type Pitch Error Compensation Function I Compensation interval setting parameter No 383 384 As interval is positive compensated by positive value negative compensated by its absolute value Zero not compensated It is shown by an absolute one even a negative compensation interv
363. sbDisk Emergency Off 4 Copy NC Pars UsbDisk CNC Emergency On Copy PLC Pars UsbDisk CNC Emergency Off Copy Screw Pars UsbDisk CNC Emergency On LSK hook EDIT 15 21 49 LSK see eee EDIT 15 21 49 eee ee Users can select the operation options by moving the yellow bar as need and press to RETURN continue the corresponding operations pressing key can return to previous menu L12 4 Workpiece programs transmission by USB interfaces As PROGRAM key is pressed extended key BL a above the little keypad and by U DISK pressing it the NC host unit displays Press it the screen shows the following operation options 376 Appendix 12 USB Interface Transmission PROGRAM FILE ACCESS H Press or Number key to choose item Copy PRO NcRam UsbDisk in EDIT mode PT LSK EDIT 15 22 09 U DISK YES RETURN YES Users can select the operation options by moving the yellow bar as need and press to continue the corresponding operations pressing key can reture to previous menu Note Only in the edit mode is the transmission enable 377 CGSN m HIS GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual Appendix13 C232 Serial Port Transmission M13 1 General GSK983Ta system communicates with PC by C232 serial port to transmit parameters pitch compensations offsets and workpiece programs The operations are listed below Classification Function Mode Opera
364. should be specified In G29 block all specified axes can be moved to intermediate point specified by the previous G28 command at the rapid traverse rate and then to the specified point Example for G28 and G29 X inch Reference position R Tool change on point R B Intermediate T0 0 50 0 A 30 0 C z mm gt 30 0 130 0 180 0 Diameter programming G28 U40 0 W100 0 Program from A to B T0202 G29 U 40 0 W50 0 from the intermediate point specified by G28 to the program from B to C 45 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual The above mentioned indicates programmer is not need compute the actual distance from intermediate to reference position 2 5 8 4 G30 Returns the 2 Reference Position Function The command is employed on specified axis to move the tool to the 2 reference position Format G30 X Cu Z w The 2 reference position is set by the distance of 1 reference position with parameter This function is used for 1 reference position return but not for the 1 reference position return and it is same as G28 returns to the reference position A G29 command applied along with the G30 can make the tool position to the situation through the intermediate point set by G30 and its movement is the same as command G28 followed with G29 Usually G30 uses the different occasions for the tool position and reference position in the automatic tool change ATC Note Before G30 command
365. specified by F in workpiece system or the current position moves to the position specified with U W values Format G01 X U Z W F Diameter programming G01 X4 0 Z2 01 F2 0 or G01 U2 0 W 2 59 F2 0 See the figure Feedrate specified by address F is the speed which tool moves along linear If feederate override is 0 the feedrate is 0 and the diagnosis parameter 700 4 is 1 Note 1 feedrate of each axis see the following 28 Chapter 2 Programming Lx Feedrate along X axis Fx Fa F Lz Feedrate along Z axis Fz F L Thereinto F Feedrate L Movement distance Lx Movement distance along X axis Lz Movement distance along Z axis 2 O0diq 7 O gt D re D s N U FR O Ca i S 3 vo Unit inch 2 5 3 Chamfering and Corner R The following chamfering and corner can be simply inserted between two blocks Command Tool movement G01 Z W b l i Moving from a to d till to c In the right figure tool moves to i is the movement of X i point b is specified with Moving from a to d till c Chamfering i is the movement of X Z X incremental or absolute command G01 X U b Ktk In the right figure tool moves to l Moving from a to d till to c Chamfering point b is specified with k is the movement of Z X57 incremental or absolute command Or CES I G01 Z W R r In the right figure tool moves to
366. starts to execute after the execution of the interrupted block 370 Appendix 11 Interruption Function of User Macro Program K11 5 Diagnosis UINT 1 User macro program interruption ON 0 User macro program interruption OFF This signal is the external signal for user macro program interruption Intended for the applications for high speed the signal may be detected through not only the signal generated by strong power but also external signal Therefore the manufacturer needs to connect the external signal to the position of the signal as shown below The position is not applicable for other purposes 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 festa E a a a a a Note that the diagnosis numbers are 044 and 120 K11 6 Internal Wiring Diagram Interruption signal for user macro program This function is optional for implementing this function X44 3 input in IO unit is needed K11 7 Application Examples K11 7 1 Processing for starting tool fault detection using external signal lt Specifications gt Malfunction restoration is immediately executed even in cycle movement It performs only once in whole process lt Parameter setting gt TSE 0 Edge triggering mode MUSR 1 Enable user macro program interruption function MSUB Subprogram type macro program type user macro program interruption MPRM Setting of the M codes for the control of user macro program interruption 371 CGSR I WIE GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual
367. t in mm can be shifted to the min unit 1 10 by setting the parameter FMIC F1 F150 000 Feed min 0 14mm min 0 1 mm min 15000 0mm min F1 F500000 Feed rev 0 001mm r 0 001 mm r 500 000mm r O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 F1 F500 000 Thread lead F command 0 001mm 0 001 mm 500 000mm E1 E9999999 Thread lead E command 0 00001mm 0 0001 mm 99 99999mm 2 4 5 Automatic Acceleration Deceleration A time constant automatically produces acceleration or deceleration to avoid the mechanical system trembles during starting or stopping So the acceleration deceleration is not considered when a programming is performed A pointed corner can not be machined due to automatic acceleration deceleration A dwell command G04 should be inserted between two blocks if you machine a pointed corner Dwell command inserts Programmed path ______ Actual tool path If a dwell command is inserted the actual tool path is consistent with programmed path The faster the feedrate is and the longer the acceleration deceleration time is the more the corner error is 24 Chapter 2 Programming Note 1 NC processes between blocks as shown below Previous block Positioning Cutting feed Unmovable New block Positioning Cutting feed tinted o o o X Command speed is decelerated to zero the next block is then performed again O The following block is orderly performed the feedrate i
368. t measuring value when there is difference between the coordinate system used in programming and the one commanded by G50 and set by the automatic coordinate system O gt x y D T x O D 33 5 O s b After pressing on the machine operation panel the tool leaves face A and the spindle is stopped revolving Cc Measure the distance B from the programming origin to face A OFFSET d Press rs If the interface of the workpiece coordinate offset is not selected press once more e Input 10 0 L input the input N is twinkling 253 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual WORK COORDINATES POI LSK 4 14 56 33 Jeee e HE Ch After pressing L button on the machine operation panel the tool leaves face B and the Q Workpiece offset interface o gt Cf Input input and then the offset amount is input into the place aN of Z of the workpiece coordinate offset O Cg Cut face B in Manual mode O T e i spindle is stopped Ci Measure the diameter a on face B j Input input and then the offset amount is input into the place of X of the workpiece coordinate offset Through the above operation the offset amount of 0 gt O is automatically set in the workpiece coordinate offset meanwhile the actual set coordinate system complies with the programmed one Then the offset amount of the standard tool is 0
369. t setting range O 9999 unit r min Note if it is set to 0 then no clamping to spindle speed Parameter No 0140 PSANGN Description Range 00 1250 Standard setting value1000 adjust method 1 Set the standard setting value 1000 2 Specify the max value of S analog quantity 10V 3 Detect output voltage 4 Set PSANGN again according to the following formula 10 0 _______ X 1000 set value Measure voltage V After setting parameter then specify S analog quantity is the max 10V finally ensure the output voltage is 10V Parameter No 0141 TIME Description TIME Preset the using time and operation can preset too setting range 0 32767 unit 0 1h Parameter No 0142 TIME2 Description TIME2 Preset the using time setting range 0 99999999 unit 0 1h Parameter No 0143 LT1X1 0144 LT121 gt D Q x On U o x S D r D T Appendix 5 Parameters no To SSR Traz LT3X1 Set upper limit of the stroke T37 setting range 0 99999999 unit 0 001mm metric output T3x2 0 99999999 unit 0 0001 inch inch output T377 Among then no 151 158 also can be used in setting operations when it is diameter specifying X axis is specified by diameter Parameter No 0159 REF2X 0160 REF2Z Description sigjawelied G xipueddy REF2X Distance from 2 reference point o to 1 reference point X or Z axis REF2Z respectively When it is diameter specifying X
370. t too Only valid for those axes set in auto coordinate system by parameter 309 Parameter No 0379 PPRI1X sigjawelied G xipueddy 339 ri GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual w p oo Description PPRI1X Values of X axis and Z axis respectively set by auto coordinate system in PPRTIZ inch input mode The distance from the set origin point of the coordinate system to the 1 reference point is set by inch Setting range 0 99999999 unit0 0001inch With inch metric switch select parameter 375 376 should be set too Only valid for those axes set in auto coordinate system by parameter 309 Parameter No 0383 PECINTX 0384 PECINTZ Description PECINTX Intervals setting of X axis and Z axis pitch error compensation respectively PECINTZ setting range 8000 20000000 unit 0 001mm metric input 4000 20000000 unit 0 0001 inch inch input Max compensation interval set intervalx127 Parameter No 0387 Program password Program A secret digits stored in advance for program lock not displayed only for the password program after the No 9000 Setting range 1 99999999 0408 LOCK UNLOCK LOCK When value input is identical with that of parameter No 387 the UNLOCK program lock is open otherwise is locked Note when the value of parameter No 387 is 0 the program lock is invalid no matter NC power supply is connected or off Don t put the value other than O into parameter if program lock is not needed
371. ter 2 Programming Function The coordinate system of distance from current tool position to the origin of coordinate system is setup after the command is executed This coordinate system is called workpiece coordinate system Once it is setup the following absolute command is regarded as the coordinate value within this coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system is used for workpiece machining The X is diameter value when programming with diameter Origin QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo Unit mm G50X12 87Z237 51 Diameter programming In above program G50 is used for ensuring the tool nose position is coincident with program starting point and it must be defined at the beginning of block x Q Start equals standard point 120 0 dia G50 X120 0 Z70 0 Diameter programming As the above mentioned shown some base point on tool post is consistent with the starting point of program and coordinate system should be set at the beginning of program by G50 In order to make the tool nose move along the programmed path the position difference from tool nose to the base point must be compensated with tool offset 47 O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 AA pak WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Note 1 When a coordinate system is specified by G50 in offset mode the specified position is tool coordinate value which is
372. ter chamfering and corner R block Move direction or amount is not right in a block after chamfering and corner R block 2 or more I K R in a block for chamfering and corner R command Taper command in chamfering and corner R block 055 Move amount less than chamfering and corner R in chamfering and corner R block 056 Address X or Z and or K commanded in chamfering block GO1X U lor GO1Z W K 059 The program of the selected part number is not found external part number selection A function 050 Sequence number specified is not found in the searching or program restart Address P or Q is not specified in the block that has G70 G71 G72 G73 Value behind address D is not integer in the block that has G71 G72 and G73 Values specified by K D are not positive or by Ais a disabled angle in the block that has G76 Values specified by I K D are negative in the block that has G74 G75 X is commanded whether value is O or not or Z is commanded whether K value is O or not in the block that has G74 G75 063 Sequence number specified by P Q is not found in the block that has G70 G71 G72 and G73 GOO or G01 of group 01 is not commanded for G71 G72 and G73 in a block that is numbered by P Z W G71 or X U G72 is commanded for G71 G72 in a block that is numbered by P G code other than G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 is commanded for 086 G71 G72 G73 between blocks specified by P and Q G70 G71 G72
373. the above figure Coordinate Coordinate system setting G50 setting G50 Specifying X axis coordinate value with diameter X axis coordinate value with diameter x E T diameter or radius value with parameter X value of tool position offset seg 20 2 4 Feed Function 2 4 1 Rapid Traverse Rate Chapter 2 Programming Parameter of cutting depth by using G90 G94 and l l Specifying radius value G70 G76 along with X axis D and K Radius specifying for arc interpolation R and K Specifying with radius Feedrate along with X axis direction Radius change rev radius change min Note 1 In the following explanation command programming is not specified diameter or radius But value of X axis is indicated with diameter value when the diameter command is performed Value of X axis is indicated with radius value when the radius command is performed Note 2 When diameter value is used in tool offset and tool position offset value is changed to cut the outer diameter the outer diameter is then changed with diameter value For example Offset value changes for 10mm and outer diameter changes 10mm at the diameter value when tool keeps invariable Note 3 Tool position offset uses diameter value the tool offset value can be set to the tool length value QO gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo In rapid traverse mode each axis on the machine tool moves at the specified rate Normally the
374. the drawing center Path after override O D Program After override Gc Drawing center aN O GO rogrammed path E i When the tool path is not closed to the drawing center the tool path will exceed the drawing range after scaling the figure Then the following four parameters can be used RANGE X MAX Range X Maximum RANGE Z MIN Range X Minimum RANGE Z MAX Range Z Maximum RANGE Z MIN Range Z Minimum Then the drawing center GCX GCZ can be calculated by the following formula GCX K MAX X CMIN 2 GCZ Z MAX Z MIN 2 Note 2 Even X axis is specified by the diameter during programming X MAX X MIN is also specified by the radius The values are set based on the input units 0 001mm or 0 0001mch Moreover if the inserted unit 1 10 is selected it is changed into 0 0001mm or 0 00001inch As long as these parameters are set they remain valid during selecting the drawing before pressing T key Even the workpiece coordinate origin is changed the drawing origin and center doesn t change on the figure In other words the workpiece coordinate origin is always complied with the drawing one 278 Chapter 4 Operation Example X l X Drawing point BOMM 90mm Gc 30mm 50mm Pa eee epee ee eee eee G50x60 Z90 after executing Pd 7 Z Drawing origin Drawing origin workpiece origin After executing G50 command the drawing point is moved as the dot a
375. the minimum set unit is In the metric input the minimum set unit is 0 01mm in the inch input it is 0 0001inch 0 01mm in the inch input it is 0 0001inch and remains unchanged and remains unchanged The minimum movement unit is 0 0001inch The minimum movement unit is 0 001mm the machine in inch system the machine in metric system Detailed introduction pC Setast Ci Stas ADFT Execute automatic drift compensation Not execute automatic drift compensation SCW gt D Q x On U o x S D r D s T 302 When M30 is commanded M30 is sent to the machine side and FIN signal is returned then the block is continuously executed from the head of the program or FIN signal doesn t return from the machine side while the external resetting signal is returned then the program is returned to the head and the system becomes the resetting state in Auto mode Between two non cutting blocks or the error detection is valid the commanded speed decelerates into 0 and confirm the mechanical position has already reached the commanded one then the next block can be executed the confirmation is called as the in position detection The start button on the keypad panel is directly started from NC side not via the machine side only in MDI mode After commanding M30 only M30 is sent from the machine side and the reset amp rewind signals are not used the program doesn t return to the head i
376. ting procedures Parameter input Emergency 9999 data input input Program storage O prg no gt data data input Pommunicalon i enp P 4 9999 data input All program storage Edit O 9999 data input parameter for pitch Emergency P 9999 data input input error compensation stop ON Parameter output P 9999 data output Offset output P 9999 data output icati P ter for pitch Communication Farameter tor pite Edit P 9999 data output output error All program output FO 9999 Hata output One program output O prg no data output M13 2 Program transmission in C232 serial port communication mode 1 Connection Connect the GSK983Ta special communication cables to 9 pin serial port of PC and C232 interface in the 983Ta CNC operation panel 2 System setting As PARAMETER key is pressed extended key Ea above the little keypad and by U DISK ADD SET pressing it the NC host unit displays and when ladd set key is pressed the screen displays auxiliary setting interface Change the communication mode to YES noe a 0 C232 mode Press soft function key and setting succeed is displayed Setting communication mode is finished as follows 378 Appendix 13 C232 Serial Port Transmission ADD SET 00006 N0003 PAR SWITCH 1 0 0FF 1 0N MODE o 0 C232 1 USB BaudRate 38400 StopBits 2 Parity Even Bytesize 7 2
377. tion Fig3 4 a In execution Original program Interruption signal a input UINT In execution User macro program i NC statement in interruption interruption program Fig3 4 b Fig 3 4 User macro program interruption and NC statement The relationship between the interruption in the midway of block Fig A 16 a and the interruption at the end of block Fig A 16 b is as above figure Interruption will be executed wherever interruption signal is input K11 3 5 Receiving of user macro program interruption signal UINT There are two modes of receiving of user macro program interruption signal UINT state triggering and edge triggering The so called state triggering is that it is active in the ON state of signal Edge triggering is that the rise edge signal is active when the storage signal is switched from OFF to ON The use of a mode shall be determined by parameter 025 TSE If the parameter is set to state triggering mode if the interruption signal is active user macro program interruption can be executed when signal UINT is ON therefore interruption program can be repeatedly executed when the signal UINT is continuously ON In addition when the parameter is set to edge triggering mode interruption program is completed instantly only the program commanded by macro program etc because it is only active 366 Appendix 11 Interruption Function of User Macro Program during the rising edge
378. tion ends Note When G32 G34 G76 or G92 The situations of special G code B G33 G34 G76 or G78 the situations of special G codes G33 G34 G78 or G21 are used for thread cutting even feed hold button is pressed the feeding doesn t stop until the command execution is completed However during the thread cutting cycle press feed hold button the tool is retracted in oblique line and returned to the cycle start position 217 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 4 3 6 3 Single Block amp Op SINGLE When the button is pressed press button and then the control device stops after one block is executed each time 1 Reference position return and the single block command The reference position commands G28 G29 and G30 are valid for the single block function in the intermediate position 2 Single block running in the canned cycle In the canned cycle the single block stop positions are as below Note If single block button is pressed the actual running results of the canned cycles G90 G92 G94 or G70 G76 in the special G code B G77 G78 G79 and G70 G 76 in the special G code C G20 G21 G24 and G72 G78 are as below rs Rapid movement hh Feeding Tool path It s assumed that the tool paths 1 4 are taken as one cycle and it stops after the 4 path is executed gt Q O r K O O x Q a 5 joss eee It s assumed that the tool paths 1 7 ar
379. ttas iad insices 166 2 10 4 6 Calculation Sequence Changes by Using J eessssssssseeeecccceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesssesseseeeeees 166 AMORA TCC Ooa a ext T socal cence O 167 ZAOAS lt Processine for Precision Decrease erien ea a aoa encase eae eth San ate arate 167 Z 103 CONMOr COMMANO ii a icra E E eum oumaana Roum monumes 168 ZNO Osh CSOT OMAN EX DEES SIO Men ad asics todriaata reacosatra alosneesd a shee nei AAA 168 DEMO Cyel Enss ate ieaaha det T ied Sect ty sien Sea duh deed te lesen ac dae 169 2 10 6 Programming and Storage of User Macro Program Body ccccccccsccccsseeeseeseteeeeseeeeseeens 172 2 10 6 1 Programming of User Macro Program Bod y ccssssssssssseececceeeeeececeeeaaseeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeqaas 172 21002 Storascor User Macro Prostrani BOd y ireen rea AE dae enet 173 210 0 Macro Statement and NC Statement ocena ena a A 173 2 10 6 4 Macro Program Statement Execution nren a aaa 174 210 7 Macro Program Gall COMMMANO senreste roia o en a a E E AEA 175 PaO AM SEC GO eE E 176 2 I0 Modal Call GOO a A A ee E 178 ZOT Mulapl Caloren E E E E A E A dacauaeneanatanncs 178 H1074 Malpie Modal Gal rsss orn Sete Gaatalbandrsnas Wont Diaclsenn tetodaetenindaamanaadss 178 21079 Macto Program Call with G COG cies asn es aorstes E aii aan 179 210276 Subprocrann Call Wit WE C Oderin o hircnnadecn stem emeadietvediadesnals 180 2ZAOJ 7 Macro Program Call with M COG nereikes ated Sei a a ee a biel ieleashiaddebinns
380. tween measuring points are identical Set the 1st measuring point error from reference point positive direction to the n 1 compensation point and the 2nd 3rd measuring point errors to n 2 n 3 compensation points respectively The compensation method for negative direction is the same For example pitch error compensation origin is O the interval is 8 000mm the 1st set position is 8 000mm the 127th set position is 1016 000mm so the compensation is made in a range from 0 to 1016 000mm gt O o Q x On U A S D r D T 341 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual l Machine coord sys l l l l U a Ref point pitch error compensation origin is 0 If pitch error compensation origin is 60 the 61st set position is 8mm the O set position is 480mm the 127th set position is 536 mm so the compensation is made in a range from 480mm to 536mm gt 3 Ref point pitch error compensation origin is 60 2 7 Pitch error compensation origin is defined by machine stroke and reference point and it is set by parameter No 336 and 337 S Pitch error compensation is set by an absolute incremental value and signs indicate 3 compensation direction s When an axis move positively to compensate error for compensation error for 7 compensation When an axis move negatively to compensate error for compensation error for compensation Parameter
381. uld be modified into 198 0 200 0 2 0mm GO00X204000 Fewer retraction along X axis G37Z800000 Move to Z axis measure position 112 Chapter 2 Programming If tool arrives to the measure position in Z804000 the offset value changes into 804 0 800 4mm T0101 It is displaced by the D difference the new displacement is valid when specifying the T code anew Note 1 No 081 alarm occurs when T code is not specified before G36 or G37 Note 2 No 82 alarm occurs when T code is specified and shares the same block with G36 or G37 5 Offset value There are 16 group offset numbers 01 16 also you can extend to 32 group Note 3 Measure speed v and are regarded as parameter setting refer to 4 for v value These values are set by machine tool builder Note 4 v and must be a positive v gt e Note 5 Watching the measure position arrival signal each time 2ms The following measure error generates ERRmax Fmx1 60x2 1000 Where ERRmax the max measure error mm Fm Measure feedrate mm min Note 6 Erasing cutter compensation before specifying G36 and G37 Note 7 When manual movement is inserted to the movement of measure feedrate tool returns to the previous position which the manual insertion restarts Note 8 Tool stops after lasting 16ms at most and after the measure closes to signal when a coordinate is closed to the signal by measuring This coordinate is not for machine stop offset value are determined by
382. up is specified for 3 times T0203 the offset number sequence is as below T0206 The tool corresponding to 1 01 05 05 T0202 2 The tool corresponding to 2 03 06 02 T0304 T0309 P05L1200 T0405 3 The tool corresponding to 3 04 09 09 193 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 2 11 3 The Tool Group Number Specified in the Machining Process In the machining process the following T codes are specified the tool group number Until now all the tools are used up the tools of A A group are started to use 99 means to differ the common commands The tools of AA group are cancelled 88 means to differ the common commands The following is the practical example The previous tools end the tools of 01 group are started to use The tool offset of 01 group is cancelled The tools of 01 group end The tool number 05 and the offset number 08 are selected The 05 tool offset is cancelled The 5 tool ends and the tool of group 02 is started to use The tools of group 2 end and the tools of group 01 are started to use If the group commands many offset numbers 2 offset number is selected Otherwise the previous same offset number is used D Q O r D s N U Q 3 mD 2 11 4 Executing the Tool Lifetime Management 2 11 4 1 The Counter of the Tool Lifetime 1 The lifetime is specified by frequency From the cycle start of the machining progr
383. ur 39 SA pak WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 X i 7 Taper thread The lead is LZ if as45 The lead is LX if a gt 45 Thread lead is generally specified with a radius For example Thread lead and command value command for F code E176534 0 002346inch 0 176534inch 0 2346mm 17 6534mm Generally speaking because of servo system delay start and end points in thread cutting can not have correct value In order to compensate this value the specified thread length should be longer than the need one See the Section 2 4 3 40 For example 5 5 1 1 Straight thread cutting X axis 3mm e 7mm The following values are employed during programming Thread lead 0 4 mm 0 3 mm 2 0 15 mm Cutting depth 0 1 mm cutting twice Input in inch radius programming G00 U 3 1 G32 W 11 5 F0 4 G00 U 3 1 Chapter 2 Programming W 11 5 U 3 3 Cut more 0 1 mm for the 2 cutting G32 W 11 5 G00 U 3 2 W 11 5 For example 5 5 1 2 Taper thread cutting X axis Z axis m 4 0 a Unit mm The following values are used for programming Metric input diameter programming JOJOWEIP Ey JO QWEIP Q S as a eS Jojoweip rit Thread lead it is 0 35 mm on Z axis direction O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 Oo 0 1 2mm
384. ure K11 2 Command Methods K11 2 1 Significant conditions User macro program interruption is only effective during the execution of a program Namely the significant conditions are 1 Auto mode is selected 2 STL start light is set to ON 3 User macro program interruption is yet not being executed 363 CGSR I WIE GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual User macro program interruption cannot be executed in manual operation JOG STEP HANDLE etc K11 2 2 Format of command The interruption signal UINT of user macro program interruption function is set to be disabled or enabled by M96 and M97 codes in principle That is when M96 is commanded interruption signal UINT may be used to start user macro program interruption until M97 is commanded or NC is reset Vice versus user macro program interruption cannot be started even by inputting interruption signal UINT after M97 or reset And interruption signal UINT is ignored before M96 is commanded Format M96 Pxxxx User macro program interruption ON Specifying an interruption program number M97 User macro program OFF Interruption signal ULNT Effective mtenuption Ri Input signal When ULNT hold ON Fig 2 2 Relation between M96 M97 and interruption signal Once M97 is commanded interruption signal will be inactive The interruption signal input after M97 is kept until the input of M96 Once M96 is commanded user macro program interruptio
385. ut manually side B of workpiece 17 O gt D r D s N U FR O Ca ER S gt 3 vo Sr E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Side B 6 X axis does not moves the tool leaves from the Z axis and the spindle rotation stops 7 Clear the relative coordinate value of X axis Address U see Section 4 4 6 8 Measure the distance of r above figure 9 View relative coordinate display and move the tool to X a r Z 6 dcoordinate position at the same time O D Q O r 7 NO U om Q Q 3 a and p are coordinate value of starting point If G50 XaZB is specified at the beginning of program the coordinate system is set when the program is executed in actual machining offset setting is the same as that of method 1 when tool change is performed Method 3 The reference point is regarded as the starting point at the head of program and the coordinate system setting is performed If tool nose moves using the tool offset Starting point Reference point When reference point returns the tool starting point is coincident with reference point The following steps are the same as of method 2 the tool nose can not be positioned at the reference point but a standard tool can do so Error of both can be set by tool offset value offset see Section 2 6 or moving the workpiece coordinate system see Section 2 5 10 18 Chapter 2 Programmi
386. uting program For this purpose a parameter 8314 MINT is designed for switching between interrupting in the midway at the end of block If interrupting in the midway is selected by the parameter type 1 Once interruption signal UINT is input the executing move or dwell is interrupted and the interruption program is executed 365 CGSR I WIE GSK983T Turning CNC System User Manual 2 When there is an NC statement in the interruption program the interrupted block command disappears and the NC statement in the interruption program is executed In case of return the next block at the interruption of the original program is executed If there is no NC statement in the a interruption program the interrupted block is continuously executed when M99 is used to return to the original program On the other hand it is interrupted type II at the end of a block 1 Once interruption signal UINT is input the interruption program instead of the command of the currently executing block is interrupted 2 When there is an NC statement in the interruption program it is executed at the end of the executing block In any case the control switches to the interruption program once interruption signal is input Interruption by s macro program In execution ka ca i ii NNC command restart no NC Interruption signal statement in interruption program In execution a input UINT User macro program interrup
387. ve coordinate Affected the inserted pulse is added value Machine position value Affected the inserted pulse is added 5 Display of movement amount The movement amount of MPG interruption is displayed on diagnosis DGNOS interface Sequence number fo s Interruption movement amount of MPG in X coordinate gt Q O P iN O Q as 5 elole Interruption movement amount of MPG in Z coordinate Unit 0 001mm mm input 0 0001inch inch input Note The movement amount can be cleared with the clear operation 4 3 8 Manual Spindle Function O ORIENTATION In Manual mode press CCW the spindle is CCW rotated In Manual mode press Spindle stop the spindle decelerates and stops In Manual mode press CW the spindle is CW rotated Note The spindle actual revolving direction may vary based on the different machines please refer to the 22 Sr mz GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual machine user manual Spindle positioning When the machine is configurated with the servo spindle drive press key in manual mode or command M19 in Auto MDI mode the system will output the positioning start signal into the servo drive After the drive completes the spindle positioning it sends the finish signal and CNC receives the positioning finish signal the spindle positioning ends The spindle positioning function is mainly used in tool change and hole boring The spindle speed over
388. want to end it cutting the switch N1040 N1050 N1060 N1070 M02 N1080 M99P105 d Mg9La When executing the above commands the subprogram call repetition times L is compelling changed into Q times If the skip optional switch is closed in the following program the repetition times will become into zero when the subprogram ending command M99 is executed the main program is then performed Main program Subprogram M98P L99 M99LO M99 150 Chapter 2 Programming 2 10 User Custom Macro Program 2 10 1 Brief The function of user macro program A and B are basically same and their differences are described in Section 10 10 Some kind of function is composited by some one group command as like the subprogram restores into the memory These memory functions are represented with a command So the function performed only needs to describe its representation command This kind of commands registered are regarded as Macro program body and its representative commands are called User macro 2 commands the macro program body can be simplified as Macro program And the user macro r command can also be called Macro program command L No Well regulated 5 rogram prog a Q d Macro program entity 0 va He at A group of 3 Lone commands 5 User macro command used for some function The programmer needs to remember the macro command onl
389. when M98 M99 block is included the address other than O N L and P the single block is enabled when it stops 2 9 3 Control Method of Subprogram There are some especial usages see the following a When the sequence number is specified with address P at the last block of the subprogram the subprogram does not return to the main program after ending to call the next block of subprogram It returns to the block specified with the sequence number which is specified with address P but this function is only effective in Auto mode 148 The return time of the specified block is usually longer than the normal time Main program Subprogram N00 10 O01 0 e ee N0O020 N1020 N0030 NAOS Oc N0040 M98 P1010 N1040 N0O050 N1050 NO060 OX N1060 N0070 jo N1070 M99 P0070 Chapter 2 Programming Note If the return objective is an independent block of M98 M99 The addresses are not command other than O N L and P when it returns from a subprogram it will be omitted the M98 M99 block to perform next block consecutively For example 00100 00200 00300 N201 M98 paro M98 P0200 N202 M98 P0400 N2003 3 M99 P0202 O D p M99 Mashining N203 not N202 So the block of specified sequence number with M99PXXXX is same when it is a sequence v number O la a 3 3 mD Co For exam
390. witch optional skip block is set to 1 the block with n is ignored When optional skip block switch is set to 0 the block with n is valid namely the operator can perform the block skip for the block with n 1 in 1 can be omitted Press Skip key on the operation panel to determine whether the block is ignored When Optional skip block 2 1 the omitted area is shown below 10 Chapter 2 Programming 2N123G01X4 00 N7856 Omittance area Example N100 X100 N101 2 Z100 N102 2 3 X200 N103 3 Z200 In the above examples blocks N101 and N102 are skipped when Optional block skip 2 1 and blocks N102 and N103 are skipped when Optional block skip 3 1 Note 1 A slash must be specified at the head of a block if a slash is placed elsewhere in the block the information from the slash to EOB code is ignored however the information in front of the slash is still enabled Note 2 When an optional block skip switch is on TH and TV checks are made for the skipped portion in the same way as when the optional block skip switch is off Note 3 The optional block skip is processed when it is transferred from memory to cushion memory When the slash is specified at the head of a block is read into a cushion even if the block skip switch is ON this block will not be ignored Note 4 This function is still enabled during the sequence number searches Note 5 This function is disabl
391. x Q a 5 Start position Origin Face A a d to turn into the page 2 Start the spindle 3 After the 1 tool nose is moved to point P in MDI mode press of transfer to the next block and in the coordinate interface U of the coordinate display is twinkling on the screen after pressing U and U numerical value of the relative coordinate is 284 Chapter 4 Operation SHIFT cleared with same after pressing W W is twinkling W numerical value of the SHIFT relative coordinate can also be cleared with then the position of the standard tool is set and 2 tool is changed after retracting into the safe position P 4 After 2 tool nose is moved to point P press and to enter the GEOM INPUT interface of It s assumed to use 2 tool offset press to input N 02 the cursor stops below the tool offset number of G02 group then press U key U is INPUT twinkling on present coordinate relative coordinate and then press Then the coordinate value of U is directly input into X tool offset value of G02 group and press W INPUT W is twinkling and then press the coordinate value of W will be directly input into Z tool offset value in G02 group then the offset values of 2 tool and standard one are set 285 gt Q O P q D O O mm Q ms 5 SA pak E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC
392. x lt NN F D O Q r Q U Q Q 2 Q 0 02 3 605 0 701mm D4 3 Errors during Arc Cutting in the Radius Direction When the servo motor is used the errors occurs between the input and the output axes because the motor lags behind During the linear interpolation the error doesn t exist during the tool is moved on the commanded path while in arc interpolation the error occurs especially in the arc cutting at high speed in radius direction And the error can be obtained with the following process 295 gt O O a x lt D 5 v O Q r 4 Q 5 Q Q 2 Q 3 AA pak E gt E E GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual Commanded path Actual path Ar Radius error maximum value mm V Feedrate mm sec r Arc radius T1 The index acceleration and deceleration time constant during cutting sec T1 0 T2 Time constant of the motor sec Note The index acceleration and deceleration time constant is 0 in the system Ar Ti T hei eaten 1 In the actual machining the machining radius r mm and allowance error Ar mm of the workpiece are given so the allowed speed V mm sec can be obtained with formula 1 The acceleration and deceleration time constant during cutting vary with the different machines please refer to the manual from the machine manufacturer 296 The time constant of the servo motor is calculated with To gt 33x10
393. xis select signal HX HZ is conducted with the MPG inserted axis the contact is closed 4 3 7 3 MPG Insert Movement 1 Movement amount The movement amount of MPG insert is same as the manual hand wheel feeding one The movement amount depends on the MPG scale and MPG feedrate override X1 X10 X100 and is added with the automatic running movement amount 2 Movement speed The axial speed during the MPG interruption is the automatic running speed is added with the movement one during the MPG interruption Therefore when the axial movement speed exceeds the 226 Chapter 4 Operation rapid traverse rate the axial one is limited in the rapid movement speed set by parameters 92 RPDFX and 93 RPDFX Because the part exceeding the rapid traverse rate the displacement amount and the MPG scale display value become invalid 3 The relation between MPG interruption movement and various signals is shown as the following list Signal Movement Machine lock Affected The tool doesn t move when the machine lock is ON Display lock Affected The relative coordinate values will not change when the display is locked X axis mirror Not affected The hand wheel disc is rotated in CW direction the machine image moves in CW 4 The relation between the MPG insert movement and the various position display is shown as below Display Movement Absolute Not affected the inserted pulse is not added coordinate value Relati
394. y it is not necessary to remember the command in the macro body There are three essentials for the user macro program the variable can be applied into the macro program body the user macro program can be finished the operation in terms of the variable and the actual value can be evaluated the variable for the user macro command Note Each machine tool builder should store their user macro program and save them into the memory Suppose that the PCB needs to change due to the malfunction In order to rapidly check the malfunction GSK service personnel or end user who can bear the maintenance and they should understand the content of user macro program 151 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 09011 G65P9011A1015 X 1 Z 4 e wie Macro program body call 9011 definition 1 and 4 variables Le are 10 and 5 separately 1 and 4 can be used to instead of the unknown operation distance S The current function can be formed when programming the macro program using certain function For the changeable or unrecognized data which can be written into the program using variable One No of group technic can be offered U Same workpiece can be collected into one group a current user macro program can be 3 programmed using the variable in a fit group With the same method the other workpiece in the same z group is not needed to program The programmer evaluates the actual value to the variable z
395. y only for grid See to GRDSZ parameter No 14 and No 15 Setting range 0 32767 detection unit Reference point moving positively negatively the value is set positive negative which should not beyond the capacity of reference counter siajawelied G xipueddy 318 Appendix 5 Parameters 1 reference point return in grid mode X DCX 1 turn signal from OFF to Rapid rate ON defines reference point K Set by parameter No 114 OoOo l a We Set between two arids OFF DEX Grid motor al 1 turn signal Grid offset set by parameter No 82 83 X axis return positively Select manual consecutive feed mode JOG connect ZRN signal connected with ON feed to the reference point by JOG button and the mobile part of the machine tool will move rapidly slow down but keep moving in a low speed when meeting the deceleration limit switch which give deceleration signals DCX and DCZ in the return to reference point and finally stop and send return end signals ZPX ZPZ when arriving the fist grid position after deceleration limit switch reset About the directions after reference point return they can be set by all axes that once reference return completed and ZPX ZPZ signals sent no manual feed instructions can be executed before ZRN signal cut gt O D 5 Q x oO U o S D oa D o 319 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual 2 reference point return in magnetic switch m
396. y be wasted while arranging the memory can eliminate the wasting 4 4 22 12 Display All Program Numbers of All Programs in the Memory As introduced in 5 22 11 once the content of the memory is cleared all the program numbers of the stored programs are displayed 212 Chapter 4 Operation DIRECTORY P1 00002 N0002 01111 00002 00006 00001 LSK t AUTO 15 14 33 Jee mo fT O gt 4 4 22 13 Editing a User Macro The editing of the user macro is operated same as editing a program in Edit mode which has K already released the program protection state but they also have the different points SHIFT D a Press D O SHIFT Press once the cursor is changed from used commonly into In such state press the buttons of digits or letters from MDI keypad then the corresponding digits or letters are input After one character is input the cursor is restored to if the displacement key is pressed twice the cursor also returns to Example 273 gt Q O r K O O x Q a 5 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual PROGRAM Program_lock on 00006 NO003 00006 Niel lt N2 IF 1 LE 90 GOTO 1 N3 2 P H1 1 kA EK BKK EDIT z 15 56 Jeee e b Deleting rewriting and inserting a program When the input user macro is required to be edit the cursor can only move into the following characters or the marks I Ad
397. y one axis is commanded only the commanded axis returns N1G01X100 0Z100 0F500 x n N2Z200 0 150 0 200 0 4 N3X150 0 Manual gt Q O P q D O O DR Q ms 5 Switch ON Switch OFF Fd E Manual operation during the cutter compensation when the next move block is an incremental When the following commands are incremental ones operation is same no matter when the switch is ON or OFF F Manual operation during cutter compensation When the switch is OFF After manual operation is performed with the switch OFF during cutter compensation automatic operation is restarted then the tool moves parallel to the movement that would have been performed if manual movement had not been performed The amount of separation equals to the one that was performed manually When the switch is ON Operation of the machine upon return to automatic operation after manual insert with the switch is ON during execution with an absolute command program in the cutter compensation mode will be described The vector created from the remaining part of the current block and the beginning of the next block is shifted in parallel A new vector is created based on the next block the block following the next block and the amount of manual movement This also applies when manual operation is performed during cornering 213 Sr WEI GSK983Ta Turning CNC System User Manual ee Toolpathafter
398. yed 3 Method 3 PROGRAM b Press to switch into D a Select mode PRGRAM CHECK or interface 4 c Press Ol I in order the stored next program is displayed Note 1 Return to the first program number after all the stored program numbers are displayed Note 2 The content of the buffer is cleared when the program number is started to search PROGRAM b Press to switch into 4 4 15 Inputting a Program The machining program can be directly input from MDI keypad and stored into the memory 2 Ca Switch into mode The program protection unlock is valid lock is invalid gt Q O r K O O x Q a 5 PROGRAM b Press to switch into the interface of program check or program the current program interface is displayed INSERT Cc Input the program number O to be stored press to change into the new interface 260 Chapter 4 Operation PROGRAM Program 00002 N0002 00002 EK FEE EEE EDIT 15 11 05 CHECK DIK PRGRAM d Input one block based on the machining program Example When G50 x500 0 Z200 0 M12 are input e 5 Lo x 5 Lo Lo L Lol z ENAERE mM Mm 1 2 EOB PROGRAM 00002 N0002 00002 E gt Q O P D O O aD mm Q ms 5 G50X500 07200 0M12 EDIT 15 12 07 Jeee rer CANCEL e When the input is wrong press to clear the last in

GSK983Ta User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents